JP2022072889A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably executing a performance.SOLUTION: A game machine has a left input lever and a right input lever (operation parts) that can execute gripping operation (predetermined input operation) for pressing an operation member and can change a mode between a mode (first mode) being separated by rotary movement along a plane including a vertical direction and a horizontal direction and a connected mode (second mode). An entire part (movable part) of the left input lever and the right input lever is configured so as to travel (different operation) in a fore-and-aft direction unlike in the rotary movement (operation of a changing process) in a change to a connected mode in one part (time ti10 to time tf17) when a both-hands-participation type shell cracking mission performance occurs and when a mode in which the left input lever and the right input lever are connected is taken.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a starting port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, the special gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-31031

However, although various effects are performed in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state in the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration for executing the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is used to solve the above problems.
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
An operation unit that can execute predetermined input operations and can change its form,
A second form that controls the form change of the operation unit and is different from the first form to the first form when a predetermined effect generation condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state or the special gaming state. Equipped with a morphological control means that changes the morphology of
At least a part of the operation unit is composed of a movable unit capable of performing an operation different from the operation of the process of changing from the first form to the second form when the second form is taken.
It is characterized in that the movable portion is configured to be movable in at least a part of the case where the operating portion takes the second form.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing the state where the front block of the pachinko machine is removed Front view of the game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Front view of the game board showing the operating state of the left movable member and the right movable member Perspective view of the game board Partial cut perspective view and cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of a plurality of decorative portions by the cut surface including the XM-XM line of FIG. 7. Partial cut perspective view and cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of a plurality of decorative portions by the cut surface including the XD-XD line of FIG. 7. Partial cut perspective view and cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of a plurality of decorative portions by the cut surface including the XU-XU line of FIG. 7. Front view of a game board with a reflective decoration Front view of the game board showing the relative positions of the main parts involved in the production by the reflective decoration part. FIG. 18 is a perspective cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the reflective decorative body by the cut surface including Y1-Y1. In order to explain the form in which the light from the annular arrangement light source is applied to the reflection decoration portion, a cross-sectional view schematically showing the vicinity of the reflection decoration body by the cut surface including Y1-Y1 in FIG. In order to explain the form in which the light from the light source used for emitting light of the central decoration is irradiated to the reflecting decoration, a cross-sectional view schematically showing the vicinity of the reflecting decoration by the cut surface including Y1-Y1 in FIG. A timing chart that schematically shows the operation control of the upper approach regulation mechanism and the distribution mechanism in the round where the game ball can enter the privilege area. A cross-sectional view showing the operation mode of the upper entry control mechanism and the distribution mechanism by the cross section of the cut surface including the Y2-Y2 line of FIG. A timing chart showing the control of the production in the round where the game ball can enter the privilege area Explanatory diagram schematically showing the transition of the production in the round where the game ball can enter the privilege area Explanatory drawing schematically showing the arrangement, structure and operation of the input operation apparatus by the cut surface including X1-X1 of FIG. A timing chart showing the control of a one-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to change, and the control when the player participates in the effect. Explanatory diagram schematically showing the transition of one-handed participation type staging A timing chart showing the control of a one-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to shorten the time, and the control when the player participates in the effect. A timing chart showing the control of a one-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to change, and the control when the player does not participate in the effect. Explanatory drawing schematically showing the arrangement, structure and operation of the right input operation device and the left input operation device by the cut surface including X1-X1 of FIG. A timing chart showing the control of a two-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to change, and the control when the player participates in the effect. Explanatory drawing schematically showing the transition of the two-handed participation type production in the special game state scheduled to change, and the transition when the player participates in the production. A timing chart showing the control of a two-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to shorten the time, and the control when the player participates in the effect. A timing chart showing the control of a two-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to change, and the control when the player does not participate in the effect. Explanatory drawing schematically showing the transition of the two-handed participation type production except when the player participates in the two-handed participation type production of the special game state scheduled to change. Explanatory drawing schematically showing the operation of the left input lever and the right input lever in the front-rear direction by the cut surface including X1-X1 of FIG. A timing chart showing control when a player participates in the effect, which is different from the control shown in FIG. 33 of the two-handed participation type effect in the special game state scheduled to change. Explanatory diagram showing operation control when the left input lever and the right input lever rotate and move An explanatory diagram schematically showing the transition when a player participates in the production, which is a transition different from the case shown in FIG. 34 of the two-handed participation type production in the special game state scheduled to change. A timing chart showing control when a player participates in the effect, which is different from the control shown in FIG. 35 of the two-handed participation type effect in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time. A timing chart showing control when the player does not participate in the effect, which is different from the control shown in FIG. 36 of the two-handed participation type effect in the special game state scheduled to change.

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pachinko machine 100 as an example of the ball game machine which is a kind of the gaming machine will be described, and then the modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, with respect to the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is open to the intermediate block 103. Shows. Further, FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable. The outer frame 101, the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 form a frame body for detachably attaching the game board 400 described later. In the following, the combination of the outer frame 101, the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 in the pachinko machine 100 may be collectively referred to as a “frame body”.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially four-sided frame member to which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and a pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and has a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A support mechanism for supporting the island and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body thereof may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 1, for example, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. Is configured to be rotatable by being inserted. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving it upward by a certain amount, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released. To. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap the middle block 103 on the front side, and the middle block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side of the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the front block 102 is rotatably supported forward with respect to the intermediate block 103 and can be removed by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by the rear block support mechanism 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side of the front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configurations as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 backward with respect to the intermediate block 103 so as to be rotatable rearward. Moreover, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front. There is a lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block lock mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation for the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the counterclockwise rotation operation by the predetermined operation key for the key cylinder 141. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 is released, and the front block 102 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates the opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. After that, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening and closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening and closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation by the rear block opening / closing regulation mechanism. It is said that.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing restricting mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening / closing restricting units 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting unit 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated are provided in these three opening / closing restricting portions 150A to 150C. By rotating the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, the engagement state with the opening portion arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction changes in the closed state of the rear block 104, whereby the open / close prohibition posture corresponding to the open / close prohibition state is changed. It is possible to switch between and the open / close allowable posture corresponding to the open / close allowable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the open / close allowable posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the open / close prohibited posture and the open / close allowable posture, the open / close prohibited state and the open / close allowable state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and the configuration is such that only rotation is performed at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a certain direction, or it may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each device shift between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them were formed in the rear block 104 in the open / closed state of the rear block 104 as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C corresponding to the remaining portion exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open / close allowable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby providing crime prevention. Has been enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement control mechanism that regulates the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement control mechanism is composed of a combination of the flow control piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and the regulation change unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 is urged by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In the state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow control piece 161 is set to a movement allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball, and specifically, it is regulated. It is pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the changing portion 162. The flow control piece 161 is arranged so as to be offset to the rear side with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, the game ball is allowed to move from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the open state of the front block 102), the pressing of the flow control piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102, and the movement is prohibited. The flow control piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the state of prohibition of movement, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side when viewed from the rear). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the switch is set is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at the lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side when viewed from the front). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided with respect to the 103.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to. In the state where the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210A is formed through in the front-rear direction over a wide range excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located behind the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, and a main storage mechanism 230. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls and a launch operation device 250 operated by a player to launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a protrusion forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210. Upper protrusion 217, lower protrusion 218 located below the upper protrusion 217 and protruding forward, and upper protrusion 217 and lower protrusion 217 on the right side of the lower protrusion 218. A flat portion 219, which is composed of a substantially flat region located behind 218 and in which the launch operating device 250 is arranged, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged in the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged in the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that makes it possible to visually recognize the rear side while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the central panel 220 has a panel frame 221 attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 (see FIG. 3) and a light transmissive fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. A front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially parallel to the front plate 222 on the rear side of the panel frame 221 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and game balls rented from the game field. As shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, a storage unit 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 for operating the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 has an inflow port 231A for flowing the game ball from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage unit 231 and an outlet (not shown) for flowing out the game ball from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed on the upstream side of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the discharge port.

The game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage unit 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted or a game ball rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being arranged in a row. When the ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball pulling operation is performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball pulling mechanism 243 for causing the ball to be pulled out, and a ball pulling operation member 242 for operating the ball pulling mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage unit 231 is full, they flow into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C even when the ball removal operation for the ball removal operation member 232 is performed.

The bottom surface of the reservoir 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) with respect to the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball pulling operation on the ball pulling operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the opened state until the returning operation (for example, the pressing operation again) is performed on the ball pulling operation member 242. Be maintained. Behind the inflow port 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the launch operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252, and the launch handle 252. It includes a launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the ejection of the game ball due to the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is invalidated by the operation of the launch stop switch 255, the launch handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launcher 330.

Further, a frame light emitting device 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides with respect to the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion. It has a left side edge portion 211D located on the lower side with respect to the 211B and a right side edge portion 211E located on the lower side with respect to the upper right side edge portion 211C as a light emitting portion, and frame emission corresponding to each light emitting portion. Devices 271 to 275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. It is composed of an apparatus 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 electrically connects one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components in an integrated manner. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G and the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (rearward) the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right side portion of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays numerical values according to the balance of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning banknotes, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit. When a banknote, a card, or the like is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in the valid state in which the numerical value corresponding to the amount of money is displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated with the rent out of the game balls. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the card recording the balance are returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of performing an input operation different from the launch operation by the player. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, for example, the input operation device 260 includes a press operation device 261 capable of pushing operation, a rotation operation device 262 capable of rotation operation, and a selection operation capable of up / down / left / right direction operation. It is equipped with a device 263. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with a left input operation device 801L and a right input operation device 801R that allow the player to perform an input operation different from the launch operation and the input operation for the input operation device 260. Has been done. In FIGS. 1 to 4 and 8, the left input operation device 801L and the right input operation device 801R are not shown.

With these operating devices 261 to 263, 801L and 801R, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a device setting operation. , It is possible to perform production setting operations that enable the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information about the player, and to manage these operations as necessary for the player and the game hall. Is made feasible. The input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by the input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration is configured to be feasible by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation. By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanied by the input operation, such as actively encouraging the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and a function of integrating the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on commands from the launcher 330 (see FIG. 3) that ejects, the main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) that is mounted on the back side of the game board 400 and controls the game progress in an integrated manner, and the main control device 370. It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding the game ball released from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed therein. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are various devices (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271) provided in the front block 102. 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) for electrically connecting devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, main control device 370 and sub control device 390). The signal relay device 311 including wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat plate-shaped base 401 having a through hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. The 402, the inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the substrate 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. It is provided with a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area 409. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area 409 from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. .. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right side beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back surface side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching passage 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launching device 330 but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning back from the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area 409 and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area 409 due to its own weight. The game area 409 has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game area 409 is generally divided into an outer peripheral portion by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is divided into a substantially flat surface by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially flat by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into shapes. Various structures provided in the game area 409 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially feeds game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the firing position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), the launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the launch position, the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 333 of the game board 400. It is provided with a guiding member 335 for guiding to the launch passage 401B. As described above, the launching device 330 operates in response to the launching operation on the launching operation device 250, and the drive control of the launching solenoid 334 changes according to the launching operation on the launching operation device 250 to adjust the launching force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a split structure for accommodating the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back surface side of the game board 400. Specifically, the mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is housed inside, for example, a translucent board case 391 sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace like the main control board 920. The sub-control device 390 is attached to the back side of the game board 400.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the intermediate block 103 includes a backup power supply 601 (see FIG. 10) that supplies power for backup to the main control board 920. The backup power supply 601 has a power supply unit that is composed of a capacitor, a rechargeable battery, etc. and can store power for backup, and power (charge) applied to the power supply unit or to supply a charging voltage to the power supply unit. ) Is combined with an electric circuit for controlling such as discharging. The backup power supply 601 charges the power of the charging voltage supplied from the power supply unit 901 (see FIG. 10) into a capacitor, for example, and the power stored in the capacitor by charging is used as the power for backup of the main control board 920. (See FIG. 10). The backup power supply 601 is attached to the back side of the game board 400. The electric circuit for storing and discharging the power of the backup power supply 601 does not necessarily have to be provided integrally with the power supply unit of the backup power supply 601 (for example, provided on one printed circuit board), and the like. It may be provided at the above-mentioned place, as a part of the power supply / emission control board 900 provided on the frame body side, or as a part of the main control board 920.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area 409 on the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a flow change member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of a game ball, and a center arranged substantially in the center of the base 401. The structure 420, the starting device according to the first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420 (specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B) and the center. A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) arranged on the lower right side of the structure 420 and a large winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the game board 400. The combination operating device 435 located on the upper right side and above (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433 and 434, and the general winning device 439A arranged on the left and right sides of the lower middle starting winning device 431B. , 439B and.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into a predetermined area. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle start winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 to detect the game ball that entered the right starting winning device 432, lower big winning switch 443 to detect the game ball that entered the lower big winning device 433, upper big winning device Top prize switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered 434, the combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the combination operation device 435, the start switch 446 that detects the game ball that has entered the start device 436, and above. A non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered the non-specific passage (non-privilege area 409N) formed inside the large prize-winning device 434, and a specific passage (privilege area 409V) formed inside the lower prize-winning device 433. ), A specific passage switch 448 for detecting the game ball that has entered the game board, and general prize switches 449A and 449B for detecting the game ball that has entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B are installed on the game board 400.

Further, the gaming board 400 is provided with various sensors for fraud prevention (see FIG. 10), and it is possible to detect an abnormality generated in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes an entry port, and the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the game area 409. Games of each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, the upper big winning device 434 and the general winning device 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the substrate 401 through a through hole formed in the substrate 401. .. Further, the game ball that has not entered each winning device is guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream side portion of the game area 409. The game balls guided to the collection / discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game field. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or is a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by the above, and the starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning slot in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter. It may be a ball entry port where the ball is discharged again to the game area 409 without being paid out.

Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B related to the first special symbol does not change the entry probability of the game ball and enters them. The game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401. Further, the right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to the starting device related to the first special symbol, the general winning device. It may be provided in one or more of 439A and 439B. Further, the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or may be represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanically operating mechanism.

The right start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a right entry control mechanism 452 and a right entry control mechanism that change the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by shifting between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture. It is equipped with a right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives the 452. The right entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry control solenoid 462, and when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Can be narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, two movable pieces are at their tips. By arranging the portions so that the distance between the portions is widened, the game ball can enter the right start winning device 432. The right entry control mechanism 452 enters right when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). According to the drive by the regulation solenoid 462, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower prize winning device 433 has a lower entry control mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the lower entry regulation mechanism. A lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 453 is provided. When the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower prize winning device 433 because the lower entry control mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening). When the lower entry control mechanism 453 is in the approach allowable posture, the lower entry control mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 has an upper entry control mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the upper entry regulation mechanism. By shifting between the upper approach control motor 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 and the non-guided posture and the guided posture, the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 is placed in the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism 437 for distribution and a distribution solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism 437 are provided. When the upper entry control mechanism 454 is in the no-entry posture, the upper entry control mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434, but the upper entry control mechanism 454. When the player is in the admissible posture, the game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 434 by opening the entrance of the upper entry control mechanism 454. In addition, the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism 437 is in a non-guided posture that protrudes forward, and the distribution mechanism 437 is in a guided posture that immerses in the rear. In some cases, you will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage and the non-specific passage are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given an advantageous gaming state as a privilege.

As for the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry restriction mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured and the winning opening (or entry opening) of each device is used. Corresponding to the posture change of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the positions and orientations of the operating member differs depending on each posture. All you need is. Further, as a mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball such as the right entry control mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state, which is special. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B. When a lottery based on (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won, or a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442. When the lottery based on the above (hereinafter also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the lower entry control solenoid 463 and the upper entry control motor 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 takes an approach allowable posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. If the lottery is won, the distribution solenoid 465 also operates, and the distribution mechanism 437 takes a guided posture for a predetermined time over a predetermined number of times.

The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting the conditions necessary for the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 to start operation. After winning the big hit lottery, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 passes. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special gaming state at the timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to configure either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 to start the operation on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, and instead of or instead of it. In addition, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 may start operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variation display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times the game is held. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are divided in advance in the light emitting region corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, the first special symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 related to a special symbol, a second special symbol that is variablely displayed in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol that is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to a special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a first special symbol, and a special symbol hold that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start winning, a winning / failing determination of a lottery executed based on one starting winning, and a lottery based on the winning / failing determination. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting winning switch. Even if it is detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). However, the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emission states (lighting, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of hold times by the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

Further, the game board 400 relates to a normal symbol display device 473, which displays the normal symbol in a variable manner along with the normal symbol lottery, and confirms and displays the normal symbol as a stop symbol according to the lottery result, and the normal symbol. An ordinary symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of hold times of the right of the unit game is provided. The right to unit games related to ordinary symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The ordinary symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). An ordinary pattern is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of holds by the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols may be variablely displayed or the decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and final display of the decorative symbol do not always start to change at the timing when they completely match, or stop display as a final display. It is not necessary, and the fluctuation may be started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the confirmation display may be performed at substantially the same timing.

Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub-control board 940. Performs various light emission effects and status notification by light emission.

Further, in the game board 400, the remaining amount display unit 611 (see FIG. 10) that displays information corresponding to the remaining amount (amount of electricity, amount of electric charge) of the backup power supply 601 corresponds to a part of the game board 400. It is provided at a position visible from the front side of the lower right portion (for example, a part of the central structure 420 and next to the decorative symbol display device 479). In FIG. 7, the remaining amount display unit 611 is not shown.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the remaining amount display unit 611 is composed of one light emitting unit, and the lighting mode of the light emitting unit is changed according to the remaining amount of the backup power supply 601. For example, when the remaining amount of the backup power supply 601 is zero, the light emitting part is continuously turned off, and the light emitting part blinks (lights intermittently) until the remaining amount increases due to charging and reaches the maximum capacity. However, when the remaining amount reaches the maximum capacity, the light emitting unit lights continuously.

The remaining amount display unit 611 may be composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and the number of light emitting units to be lit may increase according to the remaining amount of the backup power supply 601. The remaining amount display unit 611 may be a 7-segment LED or a 7-segment LED. It may be configured by a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device and may display the remaining amount of the backup power supply 601 as a numerical percentage display. Further, in the remaining amount display unit 611 composed of one or a plurality of light emitting units, instead of changing the lighting mode of the light emitting unit and the number of light emitting units to be lit, and in addition to the change, the balance of the backup power supply 601 remains. The color of the light emitting unit may change depending on the amount.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. The normal gaming state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "normal gaming state") is a state in which the variation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-time saving state"). handle.

If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the upper prize winning device 434) during the special gaming state that shifts based on the winning. The game state that shifts after the special game state differs depending on whether or not it is. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time reduction state (hereinafter, "time reduction state"). (Also referred to as)), and the game state (hereinafter also referred to as “low probability state”) in which the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as “low probability state”). In the following, it will also be referred to as "short-time game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the time is shortened and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state. It shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a "probability variable gaming state") which is (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state").

The time-saving gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but then returns to the normal gaming state. Further, the probabilistic gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal gaming state.

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-mentioned configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the above-mentioned gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration may further include a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states, or a configuration may be configured in which the gaming states are shifted under conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions.

In addition, the opportunity to shift to the special gaming state does not have to be limited to the case of winning in the special symbol lottery, and the gaming ball is in the gaming area in the normal gaming state in addition to or in place of the configuration. It may be configured to shift to the special gaming state when entering a predetermined specific area (so-called V area).

For example, when a predetermined small hit, which is a kind of non-winning, is selected in the special symbol lottery, the upper prize winning device 434 is opened in the normal game state, and the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 is a non-specific passage ( A special gaming state may be generated when entering the specific passage by being guided to the specific passage by the distribution mechanism 437 that distributes the non-specific region 409N) and the specific passage (specific region 409V). In addition, in a pachinko machine provided with a non-specific passage and a specific passage inside a bonus device having an entrance that can be opened and closed, which is different from the large winning device that operates in a special gaming state, a game ball is placed at a predetermined winning opening. When the player enters, the entrance of the accessory device is opened, and the game ball that has entered the accessory device from the opened entrance is guided to the specific passage by the distribution mechanism that divides the non-specific passage and the specific passage. A special gaming state may be generated when the player enters the specific passage.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured to have a setting changing function capable of changing the setting of the ball ejection rate (machine discount, payout rate) of the game ball. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment can set one game mode from a plurality of types (for example, nine types) of game modes in which the combination of the initial hit probability and the probability change continuation rate is different. At the same time, the game mode to be set can be changed as needed, and the setting of the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 100 can be changed by changing the setting of the game mode (by changing the setting). .. Information corresponding to the set game mode (hereinafter, also referred to as “setting correspondence information”) is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 922 of the main control board 920.

Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described roughly in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers related to the special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various game states are generated. When a game ball that has entered any of the start winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by any of the middle start winning switch 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the first special symbol It becomes. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 922 (see FIG. 10) of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is neither in the special game state nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights to are not reserved, they will be started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even if the player is not in the special game state, the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. After the end of the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) held before the current prize, the unit game based on the current start prize is started. If each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the current start prize after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

Further, the unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the second special symbol after the current start prize, the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not necessarily executed in the order of the start prize. The unit game superiority control according to the above may be executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative but may be variable at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the 1st special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit winning of the 1st special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the jackpot. A plurality of types of jackpots are set according to the type of gaming state such as the gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state) that shifts after the special gaming state, and the jackpot symbol is set for each type. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special is based on the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various fluctuation pattern random number values, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held. The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, and the first special symbol is varied. The variable display according to a certain pattern is continued over the display time, and in the case of the decorative pattern, the variable display according to the variable display is continued over the variable display time. After that, as the variation display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a decorative symbol. The definite display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

Here, in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the symbols composed of numbers and characters as identification information are arranged along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, or an L-shape on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. It may be executed by using a symbol string that scrolls with, or by using a symbol sequence in which the symbol is updated to another symbol while rotating at a certain place. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and the variable display of the identification information may be configured by the effect display performed by changing the appearance of the character. Further, a portion for executing variable display of the identification information may be provided at a plurality of places on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. For example, a symbol as identification information displayed in a large size in the central portion and a corner of the display screen. The variable display may be performed by using another symbol displayed small in the portion.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper entry control mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 are in the entry allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the large winning switch 443, 444 or a predetermined maximum during each approach allowable posture in the lower approach control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454. When the permissible approach time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry control mechanism 453 or the upper entry control mechanism 454 shifts to the no-entry posture. Then, after the lapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry control mechanism 453 or the upper entry control mechanism 454 returns to the approach allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower approach control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 are configured so that only one of them takes an approach allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period). ), One shifts to the first permissible posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and then a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the start winning of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the transition control of the gaming state, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Will be done.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 922 of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is completed.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol is won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the winning symbol is won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation display by a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variation display time, and the time reduction state is achieved. Continues the variable display according to a constant pattern over a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the right approach control mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probabilistic gaming state) after shifting to the state, the predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to shift to the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry control mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, a winner must be won in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 in the entry allowable state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability related to the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowable state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, omitted). Since 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time-saving state (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds), the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time-saving state such as the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. ..

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, the player plays with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the short-time game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the central portion of the game area 409 in which the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed) in which the game ball flows down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. The game method) and the game method (right-handed game method) in which the game ball is mainly flowed down from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. The player plays the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, and plays the game by the right-handed game method in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state. Further, since the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is played by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the substrate 501. By connecting the substrate 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game ball and the game ball on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 (for example, in one row) and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding part for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530. Guidance as a ball guiding unit that guides the payout device 540 that executes the rental of the game ball and the game ball that has flowed out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed on the base 501. The member 550, the payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game ball and the lending of the game ball by the payout device 540, and the power supply that converts the external power into the power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply / launch control device 570 and a payout control device 560 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. It also includes a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The substrate 501 is integrally molded from a resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and other devices can be attached to the base portion 502. It has a function as a mounted part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving heat dissipation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of an island facility are sequentially replenished to one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof. An opening (not shown) is formed in the game ball tank 510 at one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side to which the game ball is supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential in the game ball tank 510 and inside the game ball tank 510. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 is gradually heightened as a passage forming member 521 forming a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It is provided with a rectifying member 522 having a top surface portion having a lower top surface and gradually rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage from a height overlapped vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically elongated so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. The case rail 530 is curved to the left and right so that the game ball does not flow vigorously and is continuous downward. Further, in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530, a ball breakage detecting unit 539 for detecting a ball breakage is provided. The ball-out detection unit 539 has a built-in storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10), and the storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or its upstream side, so that a game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects a ball out condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism for sending out the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a drive means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game ball stored in the ball passage is discharged to the downstream side. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / emission control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base 501 so as to be located at the lower rear surface side of the rear block 104. Has been done. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of opening like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply / launch control device 570 includes a power supply / launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the power supply / launch control board 900, and the power supply / launch control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a rear setting switch 905 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 100. The rear setting switch 905 is set to enable the setting operation for setting the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 100 to one of a plurality of predetermined stages (for example, 6 stages or 9 stages). It is a pachinko machine.

By inserting a predetermined key (not shown) into the rear setting switch 905 and rotating it to a predetermined position (in this embodiment, a position rotated clockwise by approximately 90 ° from the initial position), the setting of the ball ejection rate can be changed. Can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907) in a state where the setting change of the ball ejection rate is enabled, the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed, the predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. That is, it can be said that changing the setting of the ball ejection rate by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is a setting change of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first hit probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery) is set according to each stage set by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate (that is, changing the setting of the game mode). (Probability of winning) and probability variation continuation rate (in this embodiment, the probability of transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state when transitioning to the special gaming state via the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation gaming state) It is possible to select one of nine types of game modes in which the combination with and is different. Therefore, when the setting change of the ball ejection rate (setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special so as to have the first hit probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage. The ball output rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability).

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type having a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability variation continuation rate and the middle type having a medium initial hit probability and a medium probability variation continuation rate. You can select between the type and the bottom type, which has a significantly lower probability of first hit but a significantly higher probability of continuation of change. Further, in each of these types, the first-hit probability of each type is subdivided into smaller widths than the range of the first-hit probabilities between the types (hereinafter, also referred to as probability setting states), that is, Among the three stages, the first-stage probability with the lowest first-hit probability, the second-stage probability with the second lowest first-hit probability, and the third-stage probability with the highest first-hit probability can be selected.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start winning device 431 and the right starting winning device 432 is smaller than that of the other types, but the prize balls associated with winning the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. The number is higher than the other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start winning device 431 and the right starting winning device 432 is larger than that of the other types, but it is associated with winning the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. The number of prize balls is less than other types.

Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to judge from the number of prize balls whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type, and the playability of guessing the setting of which type is made for a long time. Can be added.

In addition, the profit margin for the player changes depending on the stage of the probability setting state in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for all types. The profit margins for the players are set to be substantially the same. Therefore, even if the probability setting is changed by changing the type, the profit per fixed period (for example, one day) acquired by the game hall side can be easily predicted, and the game field can be easily managed.

The game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate as described above, and is, for example, the first hit probability or the probability variation. It may be any of the inrush rates. In addition, lottery probabilities other than the first hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate, for example, the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. The probability that a small hit will be selected, the probability variation inrush rate (in this embodiment, the probability of entering the probability variation game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability variation game state that has shifted after the special game state. May be the probability of ending (for example, the probability that the end of the probabilistic gaming state is selected in the fall lottery performed each time the change display of the symbol is executed during the probabilistic gaming state). It may be a combination of two or more of.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905. When the setting change of the ball ejection rate (setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed by operating the rear setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. .. The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabetic character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type is represented by the letters "T", "M", and "B", respectively. Further, in each type of probability setting state, the first-stage probability is represented by "1", the second-stage probability is represented by "2", and the third-stage probability is represented by "3".

Therefore, for example, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the game mode of the first stage probability of the top type is "T1", and the game mode of the game mode of the third stage probability of the middle type. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3", and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the bottom type second stage probability game mode is "B2".

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted.

Further, in FIG. 10, for the purpose of facilitating understanding, the closed one-dot chain line X is shown to include the parts constituting the game board 400, the front block 102, the intermediate block 103 (for example, the base frame 301), and the like. The parts constituting the frame body different from the game board 400 such as the rear block 104 (for example, the base 501) are shown in a distinguishable manner. Specifically, the components of the game board 400 (for example, the main control board 920 and the sub control board 940) are shown inside the alternate long and short dash line X, and are attached to the base 501 to form the frame (for example, the power supply). The launch control board 900, the power supply monitoring board 910, the payout control board 930, etc.) are shown outside the alternate long and short dash line X.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the power supply monitoring board 910 is one of the components constituting the frame (that is, the power supply monitoring board 910 is outside the alternate long and short dash line X). Although the illustrated configuration) is illustrated, the power supply monitoring board 910 may be one of the components of the gaming board 400. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be described in detail individually.

The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device according to the operation of the launch operation device 250. It includes a launch control unit 902 that controls the drive of the 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external electric power (for example, AC 24 volt) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volt), and generates various electric power from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is the electric power of the driving voltage (for example, 12 volt DC) for driving various devices such as solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. It includes the power of the control voltage (for example, 5 volt DC) for the operation, the power of the backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM 922 of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 has a function of charging a capacitor (not shown) with internal power converted from external power and supplying the power stored in the capacitor by charging as power for a backup voltage (hereinafter, "" It also has a backup power supply function). That is, the power supply unit 901 generates the power of the backup voltage by the backup power supply function.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various electric powers generated from the internal electric power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power supply monitoring board 910 is supplied with internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage. Power of the drive voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920 via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Power of the driving voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Power of the driving voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940. The drive voltage and the control voltage are supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the power supply unit 901 generates power of a charging voltage (for example, DC 12 volts) for charging the backup power supply 601 from the internal power, and the backup power supply 601 is used with respect to the backup power supply 601. Supply charging voltage.

A power switch 909 for switching between an on state and an off state is connected to the power supply unit 901. When the power switch 909 is operated and switched to the on state, the intake of external power is started, and when the power switch 909 is operated and switched to the off state, the intake of external power is stopped. The pachinko machine can be used by turning off the power switch 909 or disconnecting the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power failure state".

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the power of the backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920 from either the power supply unit 901 or the backup power supply 601. If so, the contents of the RAM 922 of the main control board 920 are retained.

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that it can return to the current control state.

The launch control unit 902 controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254 that the player is touching the launch handle 252 (see FIG. 1), and the launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is set. On condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs a launch permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902 based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let me. As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the stored information stored in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, whereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs a signal in the ON state to the backup power supply 601 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The backup power supply 601 is provided with a circuit for switching between charging and discharging of the backup capacitor depending on whether or not the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The backup power supply 601 starts charging the power of the charging voltage supplied from the power supply unit 901 in response to the reception of the signal in the ON state output from the signal relay unit 903.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, a low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the low-speed payout signal is the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game ball from the device 540) is slowed down. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the high-speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a rear setting switch 905 and a setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay unit 903. The signal relay unit 903 relays the on-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated by approximately 90 ° clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). In the main control board 920, the game mode is allowed to be changed according to the reception of the setting signal in the ON state from the rear setting switch 905. Further, the signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

The power supply monitoring board 910 transmits power supply and transmission of various signals between the power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply / emission control board 900, the power supply / emission control board 900, and the main control board 920. It includes a signal relay unit 912 to be relayed. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901, and this When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power failure state is established, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU has a CPU as an arithmetic processing unit (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. Etc. are included in the RAM 922 for storing and the like. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is.

The RAM 922 of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by the power of the backup voltage supplied from the power supply unit 901 of the power supply / emission control board 900 or the backup power supply 601 even after the transition to the power failure state. It has become. Specifically, in a power failure state caused by the power switch 909 being turned off while the initialization switch 907 is pressed, the main control board 920 is backed up from the power supply unit 901 and the backup power supply 601. In a power failure state other than that, backup power is supplied to the main control board 920 only from the power supply unit 901.

The backup power supply 601 receives a signal in the ON state from the signal relay unit 903 in a situation where the power switch 909 is in the ON state (that is, a situation in which external power is supplied to the power supply unit 901), and the backup power supply unit 901 receives a signal in the ON state from the power supply unit 901. Start charging the power of the supplied charging voltage. That is, by pressing the initialization switch 907 while external power is being supplied to the power supply unit 901, it is possible to start charging the power (charging voltage power) to the backup power supply 601.

The backup power supply 601 is stored in the backup power supply 601 by charging when the power switch 909 is switched from the on state to the off state after the charging of the power to the backup power supply 601 is started as described above. Power is supplied as the power of the backup voltage.

That is, by switching the power switch 909 to the off state (that is, the supply of external power to the power supply unit 901 is stopped) while pressing the initialization switch 907, the power stored in the backup power supply 601 by charging is used for backup. It can be supplied as electric power of voltage. As a result, the power of the backup voltage can be supplied from the backup power supply 601 to the main control board 920.

The electric capacity of the backup power supply 601 was removed from the frame (that is, the outer frame 101, the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104) (more specifically, it was removed from the base frame 301 of the intermediate block 103). It is possible to output the power of the backup voltage for a period (for example, about 1 hour) sufficient for inspecting or inspecting the game board 400 or the frame with the game board 400 removed. It is preferable that the capacity is large. Further, the electric capacity of the backup power supply 601 is preferably not too large from the viewpoint of preventing fraud on the main control board 920, for example, in a shorter time than one day such as 6 hours, the main control board 920. It is preferable to prevent the RAM 922 from being backed up normally.

Further, the circuit of the backup power supply 601 is configured so that the power supply path between the power supply unit 901 and the backup power supply 601 is grounded when the power switch 909 is in the ON state. Therefore, while the power switch 909 is in the ON state, the power remaining in the backup power supply 601 is consumed (discharged) by the grounding. Therefore, when the power failure state of the pachinko machine 100 is resolved (that is, when the power supply to the inside of the pachinko machine 100 is started), the remaining amount of the backup power supply 601 becomes zero by discharging.

The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Similar to the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are installed.

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, bidirectional information input / output communication is possible between the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The open / close detection switch 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to each other so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is possible and connected. The RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period of time in a power failure state, like the RAM 922 of the main control board 920, or the RAM 922 of the main control board 920. Unlike this, the configuration may not maintain internal data in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various staging devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, and the like based on the instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , The input operation device 260, the left input operation device 801L, and the right input operation device 801R are connected to each other so that information communication is possible in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like is connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible. There is.

Each part attached to the game board 400 (hereinafter, also referred to as "game board side part" for convenience) and each part attached to a member different from the game board 400 such as the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 (hereinafter, also referred to as "game board side parts"). In the following, for convenience, it is also referred to as "other member side component"), and a connector (referred to as "other member side component") for electrically connecting the game board side component and the other member side component and for enabling information communication. For example, connectors C1 to C3) are provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10, between the main control board 920 or the backup power supply 601 and the power supply monitoring board 910 or the power supply / emission control board 900 (more specifically, the power supply unit 901 and the signal relay unit 903). , Connector C1 is provided.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the power supply monitoring board 910 is one of the components constituting the frame, but the power supply monitoring board 910 is one of the components of the game board 400. In such a configuration, the connector C1 is provided not between the main control board 920 and the power supply monitoring board 910 but between the power supply monitoring board 910 and the power supply / emission control board 900. You may.

Further, a connector C2 is provided between the sub-control board 940 and the audio devices 281,282, the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275, the input operation device 260, the left input operation device 801L, and the right input operation device 801R. ing. A connector C3 is provided between the main control board 920 and the payout control board 930. It should be noted that each of the connectors C1 to C3 does not necessarily have to be composed of one connector, and at least one of the connectors C1 to C3 may be composed of a plurality of divided connectors.

The connector (connectors C1 to C3 in the example shown in FIG. 10) is composed of a female connector (not shown) and a male connector (not shown) that can be attached to and detached from the female connector. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the female connector is connected to the game board side component, and the male connector is connected to the other member side component.

When the male connector is attached to the female connector, the game board side component and the other member side component are electrically connected and are connected so that information and communication can be performed. On the other hand, when the male connector is removed from the female connector, the electrical connection between the game board side component and the other member side component and the connection capable of information communication are released.

When the game board 400 is removed from the base frame 301 (see FIG. 3) of the intermediate block 103, the male connector is basically removed from the female connector, thereby playing with connectors such as connectors C1 to C3. The connection (electrical connection and information / communication possible connection) between the panel side component and the other member side component is released.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing on the main control board 920 is roughly divided into the main processing that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and the main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)) interrupted and executed. It consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 for disabling the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM 922), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM 922), and the normal symbol related to the special symbol are used. The random number initial value update process S1021 that updates the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of RAM 922), and the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The variable counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the counter (a part of the area of the RAM 922) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting an interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt enable process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt enable process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, the program start process S1001 that sets an initial value in the stack pointer (a part of the area of RAM 922) that controls the execution of the program, the interrupt mode setting process S1002 that sets the interrupt mode, and the payout control board. The start-up standby process S1003, which waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up, is executed.

After the start-up standby process S1003, the determination process S2001 of the output state of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power supply / emission control board 900 is performed. When it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the off state (S2001: N), the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900. Judgment process S1004, power failure information (a part of the area of RAM 922) value determination process S1005, storage information storage state determination process S1007 are performed, and whether the stored information of RAM 922 is deleted based on these determination results. Whether or not it is determined. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the area of the RAM 922 that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. Examples include the value of the counter related to the unit game in the game, the value of the counter stored by the start winning prize, and the like.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, the checksum value for the storage area in the predetermined range of the RAM 922 is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) are accompanied by the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in), is “0” (determination process S1007), whereby the current checksum value and the current checksum value are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the stored information has been saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saved. When the information is not normally held (S1007: N), the RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the stored information of the RAM 922 is executed. Hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 after it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed. The hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, the determination process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is the power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), the RAM return setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the retained information and the return command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the restoration of the holding information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information are initialized (RAM initial setting process S1013) without restoring the holding information, and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an error detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state are performed. Even if is occurring, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 receive the return command or the initialization command. A predetermined initialization process is also executed in each of the above.

After the initial setting of the RAM 922 (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014) according to the situation at the time of startup, if the condition device is operating at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the process corresponding to the game state in the power failure state is executed on the sub-control board 940. To.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state is the time saving state or the non-time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is reached. In the case (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the area of RAM 922) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the ON state indicating that the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (S2001: Y), the RAM 922 The RAM clear process S2002 that erases information in substantially the entire area is executed. Specifically, in the RAM clear processing S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a predetermined plurality of stages (nine types in this embodiment) of game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM 922. ing. Therefore, the RAM clear processing S2002 erases the information in substantially all the areas except the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920, and the setting change is permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, the setting display signal for identifying the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

Next, the setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is executed until the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The setting change of the game mode is performed by pressing the initialization switch 907 in a state where the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on the pressing of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example, ... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ...) Is predetermined, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed according to the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is made, the value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM 922 as the setting correspondence information. Every time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is changed, the setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is the setting display device. Displayed at 906.

Therefore, a setting changer such as a game hall administrator can use the initialization switch 907 until the game mode to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected while the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After repeating the pressing, the selection of the game mode can be completed by making the middle start winning device 431 win the game ball. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when the game ball is won in the middle start winning device 431 after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), various information other than the information related to the setting of the game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information) is newly set in the RAM 922. The setting process S2005 is executed. As a result, it is confirmed that the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and the game proceeds in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, the set command output process S2006 for outputting the set command indicating the completion of the setting of the RAM 922 to the payout control board 930 is executed. The payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to the normal game processing by receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, and also recognizes which game mode the main control board 920 operates in. can. After the set command output process S2006, the processes after the special game state return preparation process S1015 are executed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, the interrupt start process S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. This prohibits interrupts other than this timer interrupt. After that, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt enable process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various main processes will be described individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the area of the RAM 922) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected three times, the power failure state is determined. If it is not determined in this determination that the power is in a power failure state, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is in a power failure state, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM 922 is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not substantially control the progress of the game, monitoring of various sensors, etc., and the state of the RAM 922 after the RAM determination value is set is maintained based on the backup power. To. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is used. If the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circular initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Is set to the value of, and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and multiple counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the circulation initial value of each counter is set. Refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The range of values is the same for the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random value initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, which is special. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol, the winning random number initial value related to the special symbol is also specified except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique values to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the first variation. If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. Will be done.

It should be noted that the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the variation type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter has another configuration. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using an initial value counter, or it may be configured to be configured by a random number generation IC without using a program and to refer to a value as needed. ..

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, it is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, each process for stopping the game progress is not executed, and the game stop determination process S1206 ends. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Further, in the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are related based on the control data stored in the output buffer. A signal for controlling various notification devices such as a normal symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach restricting solenoid 462, a lower approach restricting solenoid 463, an upper approach restricting motor 464, and a distribution solenoid 465 are used. The signal to control is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower winning winning switch 443, the upper winning winning switch 444, the combined operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specific The signal states from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the area of the RAM 922) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. The signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state"). , Changes in the detection status of various switches are detected based on the detection status detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection status"). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is in the on state transition. Then, a detection flag (a part of the area of RAM 922) corresponding to the type of the switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined area of RAM 922) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right-starting prize device 432, the lower prize winning device 433, and the upper prize winning device 434 are moved to the forced entry allowable posture, and the game ball is guided to the specific passage of the lower prize winning device 433 by vibration. , Induction of forced malfunction of right start prize device 432, lower prize prize device 433 and upper prize prize device 434 by radio waves, guidance of game balls to various prize devices by magnetic adsorption, upper middle start prize device 431A, There is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as guiding the game ball to the lower middle start winning device 431B, right starting winning device 432, lower grand winning device 433, and upper grand winning device 434 at an abnormal timing have been performed. Detect the occurrence.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM 922) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM 922) are updated. Further, when the right-start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right-start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the grand prize counter (predetermined area of RAM 922) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of RAM 922) are updated.

In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, an intermediate block is provided with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Whether or not 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed is detected. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (FIG. 2 and FIG. 3) is detected whether or not it is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and are output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one prize is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the prize is set. In the payout control board 930, the main control board 920 is awarded each time the control for paying out the number (for example, 3) of the game balls corresponding to the prize is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). In the situation where the ball command is requested and the prize ball is continuously paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a prize (for example, 13 pieces) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is issued on the payout control board. When the 930 receives the game, the payout control board 930 executes control to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of the 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of the 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and the special symbol related process S1217. Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The combined output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Direction by multiple movable members>
Next, the effect by the plurality of movable members executed when the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V (see FIG. 7) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a front view of the game board 400 showing the operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20.

When it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V, an effect using two (plural) movable members, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, is executed. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are in a posture closer to each other than the separated posture (proximity posture: in FIG. 13) from the posture in which they are arranged apart from each other (separated posture: one-dot chain line in FIG. 13). It is configured to perform an operation that changes to (solid line). Further, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged continuously in the direction toward the privilege area 409V from the entrance portion 409E where the game ball flows down to the game area 409 when they are placed in a close posture (the privilege area). It is configured to take the instruction arrangement). As a result, the player can easily notice the occurrence of this effect by changing the postures of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 arranged at different locations. Further, the whole of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 arranged continuously makes it possible to draw the player's attention toward the direction side from the entrance portion 409E toward the privilege area 409V.

On the left side of the game board 400, the left movable member 10 is provided so as to be able to move to change the posture between the separated posture shown by the alternate long and short dash line and the close posture shown by the solid line. Further, on the right side of the left movable member 10, the right movable member 20 is provided so as to be able to move to change the posture between the separated posture and the close posture. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are not limited to the configuration provided on the game board 400, but may be provided on the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 3) to which the game board 400 is attached, or the intermediate block 103. It may be configured to be provided in the front block 102 (see FIGS. 1 and 3) arranged on the front side of the above.

Specifically, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 have an end portion of the left movable member 10 opposite to the inlet portion 409E and an end portion of the right movable member 20 opposite to the privilege area 409V. Are arranged so as to form a continuous shape from the vicinity of the entrance portion 409E toward the vicinity of the privilege region 409V as a whole. Therefore, the player can use the privilege area 409V located on the direction side from the entrance portion 409E toward the privilege area 409V and the direction side pointed by the continuous shape, and the upper prize winning device 434 formed by the privilege area 409V. It will be possible to get attention. It should be noted that the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 may be configured to be in a state of being close to each other but slightly separated from each other in a close posture so that the player can recognize them as an integral body. It may be configured to be in contact with each other. Further, in the effect executed when the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, the effect is not limited to the configuration using two movable members of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, and three or more movable members are movable. A member may be used so that each movable member is brought close to at least one other movable member.

Further, the left movable member 10 is behind a region near the entrance portion 409E in the left flow region 409L (predetermined first region) in which the game ball flows down from the center side of the game board 400 through the left side of the central structure 420. It is placed in a wide range. The right movable member 20 extends from the center side of the game board 400 to the back of the area near the privilege area 409V in the right flow area 409R (predetermined second area) in which the game ball flows down through the right side of the central structure 420. Is placed in. In this arrangement, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are positioned so as to connect two areas where the game ball can flow, straddling the area where the game ball cannot flow down on the center side of the game board 400 as a whole. do. Therefore, even if most of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged in the area where the game ball cannot flow down, the whole of them is related to the flow of the game ball, for example, from the entrance portion 409E to the game area 409. It becomes possible to easily remind the player that the game ball to be entered into the privilege area 409V should be made to enter the privilege area 409V and that the game ball should be made to flow into the left flow area 409L provided with the privilege area 409V. The left movable member 10 has a configuration that extends to the back of the left flow area 409L but does not reach the back of the inlet portion 409E, but is not limited to this configuration and may be configured to reach the back of the inlet portion 409E. It may be configured so as not to reach behind the left flow area 409L. Similarly, the right movable member 20 has a configuration that extends to the right flow area 409R but does not reach behind the privilege area 409V, but is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to extend behind the privilege area 409V or to the right. The configuration may be such that it does not reach behind the flow area 409R.

Further, the left movable member 10 is formed in a shape (hereinafter, simply referred to as a rectangle) having a substantially elongated rectangular shape (for example, a rectangle whose long side is twice or more longer than the short side), and the entrance is in the longitudinal direction thereof. It is arranged toward the vicinity of the portion 409E. Specifically, in the left movable member 10, the entrance portion 409E is provided between the extension line to the entrance portion 409E side with respect to the upper long side thereof and the extension line to the entrance portion 409E side with respect to the lower long side thereof. Arranged to be located. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to be aware of the entrance portion 409E at the tip of the left movable member 10 in the longitudinal direction. Further, the left movable member 10 has at least one of the privilege areas 409V between the extension line to the privilege area 409V side with respect to the upper long side thereof and the extension line to the privilege area 409V side with respect to the lower long side thereof. The unit (for example, the entrance of the privilege area 409V) is arranged so as to be located. Therefore, the left movable member 10 can attract the player's attention to the privilege area 409V located at the end in the longitudinal direction thereof and the upper prize winning device 434 provided inside with the privilege area 409V. become. The left movable member 10 is not limited to having a rectangular outer shape, but may have a trapezoidal shape or a triangular shape that tapers toward the center side of the game area 409 or the entrance portion 409E.

Further, the right movable member 20 is formed in a rectangular shape having a substantially elongated outer shape, like the rectangular left movable member 10, and is arranged with its longitudinal direction toward the vicinity of the privilege region 409V. Specifically, the right movable member 20 forms a privilege area 409V between the extension line to the privilege area 409V side with respect to the upper long side thereof and the extension line to the privilege area 409V side with respect to the lower long side thereof. A part of the upper prize winning device 434 (for example, the upper entry control mechanism 454 provided at the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434) is arranged so as to be located. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to be aware of the upper prize winning device 434 located at the tip of the right movable member 20 in the longitudinal direction and the privilege area 409V formed inside the device 434. The right movable member 20 is not limited to having a rectangular outer shape, but has a trapezoidal shape or a triangular shape whose width in the lateral direction tapers toward the center side of the game area 409 or the privilege area 409V. May be.

Further, the rectangular left movable member 10 and the rectangular right movable member 20 are arranged so that their longitudinal directions face the same direction as the direction from the vicinity of the inlet portion 409E to the vicinity of the privilege area 409V. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the direction side in which the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are continuous is one direction pointed to in the longitudinal direction thereof, and the privilege area 409V and the privilege area 409V are formed. In addition, it becomes possible to easily attract the attention of the player to the large prize-winning device 434.

Further, the rectangular left movable member 10 and the rectangular right movable member 20 are arranged so as to form a polygonal line shape. Specifically, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are, as a whole, between the extension line for the lower long side of the left movable member 10 and the extension line for the upper long side of the right movable member 20. , The entrance portion 409E and the upper prize winning device 434 in which the privilege area 409V is formed are arranged so as to be substantially entirely located. Therefore, on the side in the direction in which the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are continuous, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a range wider than each width (length in the lateral direction) of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20. Therefore, not only the privilege area 409V but also the operation of the upper prize winning device 434 in which the privilege area 409V is formed (opening / closing operation of the upper entry restriction mechanism 454) and the behavior of the game ball entering or entering the upper prize winning device 434. However, it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are not limited to a configuration having a polygonal line shape as a whole, for example, a configuration having a linear shape as a whole, or toward the formation side of the entrance portion 409E or the privilege region 409V as a whole. From the central side of the game board 400 to the forming side of the entrance portion 409E and the privilege area 409V, or from the forming side of the entrance portion 409E and the forming side of the privilege area 409V. It may be configured to taper toward the center side of the game board 400.

The privilege area 409V is a right flow area 409R (predetermined second area) provided separately from the left flow area 409L (predetermined first area) in which the game ball flows down in the normal game state among the game areas 409 in which the game ball can flow. The area) is formed, and the privilege area 409V is configured to allow the game ball to enter by flowing the game ball into the right flow area 409R. Further, in the game board 400, the inlet portion 409E is formed on the upper left side where the return ball prevention mechanism 404 is provided at the upper tip of the inner rail 403.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a left flow area 409L and a right flow area 409R as a game area 409, and the privilege area 409V is formed in the right flow area 409R. Whether the game ball is flowed down to the left flow area 409L or the right flow area 409R can be switched by the player's operation of launching the game ball, for example, by adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball. In the normal game state, the player causes the game ball to flow down to the left flow area 409L, satisfies the predetermined conditions described later in the normal game state, and if it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V, the player can enter the game ball into the privilege area 409V. A game ball is made to flow down to the right flow area 409R. More specifically, in the state where the game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the privilege ball can be entered in the guidance posture of the distribution mechanism 437, the game ball is made to flow down to the right flow area 409R. The privilege area 409V is provided in the right flow area 409R, and the privilege area 409V is left on the left flow area 409L in the normal game state, not limited to the configuration in which the game ball flows down to the right flow area 409R in the privilege entry enabled state. It may be provided in the flow-down area 409L, and the game ball may flow down to the right flow-down area 409R in the normal game state and to the left flow-down area 409L in the privileged ball entry state. Further, the game area 409 is not limited to the configuration in which the game area 409 is divided into the left and right sides and two flow areas (left flow area 409L and right flow area 409R) that can be separated by the player's launch operation of the game ball are provided. For example, the two flow areas that can be used may be provided separately on the upper side and the lower side of the game area 409, or may be provided separately on the upper left side and the lower right side of the game area 409. Further, the game area 409 is not limited to the configuration of being divided into two flow areas that can be separated by the player's launch operation of the game ball, and may be divided into three or more flow areas.

Further, the privilege area 409V is provided on the lower right side of the game area 409 located diagonally across the center side of the game board 400 with respect to the entrance portion 409E formed on the upper left side of the game board 400. The privilege area 409V is not limited to the configuration provided on the lower right side of the game board 400, but may be provided on another location such as the horizontal right side of the entrance portion 409E (upper right side of the game board 400). ..

The rectangular left movable member 10 is arranged so that its long side direction faces up and down along the upper portion of the left flow area 409L in the separated posture, and the rectangular right movable member 20 is arranged in the separated posture. The long side direction is arranged so as to face up and down along the upper portion of the right flow area 409R. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are not limited to the configuration in which the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged so that their longitudinal directions face in the vertical direction in a separated posture, for example, so that their longitudinal directions face in the left-right direction. It may be arranged so that one of them is oriented in the vertical direction and the other is oriented in the horizontal direction. Further, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 may be arranged so that their longitudinal directions face diagonally.

The rectangular left movable member 10 is supported so as to be movable by rotation around the vicinity of the entrance portion 409E on the left side of the game board 400. Therefore, when the left movable member 10 is changed from the separated posture to the close posture, the upper right side so as to bring the portion on one end side (hereinafter, also referred to as the movable side end portion) away from the center of rotation closer to the right movable member 20. Can be moved to. Further, the rectangular right movable member 20 is supported so as to be movable by rotation around the vicinity of the privilege area 409V on the right side of the game board 400. Therefore, when the right movable member 20 is changed from the separated posture to the close posture, the movable side end portion can be moved to the lower left side so as to be closer to the left movable member 10. It should be noted that the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are not limited to the configuration in which the movement between the arrangement in which the separated posture is taken and the arrangement in which the close posture is taken is supported by rotation, and the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are replaced with or added to the rotational movement. It may be configured so that it can be moved by sliding movement (linear or curved movement that does not change the inclination).

The rectangular left movable member 10 is formed in a central structure 420 having an upper portion overlapped behind the vicinity of the entrance portion 409E and a lower portion in the vicinity of the upper middle start winning device 431A to guide the game ball. It is arranged so as to be located below the warp passage 421. On the upper side of the upper middle start winning device 431A, an upper stage 426 capable of allowing some game balls to enter the upper middle starting winning device 431A while rolling the game ball is provided, and the warp passage 421 is provided. , It is composed of a passage for guiding the game ball from the entrance provided on the left side of the central structure 420 to the upper stage 426.

Further, the rectangular left movable member 10 is arranged from behind the vicinity of the entrance portion 409E to the vicinity of the lower middle start winning device 431B behind the guide passage 422 that guides the game ball. The guide passage 422 is a part of the left flow area 409L and is composed of a passage portion of a game ball toward the lower middle start winning device 431B via the lower left side of the central structure 420.

Here, the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B are devices that give an opportunity to display the variation of the identification information by the entry of the game ball, and in the normal gaming state, the player is in the upper middle. The game ball is flowed down to the left flow area 409L with the aim of allowing the game ball to enter the start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B. When the left movable member 10 is set to a length extending to the back of the warp passage 421 or the guide passage 422, the movable side end portion of the left movable member 10 is set to cross the warp passage 421 or the guide passage 422, and the upper side thereof. It becomes possible to move so as to pass in the vicinity of the middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B. As a result, the player pays attention to the behavior of the game ball flowing down toward the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B instead of the decorative symbol display device 479 that executes the main effect in the normal gaming state. Even if it is, it becomes easy to notice the movement of the left movable member 10 from the separated posture to the close posture.

The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are configured to operate when a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a big hit (predetermined display result) is confirmed and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479 (display means). Further, in this case, the game ball is caused to flow down to the privilege area 409V (predetermined privilege area) by flowing the game ball into the right flow area 409R (second area) provided separately from the left flow area 409L (first area). The configuration is such that it is possible to enter the ball. That is, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are configured to operate when the privilege ball can be entered. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 may be configured to start the operation at the same time, or may be configured to start the operation by shifting the start time and the end time.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with an operating means for operating the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20. Although not shown, the game board 400 is provided with a drive mechanism that makes the left movable member 10 movable and a power source that supplies power to the drive mechanism, as operating means. Further, although not shown, the game board 400 is provided with a drive mechanism that makes the right movable member 20 movable and a power source that supplies power to the drive mechanism, as operating means. As these drive sources, for example, a motor that generates a rotational force or a solenoid that generates power in a linear direction can be used.

Further, the drive source is electrically connected to the sub-control board 940 and controlled by the sub-control board 940. Therefore, the operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is controlled via the drive mechanism by the control of the drive source by the sub-control board 940. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are not limited to the configuration in which the operation thereof is controlled by the sub control board 940, and may be configured to be controlled by the main control board 920, for example.

The decorative symbol display device 479 is arranged in the central portion of the game board 400, and is configured to display the decorative symbol (identification information) in a variable manner and to confirm and display the combination of the decorative symbols after the variable display. The display content displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479 (display means) is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

Specifically, the change of the decorative symbol is performed when the game ball that has flowed down the left flow area 409L in the normal game state enters the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B. .. Further, the combination of decorative symbols to be confirmed and displayed is determined according to the result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery) triggered by the entry. Specifically, the detection of the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and the lottery triggered by the entry are executed on the main control board 920, but the sub control board. The 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that commands related to its detection and commands related to the result of the lottery can be received, and based on these commands, the variable display and the definite display of the decorative symbol are controlled. It should be noted that the trigger for the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 to operate is not limited to the definite display of the combination corresponding to the jackpot of the decorative symbol, for example, the trigger for the privilege entry. It may be a definite display of the combination corresponding to the small hit. Further, the trigger is not limited to the configuration of the display result by the decorative symbol display device 479, and instead of or in addition to the display result, a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 479, for example, the first special symbol is used. It may be configured as a display result by the first special symbol display device 471 that displays variable display or definite display, or the second special symbol display device 472 that displays variable display or definite display of the second special symbol. ..

Further, the privilege area 409V is formed inside the upper prize winning device 434 that operates when the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot is confirmed and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479. Therefore, when the upper prize winning device 434 operates and the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry allowable state, in detail, the upper entry control mechanism 454 provided at the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434 sets the entry allowable posture. When taking the ball, the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V.

The privilege area 409V is not limited to the configuration formed inside the upper prize winning device 434, and may be configured to be formed in another device such as the lower prize winning device 433, for example. Further, the privilege area 409V is limited to a configuration in which entry into the privilege area 409V is restricted by a distribution mechanism 437 formed at a position such as the inside of the upper prize winning device 434 where the flow of the game ball is not always allowed. Instead, the configuration may be regulated by a distribution mechanism 437 formed at a position where the flow of the game ball is always possible. For example, the distribution mechanism 437 may be provided as an upper entry control mechanism 454, or the privilege area 409V and the distribution mechanism 437 may be provided in the right flow area 409R separately from the large prize device 434. good.

Further, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are after the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hits is confirmed and displayed, and before the operation of the upper prize winning device 434 starts (the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 prohibits entry). Before starting the change from the posture to the approach allowable posture), the movement from the separated posture to the close posture is started. Therefore, the player sees that the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are in a close posture, and before the upper prize winning device 434 starts the operation, the flow destination of the game ball. Can be changed from the left flow area 409L to the right flow area 409R. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are not limited to the configuration that operates after the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit is confirmed and displayed, and may be configured to operate at the same time as the confirmation display. Further, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are configured to operate not only before the start of operation of the upper prize winning device 434 but also after the start of operation of the upper prize winning device 434, for example, the upper prize winning device 434 allows entry. It may be configured to operate when the game ball does not enter the privilege area 409V for a predetermined period after the state is reached.

Further, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 start the operation from the close posture to the separated posture when the game ball enters the privilege area 409V. Therefore, even if the behavior of the game ball actually entering the privilege area 409V is overlooked, it is possible to know by the operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20. .. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are not limited to the configuration in which the movement from the close posture to the separated posture is executed when the game ball enters the privilege area 409V, and the upper prize winning device 434 is not limited to the configuration. Is executed when the period in which the first entry is allowed is completed, or when a predetermined time (shorter or longer than the period in the first allowed entry) has elapsed from the start of operation of the upper prize winning device 434. It may be configured to be executed in.

When the game ball enters the privilege area 409V, the game state transitions to a more advantageous game state for the player than when the game ball does not enter the privilege area 409V.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a specific passage switch 448 that detects a game ball that has entered the privilege area 409V. Further, the specific passage switch 448 is electrically connected to the main control board 920, and the detection by the specific passage switch 448 is detected by the main control board 920. In the main control board 920, based on the detection by the specific passage switch 448, the control of the game state when the game ball does not enter the privilege area 409V and the game state when the game ball enters the privilege area 409V. Switch between control and.

Further, when one game ball enters the privilege area 409V, the main control board 920 shifts to a more advantageous gaming state than when there is no such ball. The main control board 920 is not limited to a configuration in which one game ball is inserted into the privilege area 409V to control the transition to an advantageous gaming state, and one or more specified number of game balls are inserted. This may be configured to control the transition to an advantageous gaming state. In the case of this configuration, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 may be configured to maintain a close posture until a predetermined number of game balls enter, or each time the game balls enter, for example, they are close to each other. A configuration may be configured in which the close posture is released by returning the posture to the separated posture or the posture is separated by a predetermined interval even if the posture is not returned to the separated posture, and then the close posture is changed again.

Further, the main control board 920 transitions to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when the gaming ball does not enter the privilege area 409V, and when the gaming ball enters the privilege area 409V, the main control board 920 transitions to the time-saving gaming state. After the end of the special gaming state, a big hit can be expected earlier than the time-saving gaming state, and the transition to the probabilistic gaming state which is advantageous for the acquisition of the prize ball is made. Therefore, in order to transition to the probabilistic game state, the player needs to put the game ball into the privilege area 409V in the privilege entry possible state, and the left is executed when the privilege entry is possible. The movement of the movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 makes it easier to secure the transition to the probabilistic gaming state. The main control board 920 is not limited to the configuration in which the transition to the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is performed after the special gaming state depending on whether or not the ball has entered the privilege area 409V, and for example, the number of continuations (number of rounds) in the special gaming state can be determined. When a game ball enters the privilege area 409V due to a difference, etc., it may be configured to transition to a special gaming state which is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the privilege area 409V in terms of winning the prize ball. good. Further, the main control board 920 is not limited to a configuration in which when a game ball enters the privilege area 409V, the game state transitions to an advantageous gaming state in terms of winning a prize ball, and for example, the frequency of generating a premium image or video is different. It may be configured to transition to a gaming state that gives a profit other than the profit related to the acquisition of a prize ball. Further, the transition of the gaming state may be executed not by the main control board 920 but by the control by the sub control board 940.

In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 confirm the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hits by the decorative symbol display device 479 in the normal gaming state in which the game ball is allowed to flow down to the left flow area 409L. It operates when it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V by flowing the game ball into the right flow area 409R, and from the arrangement in which the game ball is separated from each other, it is closer than the separation posture. The arrangement is such that the game takes a close posture and is changed to a continuous privilege area instruction arrangement from the entrance portion 409E where the game ball flows down to the game area 409 toward the privilege area 409V. With this configuration, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 that take the privilege area instruction arrangement not only make it possible to easily attract the player's attention to the side in which they are continuous, but also make them. By moving from different locations apart, it is also possible to make at least one of those movements more noticeable to the player. As a result, the game ball should be put into the privilege area 409V provided on the side in which the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are continuous, and for that purpose, the flow destination of the game ball is to the right from the left flow area 409L. It is possible to notify the player to switch to the flow area 409R and prevent the profit obtained by entering the game ball into the privilege area 409V from being impaired. Therefore, when it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V, a suitable effect can be executed by the operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20.

Further, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are privileged in a close posture due to their continuous shape (for example, the above-mentioned polygonal line shape) and their individual shapes (for example, the above-mentioned elongated rectangular shape). It is also possible to point to the vicinity of the area 409V (the privilege area 409V itself or the upper prize winning device 434 involved in the entry of the game ball into the privilege area 409V), and it is also possible to direct the player's consciousness. .. As a result, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 may make the player aware that the game ball should flow down to the right flow area 409R depending on the direction in which they are continuous, or the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20. It is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the privilege area 409V itself or the upper prize winning device 434 in which the privilege area 409V is formed.

Here, another characteristic configuration regarding a suitable effect of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 will be described.

The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are provided with light emitting means that are arranged in a direction toward the privilege area 409V from the entrance portion 409E in their close postures and emit light in sequence along the direction side.

Specifically, as the light emitting means, the left movable member 10 is provided with a plurality of light emitting elements 19 arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the right movable member 20 is similarly provided with a plurality of light emitting elements. 29 is provided. When the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged in a close posture, a plurality of light emitting elements 19 of the left movable member 10 are sequentially emitted from the upper left side to the lower right side, and a plurality of light emitting elements are emitted. Following the light emission of 19, the plurality of light emitting elements 29 of the right movable member 20 are sequentially made to emit light from the upper left side to the lower right side. Therefore, as compared with the case where the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are simply arranged in a close posture, the sense of unity between the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is enhanced, and the entrance portion 409E to the privilege area 409V is enhanced. It becomes possible to make the player's consciousness more suitable for the direction to which the player is heading. In particular, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the privilege area 409V and the upper prize winning device 434 located on the lower right side of the right movable member 20 and arranged in the direction indicated by the sequential light emission by the plurality of light emitting elements 29. become.

The plurality of light emitting elements 19 and the plurality of light emitting elements 29 are not limited to the configuration in which they are arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, but are arranged in a row along a direction different from the longitudinal direction thereof. It may be configured to be arranged in. Further, the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting elements 19 and the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting elements 29 are not limited to the configuration in which the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged in the same direction when they are arranged in a close posture. The arrangement direction may be different from each other. Further, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are not limited to the configuration in which a plurality of light emitting elements 19 and a plurality of light emitting elements 29 arranged in a row are provided, but also a configuration in which light emitting elements are provided so as to form a plurality of rows. good. Further, by sequentially emitting light from a plurality of light emitting elements 19 and a plurality of light emitting elements 29 arranged linearly, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a specific direction is linearly indicated, but the specific direction is sequentially along a polygonal line or a curve. A plurality of light emitting elements 19 and a plurality of light emitting elements 29 may be arranged so that they can be instructed by emitting light.

The left movable member 10 is provided with a large number of light emitting elements (not shown) that cause the left movable member 10 to emit light as a whole, in addition to the plurality of light emitting elements 19. Further, when the game ball should be flowed down in the left flow-down region 409L as in the normal game state, the left movable member 10 in the separated posture is made to emit light by its many light emitting elements. Therefore, in the separated posture, the game ball is caused to flow down to the left flow area 409L by the overall light emission of the left movable member 10 arranged along the flow direction of the game ball in the left flow area 409L to play the game. It becomes possible to alert the player.

Similarly, the right movable member 20 is provided with a large number of light emitting elements (not shown) that cause the right movable member 20 to emit light as a whole, in addition to the plurality of light emitting elements 29, and the game ball is moved to the right as in a special gaming state. When the flow should be made to flow in the flow area 409R, the right movable member 20 in the separated posture is made to emit light by its many light emitting elements. Therefore, in the separated posture, the game ball is caused to flow down to the right flow area 409R by the overall light emission of the right movable member 20 arranged along the flow direction of the game ball in the right flow area 409R to play the game. It becomes possible to alert the player.

<Form of light irradiation to multiple decorative parts by the same light source>
Next, a part of the light output from the light source 30 toward one decorative portion is directed toward the other decorative portion, so that the light based on the light from the same light source 30 is irradiated to the other decorative portion. Also, some of the light that has been redirected towards the other decorative section is further redirected towards one decorative section and directed towards the other decorative section with respect to at least one decorative section. A configuration for performing a suitable effect by the plurality of decorative portions by irradiating the light before the light source and the light traveling after the light source will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the game board 400. FIG. 15 is a perspective view and a cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of a plurality of decorative portions by a cut surface including the XM-XM line of FIG. 7. 16 is a perspective view and a cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of a plurality of decorative portions by a cut surface including the XD-XD line of FIG. 7. FIG. In the perspective views of FIGS. 15A and 16A, a state in which a part of the decorative portion (front side decorative portion 50) arranged on the front side is removed from the plurality of decorative portions is shown. ing. Further, in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 15 (B), 15 (C), 16 (B) and 16 (C), only the main part is simplified, and the first decorative part and the second decorative part are used. The path of the emitted light is illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C) to be referred to later.

As shown in FIG. 14, as a plurality of decorative portions, a front decorative portion 50 (first decorative portion) and a part of the left movable member 10 are provided on the left side of the game board 400 and in the central portion in the vertical direction. A rear decorative portion 11 (second decorative portion) is provided, which is configured and is located on the rear side (rear side in the front-rear direction of the game board 400) of the front decorative portion 50. Although the front side decorative portion 50 is provided so as to partially overlap the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, the front side decoration overlaps the back side of the base 401 because the base 401 is made of a transparent resin. A part of the part 50 is also visible to the player.

The effect of the front side decoration part 50 and the rear side decoration part 11 is output from the light source 30 (see also FIG. 15) arranged on the rear side of the front side decoration part 50 but on the front side of the rear side decoration part 11. It is executed so that the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear side decorative portion 11 are in a state of emitting light by using the light. At this time, the front side decorative portion 50 is in a state of emitting light by irradiating the light output from the light source 30 from the rear side, while the rear side decorative portion 11 is the back surface 50B (rear) of the front side decorative portion 50. The light reflected by the side output means) is irradiated from the front side, so that the light is emitted. Further, the front side decorative portion 50 is composed of a part of the rear member 42 attached behind the front member 41, and the rear window 61 (in another direction) located between the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear side decorative portion 11. The light is also emitted when the light whose direction is changed by the reflection in the reflecting means) is irradiated. As a result, in the production by the front side decoration part 50 and the rear side decoration part 11, the number of light sources 30 is reduced to reduce the manufacturing cost, and the front side decoration part 50 is used by using the limited number of light sources 30. It is possible to make both the rear side decorative portion 11 and the rear side decorative portion 11 emit light.

The front side decorative portion 50 is capable of passing the light output from the LED elements 32L and 32R of the light source 30 to the front side where the player is located, and emits light when visually recognized from the surface side where the player is located. The configuration is such that it is possible to take.

Specifically, the front side decorative portion 50 is located on the front side of the light source 30, and is provided in contact with the flat plate-shaped front window 51 formed as a part of the front member 41 and the back surface of the front window 51. , A decorative plate 52 on which a pattern (a character that is a motif of a game, etc.) is drawn. The front member 41 constituting the front window 51 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and the decorative plate 52 is made of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the decorative plate 52 is emitted by irradiating the light output from the light source 30 before being reflected by the front decorative portion 50 (hereinafter, also referred to as primary light) from the back surface 50B side. The light emission can be visually recognized from the surface side where the player is located through the front window 51. Further, by forming the front window 51 with a colorless and transparent material, the absorption of light by the front window 51 is suppressed and efficient irradiation is possible. The front window 51 is not limited to the structure formed to be colorless and transparent, and may be formed to be colored transparent. When the front side decorative portion 50 is formed to be colored and transparent, the color may be a uniform single color, a configuration in which a gradation is applied with the same color, or a configuration in which the color arrangement is different depending on the portion. Further, the front window 51 and the decorative plate 52 are not limited to a plate-like structure having a substantially uniform thickness, and may have a non-uniform thickness.

The light source 30 is a light emitting board 31 on which electronic components are mounted, and a plurality of LED elements 32L provided on one side of the light emitting board 31 and arranged so as to output light diagonally to the front side (predetermined direction side). , 32R (light emitting means).

Specifically, the light source 30 includes seven LED elements 32L (only six are shown in FIG. 14) arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on one surface (hereinafter, element surface) of the light emitting substrate 31. , The seven LED elements 32R arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the center side of the game board 400 with respect to the seven LED elements 32L. For each of the LED elements 32L and 32R, the direction perpendicular to the element surface of the light emitting substrate 31 is defined as the direction having the highest brightness (hereinafter, also referred to as the main direction: the broken line in FIG. 15B or the like), and a predetermined angle range (for example, Outputs light that spreads at 15 degrees). The number and arrangement of the LED elements 32L and 32R provided on the light emitting substrate 31 are not limited to the above configuration, and can be appropriately designed.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the light emitting substrate 31 is viewed from above in the vertical direction of the game board 400 (hereinafter referred to as upward view), and its element surface is in the front-rear direction of the game board 400. The primary light from each of the LED elements 32L and 32R is arranged so as to face a direction forming a predetermined angle with respect to the front window 51, and its main direction is different from 90 degrees with respect to the back surface of the front window 51 and the decorative plate 52. The front side decorative portion 50 is irradiated with a predetermined angle. Therefore, the amount of light output to the rear side can be increased as compared with the case where the amount of light is arranged in the direction of 90 degrees. This predetermined angle is set in consideration of the position of the rear decorative portion 11 and the distribution of the amount of light to be output to the front side of the front decorative portion 50 and the amount of light to be output to the rear side thereof. ing.

A colorless and transparent flat plate-shaped light entry window 62 forming a part of the rear member 42 is provided between the light source 30 and the front side decorative portion 50, and the light entry window 62 is viewed from above. The LED elements 32L and 32R are arranged so as to intersect the main direction of the primary light at 90 degrees, so that the decrease in the amount of light due to the reflection by the light entry window 62 is minimized. Further, the thickness of the light entry window 62 is made substantially uniform so that the traveling direction of the light does not change before and after passing through the light entry window 62, but the surface of the light entry window 62 on the front side decorative portion 50 side is the light source 30. It may have a plate-like shape that is inclined at a predetermined angle with respect to the side surface, and may be configured to uniformly change the traveling direction of light by refraction before and after passing through the light entry window 62. Further, the light entry window 62 is configured such that the primary light based on the LED elements 32L and 32R passes through the inside of the rear member 42 forming the light entry window 62, but the light entry is not limited to this configuration. The window 62 may be provided with an opening or a notch so that the primary light passes through the opening or the notch instead of the inside of the rear member 42. Further, the light entry window 62 may not be provided, and the primary light from each of the LED elements 32L and 32R may be directly irradiated to the front side decorative portion 50.

The front side decorative portion 50 outputs light to the rear side opposite to the front side output from the plurality of LED elements 32L and 32R of the light source 30 on the back surface 50B side (rear side light output means). It is assumed that the configuration is provided with.

Specifically, the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50 is a flat and smooth flat surface. Therefore, a part of the primary light based on each of the LED elements 32L and 32R is passed through the front side decorative portion 50, and a part of the primary light is reflected by the front side decorative portion 50 to be reflected to the rear side (hereinafter, in the following,). (Also called secondary light) can be output. This secondary light is reflected on the back surface of the decorative plate 52 constituting the front decorative portion 50, or is reflected on the boundary surface between the decorative plate 52 and the front window 51, whereby the back surface of the front decorative portion 50 is reflected. It is output to the 50B side. The decorative plate 52 and the front window 51 are not limited to a structure in which the back surface thereof is a flat and smooth flat surface, and the back surface thereof may be formed in a curved surface such as a smooth arc shape or a curved shape. In the case of this configuration, it is possible to make the spread of the secondary light larger or smaller depending on the shape of the curved surface, as compared with the case of reflecting the light on a flat surface. Further, the front side decorative portion 50 is not limited to the configuration in which the decorative plate 52 abuts on the front window 51, and may be configured to be separated from each other. Further, the front side decorative portion 50 is not limited to the configuration in which the decorative plate 52 is arranged on the back side of the front window 51, and the decorative plate 52 may be arranged on the front side of the front window 51. When the decorative plate 52 is arranged on the front side of the front window 51, secondary light can be output before the light is absorbed by the decorative plate 52, as compared with the case where the decorative plate 52 is arranged on the back side of the front window 51. It is also possible to increase the intensity of the secondary light relatively. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the front side decorative portion 50 can output light to the rear side thereof, and for example, a reflective portion (not shown) separate from the front window 51 and the decorative plate 52 on the back surface side of the decorative plate 52. It may be configured to provide. In the case of this configuration, the reflective portion outputs the secondary light in a predetermined direction regardless of the arrangement and shape of the front window 51 and the decorative plate 52, and the secondary light is emitted with the back surface of the separate reflective portion as a concave surface. It is also possible to output the secondary light so as to gather in a predetermined direction or to spread the secondary light with the back surface as a convex surface.

The rear side decorative portion 11 is provided separately from the front side decorative portion 50 (first decorative portion) at a portion irradiated with the light output from the back surface (rear side light output means) of the front side decorative portion 50. , The configuration is provided behind the light emitting substrate 31 constituting the light source 30.

Specifically, the rear side decorative portion 11 is provided as a part of the left movable member 10, and when the left movable member 10 is in a separated posture, the rear side decorative portion 11 is separated from the front side decorative portion 50 and is not irradiated with the primary light. However, the secondary light is located at the irradiated part. Specifically, in the rear decorative portion 11, the upper portion thereof does not overlap the front decorative portion 50 in the front-rear direction, and the central portion thereof partially overlaps the front decorative portion 50 in the front-rear direction. Is arranged so as to overlap the front decorative portion 50 in the front-rear direction, and from the viewpoint of the seated player, the central portion thereof can be visually recognized over the entire left-right direction, and the lower portion thereof can be seen. At least part of the left-right direction is visibly arranged. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the rear decoration portion 11 irradiated with the secondary light through the gap between the rear decoration portion 11 and the front decoration portion 50. Further, the secondary light can be applied to the rear decorative portion 11 without obstructing the irradiation of the primary light to the front decorative portion 50. Hereinafter, the rear side decorative portion 11 will be described as being arranged at a position when the left movable member 10 takes a separated posture. The rear side decorative portion 11 is not limited to a configuration that is movably provided as a part of the left movable member 10, but may be a configuration that is movably provided. Further, the front side decorative portion 50 may be provided so as to be immovable or movable, and the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear side decorative portion 11 are arranged at specific positions. In the state, the front side decorative portion 50 may be illuminated by the primary light from the light source 30, and the rear side decorative portion 11 may be illuminated by the secondary light.

Further, the rear side decorative portion 11 is provided at a position where a part thereof overlaps with the front side decorative portion 50 in the front-rear direction (in front view), and at least the overlapping portion is illuminated by the secondary light. Therefore, the overlapping portion that is not illuminated by external light (for example, the light from the lighting device provided in the space where the pachinko machine 100 is installed) or is difficult to be illuminated can be illuminated by the light from the light source 30. Compared with the case where there is no illumination by this light, it is possible to improve the uniformity of illumination with respect to the entire rear side decorative portion 11. The rear side decorative portion 11 is not limited to a configuration in which a part thereof is provided at a position where it overlaps with the front side decorative portion 50 in the front-rear direction, but the entire rear side decorative portion 11 is provided at a position where it overlaps with the front side decoration portion 50 in the front-rear direction. Alternatively, it may be provided at a position where it does not overlap with the front decorative portion 50 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the light source 30 is provided near the left end of the game board 400, the front side decoration portion 50 is provided on the right side of the light source, and the rear side decoration portion 11 is the game board 400 rather than the light source 30 and the front side decoration portion 50. It is installed on the center side. Therefore, when viewed from the front side (the line of sight of the player) on the center side of the game board 400, the rear side decorative portion 11 irradiated with the secondary light is passed through the gap between the rear side decorative portion 11 and the front side decorative portion 50. It becomes possible to make it easier to see. The light source 30, the front decorative portion 50, and the rear decorative portion 11 are not limited to the configuration in which they are arranged so as to be offset from the vicinity of the left end toward the center side in this order, and they are arranged near the right end, near the upper end, or near the lower end. It may be arranged so as to be offset from the center side.

The rear window 61 (reflection in another direction) capable of reflecting the light output to the rear side by the front decoration portion 50 (rear side light output means) in a direction different from that of the rear decoration portion 11 (second decoration portion). Means).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, a rear window 61 located behind the front window 51 is provided between the front decorative portion 50 and the rear decorative portion 11. In the front surface 61F (the surface on the front side decorative portion side) of the rear window 61, a part of the secondary light toward the rear side decorative portion 11 is passed from the front side decorative portion 50, and a part of the secondary light is passed through. It is configured to reflect on the front surface 61F. The rear member 42 constituting the rear window 61 is made of a colorless light-transmitting material (for example, a transparent resin). Therefore, a part of the light output to the rear side by the front side decorative portion 50 can be passed through, and a part of the light can be reflected. The rear window 61 is configured to be formed of a colorless light-transmitting material, but is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to be formed of a colored light-transmitting material.

Further, the rear window 61 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the front decorative portion 50 so that the distance from the front decorative portion 50 becomes narrower as the distance from the light source 30 increases. Further, the rear window 61 has a predetermined angle (for example, an angle range of 30 degrees) in which the direction perpendicular to the front surface 61F of the rear window 61 is different from the direction perpendicular to the main direction of the secondary light based on the LED elements 32L and 32R. Place it at an angle with. Therefore, while passing a part of the secondary light through the rear window 61, the path from the front side decoration portion 50 toward the rear window 61 is reversed, and the front side decoration portion 50 is irradiated with the primary light. It is possible to prevent the location and the location irradiated by the light reflected by the rear window 61 (hereinafter, also referred to as tertiary light) from becoming the same.

Here, a description will be given based on a specific example. As shown in FIG. 15B, the light output from the LED element 32L and traveling along the path ML1 (solid line) is the reflection point P1 on the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50, and a part of the light is a reflection point P1. It passes through the front side decoration part 50, and a part thereof advances toward the rear side decoration part 11. A part of the light that reaches the front surface 61F of the rear window 61 passes through the rear window 61 and is irradiated to the rear side decorative portion 11, and a part of the light is reflected by the front surface 61F of the rear window 61 and is rearward. Proceed toward the side decoration portion 11. Further, the light output from the LED element 32L and the path ML2 (single point chain line) is the same, but the light of the path ML1 is further reflected and passed toward the reflection point P2 on the left side of the reflection point P1. The light of the path ML2 is further reflected and passed toward the reflection point P3 on the right side of the reflection point P1. As a result, the part irradiated with the primary light and the part irradiated with the tertiary light can be made different by the light output from the LED element 32L, and the part irradiated with the primary light can be further distinguished. It is also possible to irradiate both the left and right sides. This also applies to the light output from the LED element 32R shown in FIG. 15C, and a part of the light reflected at the reflection point P4 in the front side decorative portion 50 is reflected on the left side of the reflection point P4. A part of the light irradiated to the point P5 and reflected at the reflection point P6 is irradiated to the right side of the reflection point P6. As a result, even if the front side decorative portion 50 cannot be irradiated with the primary light over the entire front side decorative portion 50, the entire front side decorative portion 50 can be irradiated with the light by the primary light and the tertiary light. It will be possible. Further, since the tertiary light follows a path longer than that of the primary light and then irradiates the front side decorative portion 50, the irradiation range thereof becomes large and the entire front side decorative portion 50 is easily irradiated.

In the cross section of the rear window 61, the front surface 61F is curved so as to be slightly recessed, and the tertiary light is directed to the left side of the irradiation position of the primary light based on the LED element 32R in the front side decorative portion 50. The shape is such that the tertiary light based on the LED element 32R can be easily output toward the right side of the irradiation position by the primary light based on the LED element 32L in the front side decorative portion 50.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, when the range in which the front side decorative portion 50 covers the rear side decorative portion 11 in the front-rear direction is larger than the case shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C. Is configured such that the inclination of the rear window becomes smaller according to the amount of protrusion of the front side decorative portion 50 to the right side. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C, light is repeatedly reflected on the back surface of the front side decoration portion 50 and the front surface 61F of the rear window 61 to the left end side of the front side decoration portion 50. (Path DL1) can be easily advanced, and light (path DL2, path DR) can be easily advanced to the right end side. Therefore, even if the length of the front side decorative portion 50 in the left-right direction is increased, it is possible to irradiate the entire portion with light from the LED elements 32L and 32R.

Further, the rear window 61 is formed of a rear member 42 different from the front member 41 forming the front window 51 of the front side decorative portion 50. Therefore, after fixing the decorative plate 52 of the front side decorative portion 50 to the back surface of the front window 51, the decorative plate is assembled by assembling the front member 41 constituting the front window 51 and the rear member 42 forming the rear window 61. The 52 can be easily arranged between the rear window 61 and the front window 51. The rear window 61 may be formed on the same member as the member forming the front decorative portion 50.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the front side decorative portion 50 capable of passing the light from the LED element 32L or the LED element 32R that outputs light toward a predetermined direction side to the front side where the player is located. And the back surface 50B of the front side decoration part 50 that outputs the light emitted from the LED element 32L and the LED element 32R to the rear side opposite to the front side where the player is located on the back side of the front side decoration part 50. A rear decorative portion 11 provided separately from the front decorative portion 50 is provided at a portion irradiated with a part of the light output from the back surface 50B. As a result, the front side decorative portion 50 is made to emit light by the light output from the LED element 32L and the LED element 32R, and the light based on the same LED elements 32L and 32R is output from the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50. The rear side decorative portion 11 can be made to emit light by the light, and the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where a dedicated light source is provided for each decorative portion.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the rear side decorative portion 11 is provided on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 31 of the light source 30. As a result, the front side decorative portion 50 is caused to emit light by the light radiated to the back surface 50B side of the rear side decorative portion 11 arranged in a place where the light from the LED elements 32L and 32R is not directly irradiated. Unlike the method of emitting light by the light emitted from the surface side, even if the light is emitted by the light based on the same LED elements 32L and 32R, the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear side decorative portion 11 emit light. Can be different.

Further, the light output to the rear side by the back surface of the front side decorative portion 50 is configured to be able to be reflected to a side different from the rear side decorative portion 11. As a result, the light after being reflected by the back surface of the front side decoration unit 50 is irradiated to the front side decoration unit 50 and the rear side decoration unit 11 without the reflection on the back surface of the front side decoration unit 50, for example. The front side decoration part 50 and the rear side decoration part 11 are irradiated with the light output from each LED element 32L, 32R toward a predetermined direction side by irradiating at a different irradiation position and irradiation angle. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of light emission between the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear side decorative portion 11.

Therefore, even if a limited number of LED elements 32L and 32R are used in the production by the front side decoration unit 50 and the rear side decoration unit 11, it is as if the LED elements 32L and 32R actually used for the player. It is possible to make it appear as if light from more LED elements than the number of (14) is radiating to the front side decoration part 50 and the rear side decoration part 11, and the front side decoration part 50 and the rear side decoration part 11 can be seen. It is possible to carry out a suitable effect according to 11.

Hereinafter, a further characteristic configuration regarding irradiation of light to the front side decoration portion 50 and the rear side decoration portion 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a perspective view and a cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of a plurality of decorative portions by a cut surface including the XU-XU line of FIG. 7.

As shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, the front surface 62F of the light entry window 62 (the surface on the side where the front side decorative portion 50 is located) is output from the front surface 61F of the rear window 61. A portion to be irradiated with light, which is provided between the front side decorative portion 50 and the LED elements 32L and 32R of the light source 30, and at least a part of the tertiary light can be reflected to the side where the front side decorative portion 50 is provided. The configuration is as follows. Further, by assembling the front member 41 and the rear member 42, the peripheral portion is surrounded by the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50, the front surface 61F of the rear window 61, and the front surface 62F of the light entry window 62. The configuration is such that a space (hereinafter, also referred to as a light emitting space 40) capable of repeatedly reflecting light output from the light source 30 in a predetermined direction on those three surfaces is formed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (B) and 17 (C), in the light emitting space 40, the primary light output from the light source 30 is emitted from the back surface of the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear window 61 inside the light emitting space 40. After being reflected by the front surface 61F, it is further reflected by the back surface 62B (the surface on the side where the light source 30 is located) of the light entry window 62, and the traveling paths UL1 and UR1 that are re-irradiated to the front side decorative portion 50 are followed. The configuration should be possible. As a result, even if the light is not reflected toward the front side decoration portion 50 by the back surface 50B of the rear window 61, it is directed to the front side decoration portion 50 again by the reflection at the front surface 62F of the light entry window 62. This also enables light entering the light emitting space 40 through the light entry window 62 to the front side, as compared with the case where the light entry window 62 is not provided or the front surface 62F of the light entry window 62 has no reflectivity. It becomes possible to efficiently irradiate the decorative portion 50 and the rear decorative portion 11.

Specifically, in the light emitting space 40, the left end of the rear window 61 and the right end of the light entry window 62 are continuous, and the left end of the light entry window 62 and the left end of the front side decorative portion 50 are connected via the left connection portion 63. The right end of the front side decorative portion 50 and the right end of the rear window 61 are continuous via the right connecting portion 64, and are formed in a closed space in which the entire peripheral portion is surrounded by a cross-sectional view. By providing a left connecting portion 63 connecting between the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear window 61 and a right connecting portion 64 connecting between the front side decorative portion 50 and the light entry window 62, those connecting portions can be connected. Light that is emitted to the outside of the light emitting space 40 from between the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear window 61 or the light entry window 62 and does not contribute to the light emission of the front side decorative portion 50 or the rear side decorative portion 11 as compared with the case where the front side decorative portion 50 is not provided. Can be suppressed. The front side decorative portion 50 and the rear window 61 are not limited to the configuration in which they are continuous via the right connecting portion 64, and may be configured in which they are continuous without the right connecting portion 64. Similarly, the front side decorative portion 50 and the light entry window 62 are not limited to a configuration in which they are continuous via the left connecting portion 63, and may be configured in which they are continuous without passing through the left connecting portion 63.

The light emitting space 40 is preferably configured to be formed in a closed space in a cross-sectional view from the viewpoint of efficiently emitting light from the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear side decorative portion, but is not limited to this, and the right connecting portion is not limited to this. A gap is formed between the front decorative portion 50 and the rear window 61 without providing the 64, or a gap is formed between the front decorative portion 50 and the light entry window 62 without providing the left connecting portion 63. It may be configured to form a space that is not completely closed in a cross-sectional view. Further, since the light emitted to the outside of the light emitting space 40 through the light entry window 62 does not contribute to the light emission of the front side decorative portion 50 and the rear side decorative portion 11, the light entry window 62 is the front surface 62F or the back surface thereof. A reflective sheet may be provided on the 62B except for the range through which the light from the light source 30 passes to increase the reflectance of the light entry window 62 toward the light emitting space 40.

Further, inside the light emitting space 40, the primary light output from the light source 30 is reflected by the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50 and the front surface 61F of the rear window 61, and then the right surface 63L of the left connection portion 63. The configuration is such that it is possible to follow the traveling paths UL2 and UR2 that are further reflected by and re-irradiated to the front side decorative portion 50. As a result, for the same reason as when the front surface 62F of the light entry window 62 is configured to be reflective, the light that has entered the light emitting space 40 through the light entry window 62 is efficiently sent to the front side decoration portion 50 and the rear side decoration portion 11. It becomes possible to irradiate. Further, the right connection portion 64 is the same as the left connection portion 63.

The light emitting space 40 is a window that surrounds the peripheral portion and is oriented so that the player cannot see the window through which the light that emits light from the decorative portion (rear side decorative portion 11) different from the front side decorative portion 50 passes. The rear window 61 is provided in the above, and the light passing through the rear window 61 can be emitted from the front side of the rear decoration portion 11. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the player can visually recognize a window through which light that emits light different from the front decorative portion 50 passes, in place of or in addition to the rear window 61 and the rear decorative portion 11. Decorative parts such as other decorative plates similar to the decorative plate 52 are provided so as to be arranged in the direction and overlap with the visible window arranged in the direction that the player can see, and the decorative plate is mounted from the back side. It may be configured to emit light by light irradiation. In this configuration, the other decorative plates may be arranged in contact with or separated from the front surface side of the visible window, or may be arranged in contact with or separated from the back surface side of the visible window. May be good.

<Direction by a decorative part that can reflect light>
Next, the effect of the decorative portion that reflects light will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22. FIG. 18 is a front view of the game board 700 provided with the reflective decorative portion 711 as the decorative portion. Further, FIG. 19 is a front view of the game board 700 schematically showing the relative positions of the main parts involved in the effect of the reflective decoration part 711.

The pachinko machine 100 can be used as another model by replacing the gaming board 400 shown in FIG. 7 with another gaming board 700 shown in FIG. 18, and in the following, the pachinko machine provided with the gaming board 700 can be used. The decorative part of the machine 100 will be described. The game board 700 has the same structure as the game board 400 shown in FIG. 7, except that the configurations related to various members and devices for staging are different. Therefore, in the game board 700, the members having the same role as the game board 400 are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

As shown in FIG. 18, the gaming board 700 of the pachinko machine 100 includes a reflective decorative body 710 (reflection means) having a reflective decorative portion 711 decorated to reflect light. Further, the game board 700 includes a ring-shaped ring-shaped decorative body 740 (see also FIG. 19: another decorative means) provided separately from the reflective decorative body 710, and a central decorative body 750 provided on the center side of the game board 700 (FIG. 19). See also 19: Another decorative means). Specifically, the reflective decorative body 710 is provided on the back surface side of the base 401 of the game board 700 so as to be located on the left side from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction on the lower end side of the game board 700. Further, the annular decorative body 740 is provided on the back surface side of the substrate 401 so as to surround the peripheral edge of the display unit 479a of the decorative symbol display device 479 (display means) in front view. Further, the central decorative body 750 is provided on the back surface side of the substrate 401 on the lower side of the display unit 479a.

The pachinko machine 100 is configured to include all of the reflective decorative body 710, the annular decorative body 740, and the central decorative body 750, but it is not necessary to provide all of them, and only a part thereof may be provided. Further, the gaming board 400 shown in FIG. 7 may be provided with at least a part of the reflective decorative body 710, the annular decorative body 740, and the central decorative body 750.

As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 100 is arranged so as to be overlapped with a plurality of annularly arranged light sources 720 (light emitting means) arranged in an annular shape so as to be overlapped behind the annular decorative body 740 and the central decorative body 750. It is provided with a central light source 730 (light emitting means). In the effect of the reflection decoration unit 711, the pachinko machine 100 irradiates the reflection decoration unit 711 with light output from at least one of the plurality of annularly arranged light sources 720 or light output from the central light source 730, thereby producing the effect. Improve the effect of.

Here, the arrangement relationship between the reflective decoration unit 711 and various other members involved in the effect of the reflective decorative unit 711 will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective sectional view showing the vicinity of the reflective decorative body 710 by the cut surface including the Y1-Y1 line of FIG. In FIG. 20, only the outline (dashed line in the figure) of the central structure 420 is shown in order to clarify the positional relationship of the main parts involved in the effect of the reflective decorative body 710.

As shown in FIG. 20, the reflective decorative body 710 is provided on the back surface side of the base 401 of the game board 700. Further, the substrate 401 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin. Therefore, when the player looks at the game board 700 in a posture of being seated in a seat (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal posture), the player can visually recognize the reflective decoration portion 711 through the base 401. Further, many members such as members forming the central structure 420 provided near the center of the game board 700 and forming the lower stage 427 are made of colorless and transparent resin. For this reason, when the player looks at the game board 700 in a posture in which he / she sits leaning forward rather than in a normal posture (hereinafter, also referred to as a forward leaning posture) or in a standing posture for selecting a pachinko machine 100 to play. The reflective decoration portion 711 can be visually recognized through the colorless and transparent member constituting the central structure 420.

The member for seeing through the reflective decorative portion 711 such as the substrate 401 is made of a colorless and transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this structure, and a colored transparent resin may be used, and the colorless or colored transparency may be used. As long as it is a material having (permeability), it may be formed of a material other than resin. In the following, colorless or colored transparent resins and other materials are also referred to as light-transmitting materials. Further, the reflective decorative portion 711 is provided at a position where it can be indirectly visually recognized through other members, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the substrate 401 is not limited to this configuration and is located near the opening of the substrate 401 or the central structure 420. Or, it may be provided at a position where it can be directly seen through those openings, such as by projecting it so as to project to the rear side of the central structure 420. Further, the reflective decoration unit 711 is configured to be indirectly visible regardless of the posture of the player, but is not limited to this configuration, and may be indirectly visible or directly depending on the posture of the player. It may be configured to be provided at a position where it can be visually recognized, or it may be provided at a position where it can be visually recognized only directly regardless of the posture of the player. Further, the reflective decoration portion 711 is fixed to the substrate 401 and is provided at a position where the light output from the annularly arranged light source 720 and the central light source 730 can always be irradiated. It may be configured so that the light output from the annularly arranged light source 720 or the central light source 730 is irradiated when the reflection decoration portion 711 is moved to a predetermined position. Further, the reflective decorative body 710 is not limited to the configuration provided on the back surface side of the substrate 401, but also constitutes a configuration provided on the front surface side thereof and a member different from the members constituting the game board 700, for example, the intermediate block 103. It may be configured to be provided on a member other than the game board 700, a member constituting the front block 102, or a member constituting the rear block 104.

The reflection decoration unit 711 is a front where the player positions the light output from the lower left light source 720a (light emitting means) and the central light source 730 (light emitting means) forming a part of the plurality of annularly arranged light sources 720 (see FIG. 19). It is configured to be able to reflect to the side. Here, in the plurality of annularly arranged light sources 720, the lower left light source 720a and the lower right light source 720b arranged on the left and right on the lower side are set as one set, and five sets are the lower side, the upper left side, the lower left side, the upper right side and the right side. It is arranged in an annular shape so as to be located on the lower side, and the entire annular decorative body 740 can be made to emit light.

The lower left light source 720a outputs light toward the front side (predetermined direction side) on one side of the lower left substrate 721a (light emitting substrate) on which electronic components (not shown) and the lower left substrate 721a are mounted. It is configured to include a plurality of LED elements 722a (light emitting means) arranged in such an orientation. Further, the central light source 730 has a configuration in which a plurality of LED elements 732 (light emitting means) are provided on a central substrate 731 (light emitting substrate) having substantially the same outer shape as the central decorative portion 751 as in the annularly arranged light source 720. .. Even if the reflective decorative body 710 is arranged at a position where it can be irradiated with the light output from each of the plurality of LED elements 722a provided on the lower left substrate 721a, the light is output from only a part of them. It may be arranged at a position where it can be irradiated. Further, the reflection decoration unit 711 is mainly arranged at a position where it can be irradiated with the light output from the lower left light source 720a of one of the plurality of annularly arranged light sources 720, but the configuration is not limited to this. , The length of the reflective decoration unit 711 is increased so that it can be irradiated with the light output from two or more annularly arranged light sources 720, or the reflective ornamental body 710 is formed into an annular shape in front view from all the annularly arranged light sources 720. It may be configured to be arranged at a position where it can be irradiated with the output light. Further, the reflective decoration unit 711 is located at a position where light from both the light sources (lower left light source 720a and central light source 730) provided corresponding to the decorative bodies of the annular decoration body 740 and the central decoration body 750 can be irradiated. Although the configuration is arranged, the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the configuration is such that the annular decorative body 740 and the central decorative body 750 are arranged at a position where they can be irradiated with light from a light source provided corresponding to one of the decorative bodies. May be good. Further, the reflective decoration unit 711 may be configured to be capable of irradiating light from a dedicated light source that is not used for irradiating other decorations in addition to or in place of the lower left light source 720a and the central light source 730.

The reflective decoration unit 711 is provided with a predetermined decoration so that it can be visually recognized from the player side. Specifically, the reflection decoration portion 711 is formed in a plate shape having transparency, and includes a passage portion 712 through which the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left light source 720a and the LED element 732 of the central light source 730 passes. .. Further, the reflection decoration portion 711 is provided so as to overlap the passing portion 712 on the lower side (the side to be output after the light has passed), and includes the reflecting portion 713 capable of reflecting the light passing through the passing portion 712. .. The reflecting portion 713 is arranged below the passing portion 712, reflects the light once passed through the passing portion 712, and outputs the light upward and forward. Further, the upper surface of the passing portion 712 (the surface opposite to the reflecting portion 713) is decorated with unevenness (undulating shape), and this upper surface becomes the decorative surface 712S. The reflective decorative portion 711 is not limited to the configuration in which the surface of the passing portion 712 opposite to the reflective portion 713 is decorated, and in addition to or in place of that surface, the surface of the passing portion 712 on the reflective portion 713 side. It may be configured to decorate. Further, the reflective decorative portion 711 is not limited to the configuration in which the surface of the passing portion 712 is decorated by the unevenness formed on the surface of the passing portion 712, and the surface of the passing portion 712 is provided with a decorative member such as a decorative seal or a plate. It may be configured to be decorated by arranging it in contact with or separated from the above. Further, the reflective decorative portion 711 is provided with a passing portion 712 and a reflecting portion 713, and the passing portion 712 is decorated. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the passing portion 712 is not provided and the reflecting portion 713 is not provided. It may be configured to be decorated by forming unevenness on the upper surface or providing a decorative member on the upper surface. Further, the reflective decorative portion 711 is configured to include a passing portion 712 formed of a single member, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and members formed of transparent materials having different colors may be combined to form an upper surface. It may be configured to include a passage portion having a flat or undulating decorative surface. Further, the reflective decorative portion 711 has a configuration in which the passing portion 712 is actually decorated, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the passing portion 712 is not actually decorated and the surface is simply made a flat surface. The flat surface may be configured to pseudo-decorate the passing portion 712 and the reflecting portion 713 by, for example, projecting decoration by another decorative portion such as the rotating decorative portion 742.

The reflective decorative portion 711 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the lower left substrate 721a and the central substrate 731 in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the reflective decorative body 710 is below the display unit 479a of the decorative symbol display device 479 provided in the center of the game board 700 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the front side and the lower side (hereinafter, also referred to as the lower front side) of the lower left substrate 721a and the central substrate 731. Therefore, due to the reflection in the reflection decoration unit 711, the lower front side is moved away from the position of the eyes of the player sitting in the standard posture (generally, the position separated from the center of the display unit 479a in the front-rear direction by a predetermined interval). It is possible to advance the light traveling to the front side and the upper side (hereinafter, also referred to as the upper front side) so as to approach the position. The reflective decorative body 710 is provided below the display unit 479a, and the light is reflected upward by the reflective decorative body 710. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the reflective decorative body 710 is provided above the display unit 479a. The light may be reflected downward, the light may be reflected to the left side of the display unit 479a, or the light may be reflected to the left side of the display unit 479a. It may be configured to reflect to the right side.

The decorative surface 712S is configured to be arranged in an inclined direction when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the plate-shaped passing portion 712 is provided so as to project in a direction substantially perpendicular to the substrate 401 of the game board 700 at a position separated from the display portion 479a on the lower side. Therefore, the decorative surface 712S, which is the upper surface of the passing portion 712, is arranged so as to be inclined at a predetermined angle (for example, 40 °) when viewed from the player sitting in the standard posture, and is visually recognized by the player. While ensuring the size of the surface 712S within a predetermined range, the decorative surface 712S can be brightly visually recognized by the player. The decorative surface 712S is arranged so that the direction of its vertical line is not perpendicular to the line of sight of the player sitting in the standard posture (the line of sight facing diagonally downward), but is inclined at a predetermined angle. It is preferable that the configuration is arranged so as to incline at an angle within an angle range of 10 ° to 80 ° with respect to the line of sight, and the configuration is arranged in an angle range of 25 ° to 60 °. Is even more preferable. Further, the decorative surface 712S is not limited to the configuration arranged so as to project vertically with respect to the substrate 401, and may be arranged so as to project so as to project in an inclined direction with respect to the substrate 401. In this configuration, the inclination of the passing portion 712 with respect to the substrate 401 may be changed by adjusting the installation angle of the passing portion 712 having a substantially uniform thickness, or the thickness of the passing portion 712 may not be uniform and the substrate may not be uniform. It may be changed by adjusting the thickness according to the distance from the back surface of 401. Further, the decorative surface 712S is arranged so as to be inclined at a certain angle with respect to the substrate 401, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the angle may be changed depending on the portion of the decorative surface 712S. The inclination of the decorative surface 712S is determined by the player having the decorative surface 712S having a predetermined size and a predetermined size in consideration of the position arranged on the game board 700 and the relative position with the lower left light source 720a and the central light source 730. It is preferable to set the angle so that it can be visually recognized by the brightness. For example, when the decorative surface 712S is provided below the position shown in FIG. 18, the decorative surface 712S is projected so as to incline downward as the distance from the back surface of the substrate 401 increases, and the light reflected by the reflective decorative portion 711. Is preferably advanced toward the position of the player's eyes.

Here, the output of the light from the reflection decoration unit 711 based on the light output from the annularly arranged light source 720 (lower left light source 720a) will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 shows the vicinity of the reflection decoration body 710 by the cut surface including the Y1-Y1 line of FIG. 18 in order to explain the embodiment of irradiating the reflection decoration unit 711 with the light from the annular arrangement light source 720 (lower left light source 720a). It is sectional drawing which shows.

As shown in FIG. 21, the light output from the lower left light source 720a (for example, the light of the path shown by the solid line and the alternate long and short dash line) passes through the annular decoration body 740 provided separately from the reflection decoration body 710 and is reflected. The decorative portion 711 is irradiated. By this irradiation, the reflection decoration unit 711 outputs light to the player side. In the following, the configuration of the annular decorative body 740 will be described prior to the description of the mode of irradiating the reflective decorative portion 711 with light.

The annular decorative body 740 is a lower left movable decorative portion that can be moved toward the center side of the display portion 479a of the decorative pattern display device 479 as a decorative portion to which the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a is irradiated. 741a is provided. The lower left movable decorative portion 741a is one of a plurality of movable decorative portions 741 provided corresponding to each of the plurality of annular arrangement substrates 721, and is provided corresponding to the lower left substrate 721a. Further, the annular decorative body 740 covers all the movable decorative parts 741 on the front side as a decorative part to which the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a is irradiated, and the rotation axis in the front-rear direction of the game board 700. The ring-shaped rotating decorative portion 742 that can be rotated is provided. The lower left substrate 721a is integrated with the lower left movable decorative portion 741 and is supported by the substrate 401 via the annular decorative support portion 749 that supports the lower left movable decorative portion 741 and the rotary decorative portion 742 on the substrate 401. Further, the lower left movable decoration unit 741a and the rotary decoration unit 742 can pass the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a to the front side where the player is located. Therefore, the reflective decorative portion 711 can be irradiated with light that has passed through the lower left movable decorative portion 741a and the rotating decorative portion 742. By this irradiation, the player can visually recognize the decoration of the decorative surface 712S.

The lower left movable decorative portion 741 and the rotating decorative portion 742 do not have to be configured to allow light to pass through as a whole, and may be configured to allow light to pass through only a part thereof. Further, the reflective decoration portion 711 is provided at a position where the light passing through the two decoration portions of the lower left movable decoration portion 741 and the rotation decoration portion 742 is irradiated, but the configuration is not limited to this. It may be provided at a position where the light that has passed through one of the decorative portions is irradiated. Further, the reflective decoration unit 711 is provided at a position where the light passing through the two decorative portions of the lower left movable decoration unit 741 and the rotary decoration unit 742 is irradiated, but the reflection decoration unit 711 is provided on the game board 700. Separately, three or more decorative portions may be provided and provided at a position where the light passing through the decorative portions is irradiated. Further, the reflective decorative portion 711 is configured to be irradiated with light that has passed through the member forming the lower left movable decorative portion 741 and the rotating decorative portion 742, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the lower left movable decorative portion 741 and the rotating decorative portion 742 are not limited to this configuration. The decorative portion 742 may be provided with an opening, and the light may be directly irradiated to the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a, such as allowing light to travel through the opening. Further, the reflective decorative portion 711 is configured to be irradiated with light that has passed through the lower left movable decorative portion 741 and the rotating decorative portion 742, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the game board 700 is provided with an optical fiber, a light guide plate, or the like. A light guide member that guides light in a predetermined direction may be provided, and the light guided by the light guide member may be applied to the reflection decoration unit 711.

The decoration formed on the reflective decoration portion 711 is made of a colorless and transparent resin. Therefore, the decoration is difficult or invisible when the light output from the annularly arranged light source 720 or the central light source 730 is not irradiated, and becomes visible when the light is irradiated. Therefore, by changing the reflective decoration unit 711 from the state not irradiated with light to the illuminated state, it is possible to show the player that the decoration in the reflective decoration unit 711 appears. The decoration in the reflection decoration unit 711 is configured to be difficult to see or invisible when the light output from the annularly arranged light source 720 or the central light source 730 is not irradiated, but the decoration is not limited to this configuration and the light is not irradiated. Even in this case, the configuration may be visible.

The back surfaces of the lower left movable decorative portion 741a and the rotating decorative portion 742 (the arrangement side of the lower left light source 720a) have a shape in which irregularities are continuously formed. Therefore, the light that has passed through the lower left movable decorative portion 741a and the rotating decorative portion 742 can be made to travel (scatter) in various directions, and the lower left movable decorative portion 741a and the rotating decorative portion 742 can be entirely covered with the light. The light output from the LED elements 722a scattered on the lower left substrate 721a can be irradiated. Further, it is possible to irradiate the reflective decorative portion 711 with the light that has passed through the movable decorative portion 741a and the rotating decorative portion 742 at various angles. As described above, since the light reflected by the reflective decoration unit 711 can be irradiated with light at various angles, the light reflected by the reflective decorative unit 711 can also travel toward the player side at various angles. Therefore, it is possible to increase the angle range in which the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player, and even if the position of the eyes differs due to the difference in the sitting height of the player, the player also takes a forward leaning posture from the standard posture. Even if the position of the eyes is changed by changing the posture to lean backward, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the reflective decoration portion 711.

Here, the reflection of the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a in the reflection decorative portion 711 will be described. The passing portion 712 of the reflective decorative portion 711 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, and the reflective portion 713 has a glossy surface such as an aluminum foil, a film, or a plate attached to the lower surface of the passing portion 712. It is made of a metal member. Therefore, the light irradiated to the reflective decorative portion 711 is reflected by the decorative surface 712S which is the upper surface of the passing portion 712 and the upper surface of the reflecting portion 713 (the interface between the decorative surface 712S and the reflecting portion 713). Since the light reflected on the upper surface of the decorative surface 712S and the light reflected on the upper surface of the reflecting portion 713 irradiate different parts of the decorative surface 712S, it is possible to expand the brightly visible range on the decorative surface 712S. become. Further, since the light is visually recognized by the player at the same time, the decoration of the decorative surface 712S can be visually recognized so as to overlap at a displaced position. The deviation of the decoration visually recognized by the player can be adjusted by the thickness of the passing portion 712, and the deviation makes it possible to visually recognize the decoration of the decorative surface 712S in three dimensions.

The passing portion 712 is configured to be made of a colorless and transparent resin, but is not limited to this configuration, and is not limited to this configuration, and is composed of a colored transparent resin or a colorless or colored material other than a resin capable of passing light. It may be a configuration formed by. Further, the reflective portion 713 is provided by attaching a metal member to the passing portion 712, but is not limited to this configuration, and is provided in a film shape by depositing a metal material or the like on the passing portion 712. It may be configured. The reflective portion 713 is provided in contact with the passing portion 712, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the reflecting portion 713 may be provided so as to be separated from the passing portion 712. In the case of this configuration, the deviation of the decoration visually recognized by the player can be adjusted by the distance between the passing portion 712 and the reflecting portion 713.

The decorative surface 712S is configured to include an undulating shape portion on the surface side opposite to the reflective portion 713. Specifically, the plate-shaped passing portion 712 forming the decorative surface 712S protrudes from the flat region 712a having a substantially uniform thickness and the upper surface of the flat region 712a with a predetermined slight protrusion amount (for example, 1 mm or less). The decorative surface 712S, which is the upper surface of the passing portion 712, is formed to have a shape including an undulating shape portion by forming the decorative surface 712b that resembles a predetermined figure. When the decorative surface 712S is irradiated with the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a, the decoration can be visually recognized by the player as if the decoration protrudes higher than the actual protrusion amount. Therefore, the decoration of the decorative surface 712S can be made conspicuous, and the effect of the effect of the reflective decorative portion 711 can be enhanced.

The upper surface of the protruding decorative region 712b is configured to have a constant height with respect to the upper surface of the flat region 712a, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the height may differ depending on the portion. Further, the passing portion 712 is not limited to a configuration in which a predetermined figure as a decoration is projected from the flat region 712a on the opposite side of the reflecting portion 713, and may be configured to be recessed on the reflecting portion 713 side with respect to the flat region 712a. In this case, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the decoration is depressed deeper than the actual amount of depression. Further, the flat region 712a is configured to have the same thickness, but is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to become thicker or thinner as the distance from the substrate 401 increases. With this configuration, the inclination of the decorative surface 712S as seen from the player side can be set to a predetermined angle by changing the thickness of the flat region 712a.

The lower left movable decoration portion 741a and the rotary decoration portion 742 are formed with decorations using a plurality of colors different from the colors of the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a. Therefore, it is possible to irradiate the reflection decoration portion 711 with light having a color different from that of the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a, and it is also possible to develop the reflection decoration portion 711 in a different color depending on the portion. Further, by rotating the rotating decorative portion 742, the same portion of the reflective decorative portion 711 can be colored with a different color.

Here, the output of the light from the reflection decoration unit 711 based on the light output from the central light source 730 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the reflective decorative body 710 by the cut surface including the Y1-Y1 line of FIG. 18 in order to explain the mode of irradiating the reflective decorative body 710 with the light from the central light source 730.

As shown in FIG. 22, the light output from the central light source 730 is reflected by the central decoration body 750 provided separately from the reflection decoration body 710 and is applied to the reflection decoration unit 711. In the following, the configuration of the central decorative body 750 will be described prior to the description of the mode of irradiating the reflective decorative portion 711 with light.

The central decorative body 750 is arranged between the decorated decorative member 753 and the decorative member 753 and the central substrate 731 as a decorative portion to which the light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 is irradiated. The central decorative portion 751 is provided with a scattering member 754 that scatters the light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 in various directions. The central substrate 731 is integrated with the central decorative portion 751 and is supported by the substrate 401 via the central decorative support portion 759 that supports the central decorative portion 751. Further, the decorative member 753 is formed of a colored transparent resin, and the scattering member 754 is formed of a colorless transparent resin. Therefore, the decorative member 753 and the scattering member 754 can pass a part of the light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 to the front side where the player is located, and can reflect a part of the light. ..

The decorative member 753 and the scattering member 754 are configured to be made of resin, but are not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to be formed of a colorless or colored material other than the resin capable of passing light. Further, the central decorative portion 751 is provided with a scattering member 754 separately from the decorative member 753, and is configured to scatter light by the unevenness formed on the back surface (the surface on the central substrate 731 side) of the scattering member 754. However, the scattering member 754 may not be provided, and the decorative member 753 may be configured to scatter light by forming irregularities on the back surface side.

The central decorative body 750 includes a frame portion 752 that surrounds the peripheral edge of the central decorative portion 751. The frame portion 752 is supported by the substrate 401 together with the central decorative portion 751 via the central decorative support portion 759. Further, the frame portion 752 covers only a part of the front side of the lower end portion 754B where the reflection decoration portion 711 is located in the scattering member 754. Further, the frame portion 752 is formed of a transparent resin whose surface is covered with a reflective film (not shown) formed by vapor deposition. Therefore, the light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 and reflected on the back surface of the scattering member 754 (for example, the light traveling along the path shown by the solid line or the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 22) is transferred to the frame portion 752. It is possible to pass through the lower end portion 754B which is not covered by the lower end portion 752B and output to the reflection decoration portion 711 side.

The central decorative portion 751 reflects the light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731, and the reflected light passes through the lower end portion 754B of the scattering member 754 which is not covered by the lower end portion 752B of the frame portion 752. However, the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 is covered by the lower end portion 752B without being reflected by the scattering member 754. It may be configured to pass through the lower end portion 754B and output to the reflection decoration portion 711 side. For example, at least one LED element 732 provided on the central substrate 731 is arranged so as to output in a direction inclined downward (reflection decoration portion 711 side) with respect to the vertical direction, and is output from the LED element 732. It may be configured to allow the emitted light to travel along the path shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. Further, the central decoration portion 751 is configured to allow the light output from the LED element 732 to pass through the lower end portion 754B and output it to the reflection decoration portion 711 side. A notch may be provided and the light may be output to the reflective decoration portion 711 side through the opening or the notch. Further, the central decorative portion 751 is configured to provide a reflective film on the surface of the lower end portion 753B of the frame portion 752, and limit the light that passes through the lower end portion 754B and is output to the reflective decorative portion 711 side by the lower end portion 752B. However, not limited to this configuration, a reflective film is not provided on the surface of the lower end portion 753B of the frame portion 752, and light is output to the reflective decorative portion 711 side even from the portion where the lower end portion 752B and the lower end portion 754B overlap. May be good.

The central decorative body 750 includes a central decorative support portion 759 that supports the central decorative portion 751 with respect to the substrate 401. The central decorative support portion 759 is on the rear side of the lower end portion 754B of the scattering member 754 and the decorative surface 712S of the reflective decorative portion 711, and is a wall 759B formed at a height position between the lower end portion 754B and the decorative surface 712S. including. The wall 759B is integrally molded with the central decorative support portion 759 and is made of a colorless and transparent resin. Therefore, the wall 759B can reflect a part of the light that has been reflected by the scattering member 754 and passed through the lower end portion 754B toward the rear side to the front side and output it to the reflection decoration unit 711. The wall 759B is configured to allow a part of the irradiated light to pass through regardless of the irradiated portion, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the LED of the lower left substrate 721a is applied to a part of the surface of the wall 759B. A reflective member capable of reflecting light may be provided so as to limit the range through which the light can pass, as long as the passage of the light output from the element 722a is not significantly restricted. In the case of this configuration, the reflectance of the light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 can be increased, and the decorative surface 712S can more efficiently output the light to the player side.

Reflection of light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 The reflection of the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a is the same as that of the reflection of the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a. The decorations can be visually recognized so as to overlap at different positions.

In the covering range where the lower end portion 752B of the frame portion 752 covers the lower end portion 754B of the scattering member 754, the light output from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 is irradiated with the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a. It is set to irradiate in an angle range that does not overlap with the angle range to be applied (hereinafter, also referred to as an irradiation angle range). Therefore, the angle range in which the decorative surface 712S can be visually recognized brightly can be expanded. For example, even when the player looks at the decorative surface 712S in a forward leaning posture or in a standing posture as in the case of selecting a pachinko machine to play, the player is made to visually recognize the decoration of the decorative surface 712S brightly. You can also do it. Further, by setting so that the irradiation angle ranges do not overlap, the decoration of the decorative surface 712S is visually recognized by overlapping at four offset positions as in the case where the irradiation angle ranges overlap, and it becomes difficult to see three-dimensionally. Can be prevented. Therefore, when the player can visually recognize the decorative surface 712S brightly by the light output from the LED element 722a or the LED element 732, the decoration of the decorative surface 712S can be visually recognized three-dimensionally by the player.

The central decorative portion 751 is colored so as to develop a color different from that of the movable decorative portion 741 and the rotating decorative portion 742. Therefore, when the player changes the posture from the standard posture to the forward leaning posture, for example, the emission color of the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a and the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 is not changed. , The light emitting color of the decorative surface 712S can also be changed. The coverage range of the lower end portion 754B of the scattering member 754 by the lower end portion 752B of the frame portion 752 is not limited to the configuration in which the irradiation angle ranges do not overlap, and at least a part of the irradiation angle range is set to overlap. It may be configured.

The central decorative body 750 is configured to reflect a part of the light output from each LED element 732 provided on the central substrate 731 toward the lower end portion 754B of the scattering member 754 which is not covered by the lower end portion 752B of the frame portion 752. It may be configured to reflect a part of the light from only a part of the LED element 732 provided on the central substrate 731 toward the lower end portion 754B which is not covered by the lower end portion 752B.

The scattering member 754 is arranged so as to be inclined so that its back surface protrudes forward as it goes downward. Therefore, the light from the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731 can be easily reflected toward the lower end portion 754B of the scattering member 754 that is not covered by the lower end portion 752B of the frame portion 752.

In the above pachinko machine 100, the reflection decoration having the reflection decoration portion 711 capable of reflecting the light output from the LED element 722a provided on the lower left substrate 721a toward the predetermined direction side to the front side where the player is located. Equipped with a body 710. Further, the decorative surface 712S formed on the reflective decorative portion 711 is arranged so as to be inclined when viewed from the player side at a position where the decorative surface 712S does not overlap with the lower left substrate 721a in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the light reflected by the reflective decorative portion 711 is advanced toward a predetermined position such as the position of the player's eyes, and the size of the decorative surface 712S visually recognized by the player is suppressed from becoming excessively small. At the same time, it becomes possible for the player to brightly see the decorative surface 712S. Further, the same effect can be obtained by the light output from the LED element 732 provided on the central substrate 731.

Further, by irradiating the decorative surface 712S with light from both the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a and the LED element 732 of the central substrate 731, the angle range in which the player can visually recognize the emitted decorative surface 712S can be obtained. It is also possible to magnify the light as compared with the case of irradiating only one of them.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the pachinko machine 100 has a reflective decorative portion 711 capable of reflecting light output from the LED element 722a provided on the lower left substrate 721a toward a predetermined direction to the front side where the player is located. A reflective ornament 710 is provided. Further, the reflective decorative body 710 is composed of a plate-shaped passing portion 712 through which the light output from the LED element 722a passes and a reflecting portion 713 overlapping the passing portion 712 on the side where the light passing through the passing portion 712 is output. It is formed. Further, the decorative surface 712S is formed on the surface side of the passing portion 712 opposite to the reflecting portion 713.

As a result, the decoration of the decorative surface 712S that is visually recognized by the light reflected on the surface of the passing portion 712 without passing through the passing portion 712, and the passing portion 712 after passing through the passing portion 712 and reflected by the reflecting portion 713. It is possible to visually recognize the decorative surface 712S, which is visually recognized by the passing light, in a state of being overlapped with the decoration of the decorative surface 712S at a position deviated from the decoration. Therefore, even if the decorative surface 712S is formed in a plane with a small protrusion amount of the protruding decoration region 712b, the protruding decoration can be visually recognized three-dimensionally.

Hereinafter, other characteristic configurations relating to the decoration by the reflective decorative body 710 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 18, the decorative surface 712S is configured to have a curved shape so that the side on which the display unit 479a on which the decorative design (identification information) is displayed in the decorative design display device 479 (display means) is provided is inside. To. Since the outer edge of the player's field of view is generally a horizontally long ellipse, it is easy to fit the entire decorative surface 712S within the field of view when looking at the display unit 479a in which the main effect according to the progress of the game is executed. can. Further, regardless of which part of the reflection decoration unit 711 is irradiated with the light output from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a or the LED element 732 of the center substrate 731, the light reflected by the reflection decoration unit 711 is displayed. It becomes easier to move in the direction closer to the position of the player's eyes. Further, it becomes easy to make the angle formed by the line of sight of the player and each part of the decorative surface 712S constant, and it becomes possible to suppress the appearance of the decorative surface 712S being distorted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the decorative surface 712S of the reflective decorative portion 711 has a curved shape that generally follows the outer contour of the rotating decorative portion 742 of the annular decorative body 740 in front view. Further, on the decorative surface 712S, as decoration, a protruding decorative area 712b (see FIG. 20) that resembles a plurality of predetermined figures is formed along the outer contour of the rotating decorative portion 742. Further, a predetermined pattern (see FIG. 18) is formed as a decoration on the rotating decoration portion 742 as a whole. When the light from the LED element 722a of the lower left substrate 721a is output, the rotating decoration unit 742 is in a light emitting state, and the light passing through the rotation decoration unit 742 is irradiated to the reflection decoration unit 711. At this time, the player can visually recognize the decoration formed on the decorative surface 712S and can visually recognize the decoration of the rotating decorative portion 742 reflected on the decorative surface 712S. Therefore, it is possible to make the decorative surface 712S look like a complicated decoration to the player.

The decoration of the reflective decoration unit 711 and the decoration of the rotation decoration unit 742 are overlapped as a whole to be shown to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, the rotation decoration unit 742 has a decorative surface. A predetermined pattern capable of emphasizing one figure formed on the 712S may be locally applied to show the player that the figure to be emphasized changes with the rotation of the rotation decoration unit 742. Further, for example, the reflective decoration unit 711 is decorated to imitate a grassland, the rotating decoration unit 742 is decorated to imitate an animal, and the animal moves on the grassland as the rotating decoration unit 742 rotates. It may be configured to make it look like it runs through.

As shown in FIG. 18, at least a part of the reflective decoration portion 711 is in the vicinity of the lower middle start winning device 431B, and a game ball that may enter the lower middle starting winning device 431B from the left side passes through. It is placed in the vicinity of the passing area. Specifically, at least a part of the reflection decoration portion 711 is arranged so as to be located slightly below the passing region on the left side in the vicinity of the lower middle start winning device 431B in the front view. The behavior of the game ball in the vicinity of the lower middle start winning device 431B is one of the points that the player pays attention to. Therefore, when the player is paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the vicinity of the lower middle start winning device 431B, the attention point can be colored by the effect of the reflection decoration unit 711. It is also possible to make it appear as if the behavior of the game ball is performed in the decoration by the decorative surface 712S.

The reflective decoration portion 711 may be arranged so that at least a part thereof is located in the vicinity of the lower stage 427 formed at the lower end portion of the central structure 420. Here, the lower stage 427 repeatedly rolls the game ball that has fallen from the upper stage 426 left and right, and drops the game ball from the vicinity of the upper side of the lower middle start winning device 431B. The behavior of the game ball on the lower stage 427 is one of the points that the player pays attention to, and the point of interest can be colored by the effect of the reflective decoration unit 711. Further, the reflective decoration unit 711 may be configured to be arranged so as to be located in the vicinity of the upper stage 426, which is at least a part thereof which is one of the points of interest by the player.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the game board 700 has another reflective decorative body 710 having the same structure as the reflective decorative portion 711 but having another reflective decorative portion 711 having a different shape when viewed from the front. Be prepared. The effect of the other reflection decoration unit 711 is executed in the same manner as the effect of the reflection decoration unit 711, except that the light from the lower right light source 720b, which is one of the annularly arranged light sources 720, is irradiated. It works. Further, at least a part of the other reflective decorative body 710 is in the vicinity of the lower middle start winning device 431B as shown in FIG. 18, and may enter the lower middle starting winning device 431B from the right side. It is placed near the passing area through which the game ball passes. Therefore, the entire left and right sides in the vicinity of the lower middle start winning device 431B can be colored by the effect of the reflective decoration unit 711 and the other reflective decoration unit 711.

The pachinko machine 100 is configured to make the decorative surface 712S brightly visible by irradiating the decorative surface 712S with light from the annularly arranged light source 720 and the central light source 730. However, the decoration applied to the decorative surface 712S is directly applied. An annular light source as long as it can be visually recognized by the player in a state where the decorations are overlapped at different positions depending on whether the decorations are visually recognized or the decorations reflected by the reflecting portion 713 are indirectly visually recognized. The configuration may be such that the light from the 720 or the central light source 730 is not irradiated. Further, the configuration may be such that the light from various light sources provided in the pachinko machine 100 such as the annular arrangement light source 720 and the central light source 730 is not irradiated, but only the light from the indoor lighting or the like is irradiated.

<Control of entry of the game ball into the privilege area 409V>
Next, a configuration capable of suitably controlling the entry of the game ball into the privilege area 409V (specific passage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24 together with FIG. 7.

The entry of the game ball into the privilege area 409V is provided on the distribution mechanism 437 (see FIG. 7) provided at the entrance of the privilege area 409V and on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 437 in the flow direction of the game ball. It is controlled based on the operation control with the approach control mechanism 454 (see FIG. 7). Specifically, as long as the game is continued by the right-handed game method in the special gaming state in which the game shifts based on a part of the jackpot winning by the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (the first type of jackpot). , The operation control of the distribution mechanism 437 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 is executed so that the game ball enters the privilege area 409V. On the other hand, in the special gaming state in which the game shifts based on the winning of a jackpot of a different type from the jackpot of the first type (the jackpot of the second type), the distribution mechanism is prevented so that the game ball does not enter the privilege area 409V. The operation control between the 437 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 (switching mechanism) is executed. In the following, the special gaming state executed based on the first type of jackpot and scheduled to shift to the probabilistic gaming state by the entry of the game ball into the privilege area 409V is also referred to as the probabilistic gaming state. The special gaming state, which is executed based on the winning of the second type of jackpot and is scheduled to shift to the time-saving gaming state due to the absence of the game ball entering the privilege area 409V, is also referred to as the special gaming state scheduled for shortening the time. Call it.

In the pachinko machine 100, when a predetermined round is started in the special gaming state scheduled for probability change, after the distribution mechanism 437 (distribution mechanism) shifts to the enterable state, the upper approach control mechanism 454 (switching mechanism) ) Is in a state where it can proceed, and the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V in a predetermined round. Here, the enterable state of the distribution mechanism 437 is a state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V. Further, the advancing state of the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is a state in which the game ball can advance toward the distribution mechanism 437, and specifically, the game ball is directed from the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 toward the distribution mechanism 437. It is possible to allow the game ball to enter the guide passage 494 that guides the player. When a predetermined round is started, after the distribution mechanism 437 is shifted to the enterable state, the upper approach control mechanism 454 is set to the progressable state, so that a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined round. , The game ball can be made to enter the guide passage 494.

The upper approach control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 operate in a special game state scheduled for probability change or a special game state scheduled for shortening of time, which is configured by combining a plurality of rounds. The upper entry control mechanism 454 operates in all rounds of those special gaming states, while the distribution mechanism 437 operates in at least some rounds. Specifically, the distribution mechanism 437 is executed in the first round (for example, 15 rounds) of a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) in both the special game state scheduled for probability change and the special game state scheduled for shortening the time (for example). In the following, it also operates in the first round). In the following, a round in which the distribution mechanism 437 operates together with the upper approach control mechanism 454 and in which the game state to be transferred after the special game state is determined is also referred to as a transition destination determination round.

The upper approach restricting mechanism 454 includes a stepping motor as an upper approach restricting motor 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the approach restricting shutter 454A (see FIG. 24). The upper approach restricting motor 464 causes the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 (entry restricting shutter 454A) to be placed in the entry prohibition posture (one-point chain line in FIG. The posture can be changed from the posture allowed to enter (see the posture shown in FIG. 24 (C)), and the posture can be changed from the posture allowed to enter by rotating in the opposite direction to the forward direction. The posture can be changed to the prohibited posture. Further, the upper approach restricting motor 464 can change the posture of the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 in a predetermined normal form by rotating the rotating shaft at a predetermined speed, and also has a speed lower than a predetermined rotation speed (for example,). The upper approach restricting mechanism 454 can be changed in posture slower than the normal mode by rotating at a speed of about 1/100 of the predetermined rotation speed. The upper approach control motor 464 is not limited to the stepping motor, and a DC motor may be used.

Further, the rotation speed of the upper approach restricting motor 464 for changing the posture of the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 slower than the normal mode is the time from the start of the first round until the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 becomes able to proceed. However, the speed is set to be longer than the time from the start of the first round until the distribution mechanism 437 becomes accessible. Therefore, when the first round, which is the transition destination determination round, is started by setting the rotation speed of the upper approach restricting motor 464, the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is set after the transition to the approachable state of the distribution mechanism 437. The posture can be changed in a form that enables progress (hereinafter, also referred to as a delayed form). The speed of the posture change of the upper approach control mechanism 454 is slower than the posture change of the distribution mechanism 437, and after the distribution mechanism 437 shifts to the approachable state, the upper approach control mechanism 454 is set to the progress permission state. However, not limited to this configuration, regardless of the speed of the attitude change of the upper approach control mechanism 454, the start of the attitude change of the upper approach control mechanism 454 is performed after the distribution mechanism 437 shifts to the approachable state. The approach control mechanism 454 may be delayed from the start of the first round so that the progress is permitted. In the case of a configuration that delays the start of the attitude change of the upper approach control mechanism 454, a drive device having a constant attitude change speed of the upper approach control mechanism 454 may be used instead of the upper approach control motor 464, for example, an electromagnetic type. It is also possible to use the solenoid of.

Here, the operation control of the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 will be described. FIG. 23 is a timing chart schematically showing the operation control of the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 in the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V (transition destination determination round). In FIG. 23, the upper part in the figure shows the operation in the special game state scheduled to be probable change, and the lower part in the figure is the operation in the special game state scheduled to be shortened in time and is scheduled to be probable change. It also shows behavior that differs from the state.

When the first round is started in the special game state scheduled for probability change, as shown in FIG. 23, the in-round flag is turned on and the first round (numbers in parentheses in the figure) is started (time). t1). The in-round flag is information for identifying whether or not the round is in progress, and is stored in the RAM 922 (see FIG. 10) of the main control board 920. The in-round flag is turned off (time ta10) as shown by the alternate long and short dash line when the maximum duration TA (predetermined elapsed time: 29.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the first round. The first round ends when the flag is turned off during the round. Further, although the details will be described later, when the value of the upper prize winning counter reaches the specified number (10) in the first round (t8), as shown by the solid line, a predetermined period (for example, 3) from the detection. It goes off after waiting for the elapse of (0.0 seconds) (time t10). Further, the in-round flag is turned on in order to start the next round when a predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the first round (time ta11).

In the first round of the special game state scheduled to be shortened, the in-round flag is turned on (time tb1), and then the maximum duration TI shorter than the maximum duration TA in the special game state scheduled to change (for example). When 4.0 seconds) has elapsed, it will be in the off state.

The elapsed time from the start of the first round is measured by a round control timer (not shown) stored in RAM 922 of the main control board 920. The main control board 920 initially sets a value corresponding to the maximum duration TA of the first round stored in the ROM (not shown) of the main control board 920 in the first round round control timer. The ROM (not shown) of the main control board 920 stores the value corresponding to the maximum duration TA and the value corresponding to the maximum duration TI of the first round in the special gaming state scheduled to be shortened. The control board 920 is selected according to the special gaming state being executed. The round control timer is updated so that its value is decremented by 1 for each timer interrupt at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) executed on the main control board 920. As a result, the main control board 920 detects that the value of the round control timer returns to "0", turns off the round flag when the maximum duration elapses (time ta9), and ends the first round. Can be made (means for ending round time). The main control board 920 also stores a value corresponding to the maximum duration of each round other than the first round, and selects the value according to the round to be executed.

In addition, with the start of the first round, the upper prize winning counter is initially set to "0". The upper prize winning counter is stored in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920, and counts the number of game balls detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 7) in each round. Every time a game ball is detected, it is updated to increase by "1".

The main control board 920 determines whether the value of the upper prize winning counter is the specified number (10 pieces) stored in the ROM of the main control board 920, and when the value of the upper prize winning counter reaches the specified number. At (time t8), even before the maximum duration TA has elapsed, the operation of the upper entry control mechanism 454 is interrupted, and after the operation of the distribution mechanism 437 is interrupted (time t9), the first End the round (time t10). The same applies to the rounds other than the first round. Each round is configured to end when the value of the upper prize winning counter reaches a specified number before the maximum duration TA elapses, but this configuration is not an essential configuration, for example, each round is predetermined. It may be configured to end only by the lapse of the duration.

In addition, with the start of the first round, the rotation direction designation information (not shown) changes to "1", which specifies forward rotation in order to change the posture of the upper entry control mechanism 454 from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowable posture. Set. The rotation direction designation information is information for designating the rotation direction of the stepping motor that drives the upper approach control mechanism 454, and is stored in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920. In addition to "1", the value of the rotation direction designation information is "2", which specifies the rotation in the opposite direction in order to change the posture of the upper entry control mechanism 454 from the entry allowable posture to the entry prohibited posture, and the stepping motor. Takes "0" to specify the stop of rotation of. The main control board 920 stores in the ROM the information for designating the timing for changing the rotation state of the stepping motor and the value of the rotation direction designation information selected for each timing in association with each other.

When the main control board 920 detects, for example, that the value of the round control timer has become a value that specifies the timing, the main control board 920 sets a value that specifies the rotation direction associated with the timing in the rotation direction designation information. For example, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line, the main control board 920 corresponds to the eight timings (for example, time t1 and time t6) of changing the posture of the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 from the entry prohibited posture to the approach allowed posture. 1 ”,“ 2 ”is stored in association with the eight timings (time t5 and time t7) of changing the posture of the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 from the approach-allowed posture to the approach-prohibited posture. Further, in order to stop the attitude change of the upper approach control mechanism 454, eight timings (for example, immediately after time t6 or time t4) for stopping the attitude change from the entry prohibited posture to the approach allowed posture and from the approach allowed posture. "0" is stored in association with 16 timings of 8 timings (for example, immediately after time t5 or immediately after time t7) for stopping the posture change to the no-entry posture change.

Further, with the start of the first round, the rotation speed designation flag is turned on in order to change the posture of the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 in the delayed mode (low speed). The rotation speed designation flag is information for designating whether to change the posture of the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 in the normal mode (high speed) or in the delayed mode by the rotation speed of the stepping motor, and is used in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920. It is remembered. The rotation speed designation flag is turned off when a predetermined time (time TB + TE) elapses and the posture change from the entry prohibited posture to the approach allowed posture is completed (time t4). Further, the rotation speed designation flag is not set in a round other than the first round, which is the transition destination determination round, in the special gaming state scheduled for probability change or the special gaming state scheduled for shortening the time.

The main control board 920 stores in the ROM a value corresponding to the high-speed rotation speed of the stepping motor and a value corresponding to the low-speed rotation speed. When the rotation speed designation flag is on, the main control board 920 selects a value corresponding to the rotation speed at a low speed, rotates the stepping motor at a low speed, and when the rotation speed designation flag is off. Select a value corresponding to the rotation speed at high speed, and rotate the stepping motor at high speed.

The attitude change of the upper approach control mechanism 454 is determined based on the setting state of the rotation direction designation information and the rotation speed designation flag, and the posture change started with the start of the first round is allowed to enter from the entry prohibited posture. It becomes a posture change at a low speed to a posture (posture change in a delayed form). In addition, other posture changes from the no-entry posture to the permissible posture (change in posture in the normal form) and the change in posture from the permissible approach posture to the no-entry posture are faster posture changes than in the delayed form. .. In addition, in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, the rotation speed designation flag turns off earlier than in the special game state scheduled to change, and the posture changes in the delayed form during the posture change from the entry prohibited posture to the approach allowed posture. From this, the posture changes in the normal form.

Further, the value corresponding to the rotation speed of the stepping motor at a low speed is the time required for the posture change in the delayed form of the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the time required for the posture change of the distribution mechanism 437 (the posture that can be guided from the non-induction posture). The value is set in a range that is slower than the time until the posture changes to. As a result, the upper approach control mechanism 454 is moved to the distribution mechanism 437 side after the distribution mechanism 437 is in the accessible state. It is possible to make the sphere advanceable (switching control means).

Further, with the start of the first round, the distribution solenoid operation flag (not shown) is turned on. The distribution solenoid operation flag is a flag that specifies whether or not to operate the distribution solenoid 465, and is stored in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920. When the distribution solenoid operation flag is turned on, the distribution solenoid 465 is energized and operates, and the distribution mechanism 437 starts the posture change from the non-induction posture to the induction posture. After changing to the guided posture, the distribution mechanism 437 is maintained in the guided posture in a state where the energization to the distribution solenoid 465 is maintained. On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid operation flag is turned off, the energization of the distribution solenoid 465 is stopped, and the distribution mechanism 437 starts the posture change from the guided posture to the non-guided posture. The distribution mechanism 437 is maintained in the unguided posture after being in the unguided posture. The main control board 920 stores in the ROM information that specifies the timing for energizing the distribution solenoid 465 and information that specifies the timing for stopping the energization. As shown by the alternate long and short dash line, the main control board 920 has two timings (time t1, time t4) in which the value of the round control timer energizes the distribution solenoid 465 and two timings (time t1, time t4) in which the energization is stopped. When it is detected that the value at time t2 and time t9) is specified, the state of the distribution solenoid operation flag is switched.

Here, the operation modes of the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 in the transition destination determination round will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view showing the operation mode of the upper entry control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 by the cross section of the cut surface including the Y2-Y2 line of FIG. 24 (A) shows the posture immediately after the time t1 in FIG. 23, FIG. 24 (B) shows the posture at the time t3, and FIG. 24 (C) shows the postures of the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 at the time t4. In FIG. 24A, the alternate long and short dash line also shows the postures of the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 at time t1 in FIG. 23. Further, in FIG. 24 (A), the game ball flowing down the downstream side (back side of the paper surface: right side in FIG. 7) from the cut surface including the Y2-Y2 line along the upper surface of the upper entry control mechanism 454 is shown in FIG. 24. In (B), a game ball entering the guide passage 494 is also shown.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the distribution mechanism 437 includes a plate-shaped distribution shutter 437A that can move in the front-rear direction (left-right direction such as FIG. 24A) of the substrate 401. The distribution shutter 437 limits the movement of the game ball to the front side (right side in FIG. 24A or the like) of the game board 400 when the distribution mechanism 437 is in the non-guided posture (posture indicated by the alternate long and short dash line). The distance between the front wall 481 and the tip of the entry restriction shutter 454A is arranged at a position where the distance D1 is narrower than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the distribution shutter 437A can prevent the game ball from entering the privilege area 409V, and the game ball in contact with the upper surface of the distribution shutter 437A can enter the non-privilege area 409N (see FIG. 7).

When the distribution mechanism 437 is in the guided posture, the distribution shutter 437A is pulled toward the substrate 401 side from the non-guided posture as shown in FIG. 24 (C), and is drawn toward the front wall 481 and the distribution shutter. The distance from the tip of the 437A is wider than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball traveling in the guide passage 494 toward the distribution shutter 437A can enter the privilege area 409V.

In the process of shifting from the non-guided posture to the guided posture, the distribution mechanism 437 has substantially the same distance between the front wall 481 and the tip of the distribution shutter 437A as the diameter of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 24 (A). , Take a posture (hereinafter, also referred to as a guideable posture) arranged at a position where the game ball can enter the guide passage 494. The state in which the distribution mechanism 437 takes a posture in the range from the guideable posture to the guide posture is the accessible state of the distribution mechanism 437.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, the upper entry control mechanism 454 includes a plate-shaped entry control shutter 454A that can move in the front-rear direction of the substrate 401. The approach restricting shutter 454A has an interval D1 in which the distance between the front wall 481 and the tip of the entry restricting shutter 454A is narrower than the diameter of the game ball when the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibition posture (the posture indicated by the alternate long and short dash line). It is placed in the position where. Therefore, the approach restricting shutter 454A prevents the game ball from entering the guide passage 494, and advances the game ball along the upper surface of the approach restricting shutter 454A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24C, the approach restricting shutter 454A is pulled toward the substrate 401 side from the entry prohibited posture when the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is in the approach allowed posture, and is pulled toward the substrate 401 side with the front wall 481. The distance from the tip of the approach restriction shutter 454A is arranged at a position wider than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down toward the upper approach control mechanism 454 can enter the guide passage 494.

In the process of shifting from the entry prohibited posture to the approach allowed posture, the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 omits the distance between the front wall 481 and the tip of the approach restricting shutter 454A as the diameter of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 24 (B). In the same position, the player takes an approachable posture in which the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball can enter the guide passage 494. The state in which the upper approach control mechanism 454 takes a posture within the range from the approachable posture to the approach allowable posture is the progressable state of the upper approach control mechanism 454.

The approach control shutter 454A has a distance between the tip and the front wall 481 when the upper entry control mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibition posture, and the distance between the tip and the front wall 481 of the distribution shutter 437A in the non-induction posture. They are arranged at the same intervals. Therefore, the moving distance of the distribution shutter 437A required for the upper approach control mechanism 454 to shift from the entry prohibited posture to the enterable posture is required for the distribution mechanism 437 to change from the non-guided posture to the guideable posture. The distance D2 is the same as the moving distance. Therefore, even if the approach restricting shutter 454A and the distribution shutter 437A start moving at the same time, the moving speed of the approach restricting shutter 454A is slower than the moving speed of the distribution shutter 437A, so that the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 Can be delayed from the time until the distribution mechanism 437 is in the inducible posture.

The upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is configured to move at a low moving speed even after the distance between the front wall 481 and the tip of the approach restricting shutter 454A is the same as the radius of the game ball. Not limited to this configuration, the period during which the rotation speed specification flag is on is set shorter than the time TB + time TE, and the attitude change of the upper approach control mechanism 454 is delayed before the interval becomes the same as the radius of the game ball. It may be configured to return from the form to the normal form. In this case, between the front wall 481 and the tip of the approach restricting shutter 454A, the lower end of the game ball enters a position lower than the upper surface of the approach restricting shutter 454A, so that the game ball flows down along the approach restricting shutter 454A. It is possible to suppress the inability to perform smoothly.

Further, the approach restricting shutter 454A and the distribution shutter 437A are configured to move in the front-rear direction, but are not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to be inclined in the left-right direction by rotation at a predetermined angle about the front-back direction. However, it may be configured to move so as to incline in the front-rear direction by rotation at a predetermined angle about the left-right direction. Further, the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 are configured to distribute the entry destination by a plate-shaped movable member, but may be configured to distribute the entry destination by a blade-shaped movable member.

Here, returning to the description of FIG. 23, the distribution mechanism 437 is set to the inducible posture immediately after the time t2 (for example, 0.01 seconds), and after a predetermined time TC (for example, 0.05 seconds). Therefore, before the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in the approachable posture (time t3), it returns to the non-guided posture (time t2). After that, the distribution mechanism 437 is maintained in the unguided posture for a predetermined time TD (for example, 9.0 seconds). The time until the distribution mechanism 437 starts the transition from the non-guided posture to the guided posture again is the time TD from entering the guide passage 494 on the upstream end side of the approach restriction shutter 454A to reaching the distribution shutter 437A. It is set sufficiently longer than the average time (hereinafter, also referred to as the average progress time: for example, 1.5 seconds).

After returning to the non-guided posture once, the distribution mechanism 437 starts the posture change to the guided posture again (time t4), and over a longer time than in the case of the first period (time t1 to time t2). It is maintained in the guided posture. Although the details will be described later, the distribution mechanism 437 takes a non-guided posture for a predetermined time TD after once shifting to the guided posture, so that the game ball is a privilege area in the special gaming state scheduled to shorten the time. It becomes possible to prevent the entry into.

When the value of the upper prize winning counter reaches the specified number (“10” in FIG. 23) while the distribution mechanism 437 is maintained in the second guided posture (time t8), the distribution mechanism 437 After waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time TH (for example, 2.5 seconds), the posture returns to the non-guided posture (time t9). The time TH is set longer than the average travel time for the guide passage 494. This is because, as will be described later, when the value of the upper prize counter reaches the specified number (10 in FIG. 23), the upper entry control mechanism 454 is returned to the entry prohibition posture if the entry is allowed posture. This is to prevent the game ball that has entered the guide passage 494 immediately before being returned to the entry prohibited posture from entering the privilege area 409V. Further, after a predetermined time (0.5 seconds) after the distribution mechanism 437 returns to the non-guided posture, the in-round flag is turned off and the first round ends (time t10). During the time from when the distribution mechanism 437 returns to the non-guided posture until the flag is turned off during the round, the game ball that entered just before the distribution mechanism 437 returns to the non-guided posture is detected by the specific passage switch 448. This is to prevent the first round from ending before the end of the first round.

Further, when the value of the upper prize winning counter does not reach the specified number, the distribution mechanism 437 is TG for a predetermined time from the start of the posture change to the second guided posture (time t4) as shown by the alternate long and short dash line. It returns to the non-guided posture with the passage of time (time ta9). Further, after a predetermined time after the distribution mechanism 437 returns to the non-guided posture, the flag during the round is turned off, and the first round ends.

The upper approach control mechanism 454 starts the attitude change in the delayed form because the rotation speed designation flag is in the ON state. Therefore, when the distribution mechanism 437 is in the inducible posture (immediately after the time t1), the upper approach control mechanism 454 is not yet in the approachable posture (see also FIG. 24 (A)), and the distribution is performed. After a predetermined time TB after the mechanism 437 is in the inducible posture, the approachable posture is set (time t3). The time TB and the time TE can be changed by changing the setting of the time interval for shifting the excitation state along the excitation pattern for allowing the stepping motor to enter.

The upper approach control mechanism 454 is after a predetermined time TE (for example, 2.5 seconds) after the approachable posture is reached, and substantially at the same time when the distribution mechanism 437 starts moving to the second guidance posture. (Time t4), the posture is allowed to enter, and the posture is maintained to be allowed to enter for a predetermined time TF (for example, 0.8 seconds) (time t5). After that, the upper approach control mechanism 454 starts the posture change in the normal mode because the rotation speed designation flag is off, and returns to the no-entry posture after a predetermined time (for example, 0.02 seconds). Therefore, even a game ball that has entered the guide passage 494 during the period (generally from time t3 to time t5) in which the upper entry control mechanism 454 is in the first progressable state can enter the privilege area 409V. .. The time TE from when the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in the approachable posture to when the distribution mechanism 437 starts moving to the second guidance posture is longer than the average traveling time of the game ball in the guide passage 494. Although the configuration is set, the time TE may be set shorter than the average traveling time to improve the certainty that the game ball that has entered the guide passage 494 enters the privilege area 409V. Further, after the distribution mechanism 437 starts moving to the guidance posture for the second time, the upper approach regulation mechanism 454 may be in the approachable posture. In this case, the game ball that has entered the guide passage 494 can be reliably entered into the privilege area 409V.

The upper approach control mechanism 454 starts moving to the approach allowable posture (time t6) after a predetermined time TK (for example, 1.2 seconds) from the operation (time t1 to t5) for generating the first progressable state. ), The posture is continued for a predetermined time TF (time t7). After that, the upper entry control mechanism 454 returns to the no-entry posture. Further, the operation of generating the second advancing state by the approach restricting mechanism 454 (time t6 to time t7) is performed during the period (time t4 to time ta9) in which the distribution mechanism 437 is in the second advancing state. .. Further, the upper approach control mechanism 454 repeats the same operation as the operation for generating the second progressable state a maximum of 6 times (7 times for convenience).

When the value of the upper prize winning counter reaches the specified number (10) before the upper entry control mechanism 454 completes the operation of generating the progressable state the specified number of times (8 times), the upper entry control mechanism 454 returns to the no-entry posture (time t9) if the operation for generating the progressable state is in progress.

It should be noted that, in the special gaming state scheduled for probability change, the operation of generating the progressable state by the upper approach control mechanism 454 is divided into a plurality of times (8 times), but the operation is not limited to this configuration and the operation is performed once. It may be configured to perform only, for example, to continue the posture of the upper approach control mechanism 454 which became the approach allowable posture at time t4. Similarly, in the special game state scheduled for probability change, the operation of generating the approachable state by the distribution mechanism 437 is divided into a plurality of times (twice), but the operation is not limited to this configuration and the operation is performed once. A configuration in which only the operation is performed, for example, a configuration in which the operation of generating the first progressable state may not be performed may be performed.

Further, during the period (time t4 to time ta9) in which the distribution mechanism 437 is in the accessible state for a long time, the operation of generating the progressable state by the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is divided into a plurality of times (7 times) to obtain a privilege area. It is a configuration that restricts the entry of the game ball into the 409V, but is not limited to this configuration, and is not limited to this configuration, but is a configuration that generates an approachable state by the distribution mechanism 437 during the period in which the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is in a progressable state, for example. The operation of continuing the posture of the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 which became the approach allowable posture at the time t4 and generating the approachable state by the distribution mechanism 437 from the time t4 to the time ta9 may be repeated a plurality of times.

Here, the operation of the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 in the first round of the special gaming state scheduled to be shortened will be described. In the first round of the special game state scheduled to be shortened in time, the same control as in the first round of the special game state scheduled to be probable change is executed by the main control board 920 for the distribution mechanism 437. In addition, the maximum duration TI of the first round in the special gaming state scheduled to be shortened is from the time (time TC + time TD) until the distribution mechanism 437 starts changing to the second guided posture (accessible state). It is set short. Therefore, in the first round of the special gaming state scheduled to shorten the time, the distribution mechanism 437 only changes the posture to the guided posture once, and does not change the posture to the second guided posture.

Further, since the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in the rotation speed designation flag in the on state as in the case of the special game state scheduled to be probable change with the start of the first round (time tb1) of the special game state scheduled to be shortened. The posture change is started in the delayed form. However, the time in which the rotation speed designation flag is set is set to a time TJ (for example, 0.8 seconds) shorter than the time (time TB + time TE) in the special gaming state scheduled to change. Therefore, the rotation speed designation flag is turned off (time tb3) while the upper approach control mechanism 454 is changing to the approach allowable posture, and the posture change of the upper approach control mechanism 454 returns to the normal speed change. In this case, from the start of the first round to the predetermined time TJ, the posture changes in the same delay form as in the case of the special gaming state scheduled to change, so that the upper approach control mechanism 454 immediately after the start of the first round It is possible to prevent the player from identifying whether the special gaming state is scheduled to change or the special gaming state is scheduled to be shortened due to the difference in the operation mode.

Further, after the time TJ has elapsed, the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 becomes the approach allowable posture through the approachable posture. The upper approach control mechanism 454 returns to the approach prohibition posture in the normal mode after being maintained in the approach allowable posture for a predetermined time TF (time tb5). After that, the upper approach control mechanism 454 operates in the same manner as in the case of time ta8 to time ta10, and the first round ends (time tb10). The second round is started (time tb11) at a predetermined interval from the end of the first round.

Here, in the special gaming state scheduled to shorten the time, the distribution mechanism 437 is once in the enterable state after the start of the round, then returns to the entry prohibited state, and then the upper approach control mechanism 454 shifts to the progressable state. Therefore, in the situation where the distribution mechanism 437 is in an accessible state, the game ball does not reach the distribution mechanism 437 and does not enter the privilege area 409V. Further, the time from the time tb5 to the time tb10 is set to be about four times longer than the average traveling time for the guide passage 494. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the guide passage 494 due to the approach permissible operation, the game ball that has entered the guide passage 494 reaches the distribution mechanism 437 that is not in an accessible state and enters the privilege area 409V. Can be prevented. Further, since the distribution mechanism 437 is not in the approachable state from the time when the upper approach control mechanism 454 is no longer in the progressable state until the end of the first round, the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in the first progressable state. A phenomenon occurs in which a ball bite occurs due to the movement, the game ball collides with a newly flowing game ball, the sandwiched game ball enters the guide passage 494, and the subsequent game ball that collides is bitten. Even if a situation occurs in which the game ball continuously enters the guide passage 494 (hereinafter referred to as a ball biting chain passage), the game ball does not enter the privilege area 409V. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the privilege area 409V in the first round of the special game state scheduled to shorten the time.

In this way, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, when the transition destination determination round (first round) of the special gaming state scheduled to change is started, the distribution mechanism 437 is in a guideable posture (accessible state). After that, the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in the approachable posture (progressable state). Even in such a case, by delaying the timing at which the upper approach control mechanism 454 becomes able to proceed, at least one game ball is ensured in the privilege area 409V in the first round of the special game state scheduled to change. It will be possible to enter. Further, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the first round, a period during which the distribution mechanism 437 is not in an accessible state is provided, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an abnormal situation such as passing through a ball biting chain during that period.

Further, in the special gaming state scheduled to change, the distribution mechanism 437 is once in a state where it can enter for a short time (approximately time TC), and then undergoes a non-inducing posture of TD for a predetermined time, and is more than the first time. It will be in a state where it can enter for a long time. Therefore, during the period (time t4 to time t9) in which the distribution mechanism 437 can enter for the second time, the game ball can almost certainly flow into the privilege area 409V.

Further, in the special gaming state scheduled to shorten the time, the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is in the progressable state after the distribution mechanism 437 is in the approachable state for a short time and then returns to the non-guided posture. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the privilege area 409V in the transition destination determination round of the special game state scheduled for shortening the time. Further, even if the game ball advances to the side of the distribution mechanism 437 by passing through the ball biting chain, it will reach the distribution mechanism 437 in a non-guided posture, and the game ball will enter the privilege area 409V. Can be prevented.

Further, in both the special game state scheduled for probability change and the special game state scheduled for shortening the time, the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 and the distribution mechanism 437 start operating at the same time. As a result, even in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, it is possible to realize an effect as if the game ball can be entered into the privilege area 409V by the operation of the distribution mechanism 437.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the transition destination determination round is set to the first round. Therefore, there is no round in which the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 operates before the migration destination determination round, and it is possible to prevent the migration destination determination round from starting in a state where ball biting occurs. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the first round is the transition destination determination round, and may be configured to operate in any one or a plurality of rounds constituting the special gaming state. In addition, in the special game state scheduled for probability change and the special game state scheduled for shortening the time, the transition destination determination round is not limited to the same round, but different rounds in those special game states are set as the transition destination determination round. The number of transition destination determination rounds executed in those special gaming states may be different. When the transition destination determination round is performed multiple times in the special game state scheduled for probability change, the probability of being able to enter the privilege area 409V is different in each transition destination determination round, and the probability is changed stepwise. It may be configured.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a configuration in which only the upper prize winning device 434 is operated in a special gaming state scheduled for probability change or time reduction has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and for example, the transition destination determination round is superior. It may be configured to be executed by the winning device 434 and part or all of the other rounds are executed by the lower prize winning device 433. In this way, if a configuration is such that a plurality of rounds in the special gaming state are executed by the cooperation between the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, all the other rounds are executed by the lower prize winning device 433. Is preferable. In this case, since only the transfer destination determination round is executed in the upper prize winning device 434, it is possible to prevent the upper prize winning device 434 from biting the game ball in other rounds, and the special game scheduled to be probable changed. In the state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the privilege area 409V due to the ball biting chain passage.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the other rounds are not executed before the transition destination determination round, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the other rounds may be executed. In this case, a ball bite occurred in another round preceding the transition destination determination round, and the game ball could not enter the privilege area 409V in the special game state scheduled to change due to the passage of the ball bite chain. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the occurrence of ball biting or the possibility thereof is detected to suppress the situation.

The occurrence or possibility of ball biting is determined, for example, by detecting the position of the drive shaft of the stepping motor after the operation of the upper entry control mechanism 454 from the entry allowable posture to the entry prohibition posture is stopped, or from the stop. Even after the lapse of time, it can be certified by detecting a game ball with the upper prize winning switch 444 or the like.

It should be noted that the configuration capable of responding to an abnormal situation such as passing through a ball biting chain is not limited to the configuration of the above-mentioned motion control, but is replaced with the above-mentioned configuration of the motion control, or in addition to the above-mentioned configuration of the motion control. For example, the following configurations can be added to suppress or prevent it. For example, if it is recognized as a ball bite at the end of the round immediately before the transition destination determination round, the decorative symbol display device 479 notifies the player to stop the firing of the game ball, and the notification is determined. For the first time in the round, the upper approach control mechanism 454 is released at the timing when the approachable posture or the entry allowable posture is reached. At this time, the time until the migration destination determination round is extended to delay the start of the migration destination determination round, and after the start, it is prevented that the game ball launched in the immediately preceding round reaches the upper entry control mechanism 454. Or, the migration destination determination round may not be started until it is confirmed that the firing of the game ball has stopped. Further, if it is recognized as a ball bite at the end of the round immediately before the migration destination determination round, the error control may be executed before the migration destination determination round is started.

<Round production that allows the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V>
Next, the production of a round (transition destination determination round) in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V (specific passage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 26 together with FIG. 13.

The effect of the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is the decorative symbol display device 479 (display) shown in FIG. 13 together with the left movable member 10 (effect means) and the right movable member 20 (effect means) shown in FIG. Means). Here, the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V shifts to the case where the first type of jackpot is won (the predetermined winning conditions are satisfied) in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. It occurs as the first round (predetermined round) in the special gaming state of the probabilistic schedule (same as the special gaming state of the probabilistic schedule described with reference to FIG. 23) composed of a plurality of rounds. In this first round, the upper approach control mechanism 454 shifts to the advancing state, the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism 437 side, and the game ball is in the period in which the distribution mechanism 437 is in the advancing state (accessable period). Can enter the privilege area 409V.

The production of the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V (the first round of the special game state scheduled to change) is performed by the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery before the first round starts. The display of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the winning jackpot is executed after the decorative symbol display device 479 makes the display. Further, the effect of the first round is executed by an effect operation by the left movable member 10 (effect means) and the right movable member 20 (effect means) different from the decorative symbol display device 479. Therefore, the display by the decorative symbol display device 479 calls the player's attention by notifying that the effect operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 will be executed after the display, and then the left movable member. The effect operation of the 10 and the right movable member 20 can be executed, and the effect action enables the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V (for example, the start of the enterable period or the game ball to the privilege area 409V during the enterable period). It is possible to inform the player of the timing of launching the game ball in order to enter.

Specifically, the effect of the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is after the start of the special game state scheduled to change (after the display of the combination of the stop symbols by the decorative symbol display device 479). It is said to be a continuous production that starts before the start of one round. Further, the effect is after the start of the enterable period in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, and ends when the game ball enters the privilege area 409V. Therefore, the effect is executed across the start of the enterable period, and the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V immediately before the start of the enterable period, or the game ball enters the privilege area 409V. It is possible to notify the player at the right time immediately after the approachable period that it has become possible. Further, by starting the production before the start of the first round, the player can be entertained for a longer time than when the production is started at the start of the first round or after the start of the first round. Further, it is confirmed by the staging operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 that the effect is terminated when the game ball enters the privilege area 409V to shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state. can do.

It should be noted that the effect of the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is configured to start before the start of the first round, but the effect is not limited to this configuration and the effect is at the start or after the start of the first round. It may be a configuration that starts. Further, the effect of the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is configured to end when the game ball enters the privilege area 409V after the start of the enterable period, but the configuration is not limited to this. The production may be configured to end after a predetermined time from the enterable period, or to end at or after the end of the enterable period, regardless of whether or not the game ball has entered the privilege area 409V. It may be configured to end before the accessible period. In addition, the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is set to the first round, but not limited to this configuration, the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is scheduled to change. Of the plurality of rounds constituting the special gaming state of the above, the configuration may be set to a round different from the first round, or may be set to two or more rounds including or not including the first round.

As a combination of stop symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the start of the first round, a second type of jackpot different from the first type of jackpot that shifts to the special gaming state scheduled for probability change. It also contains a combination of common stop symbols that are displayed. Specifically, as a lottery target for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, a predetermined round (first round) is a round in which a game ball can enter the privilege area 409V in a special game state scheduled to change. Includes a second type of jackpot where the round) shifts to a special game state with a time-saving schedule (same as the special game state with a time-saving schedule described with reference to FIG. 23) in which the game ball cannot enter the privilege area 409V. It has been. Further, it is common to the combination of a plurality of stop symbols to be selected when the first type of jackpot is won and the combination of a plurality of stop symbols to be selected when the second type of jackpot is won. A combination of stop symbols (for example, a combination of numerical symbols of "333") is included. Therefore, depending on the combination of the stop symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not a round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is executed after the display. As a result, the player can pay attention to the occurrence of the staging operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, and can play while expecting the occurrence.

Further, in the special game state scheduled to be shortened in time, the same effect as the effect of the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V in the special game state scheduled to be probable change is executed. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the special game state is scheduled to change or the special game state scheduled to be shortened until the middle of the production, and the player can determine whether the special game state is scheduled to be shortened. You can play while maintaining expectations until the common part of the production is finished.

The round effect that allows the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V is not only the effect operation by the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, but also the light emission of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, and the decorative symbol display device 479. It is also executed by using the display of. Therefore, the effect can be made more conspicuous than the case where the effect is executed only by the effect operation by the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the effect.

The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 used for the effect of the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V are arranged apart from each other (the posture shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 13). It is possible to move between a close posture (a posture shown by a solid line in FIG. 13) arranged at a position closer to the separated posture.

Specifically, the game board 400 has a left rotation mechanism (shown) that enables the left movable member 10 to rotate around a rotation axis (not shown) provided on the upper left side of the left movable member 10. A left-handed rotation drive motor (not shown) for driving the left-handed rotation mechanism is provided. Further, the game board 400 includes a left diagonal movement mechanism (not shown) that enables the left movable member 10 to move diagonally together with the rotation axis, and a left diagonal movement drive motor that drives the left diagonal movement mechanism (not shown). (Not shown) is provided. The left movable member 10 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 43 degrees) by the forward rotation of the left rotation drive motor, and is moved diagonally upward to the right by a predetermined distance by the forward rotation of the left diagonal drive motor. As a result, the left movable member 10 changes from a separated posture facing in the vertical direction to a close posture facing diagonally downward to the right.

Further, in the game board 400, a right rotation mechanism (not shown) that enables the right movable member 20 to be rotated around a rotation axis (not shown) provided on the lower right side of the right movable member 20. And a right-handed rotation drive motor (not shown) for driving the right-handed rotation mechanism are provided. Further, the game board 400 includes a right diagonal movement mechanism (not shown) that enables the right movable member 20 to move diagonally together with the rotation axis, and a right diagonal movement drive motor that drives the right diagonal movement mechanism (not shown). (Not shown) is provided. The right movable member 20 is rotated by the same angle as the left movable member 10 (for example, 43 degrees) by the forward rotation of the right rotation drive motor, and the left movable member 10 is rotated by the forward rotation of the right diagonal drive motor. By moving the right movable member 20 diagonally downward to the left by the same distance, the right movable member 20 changes from a separated posture facing in the vertical direction to a close posture facing diagonally upward to the left.

The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged so as to be inclined in the same longitudinal direction in a close posture and to be close to each other at a predetermined interval or less. Further, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 rotate the left rotation drive motor and the left diagonal drive motor in opposite directions, and rotate the right rotation drive motor and the right diagonal drive motor in opposite directions. Then, it changes from a close posture to a separated posture. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are configured to transmit power from individual motors by individual mechanisms for rotation and diagonal movement, and their operations can be performed independently, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, a left rotation mechanism and a left diagonal movement mechanism are connected and driven by a single motor, or a left rotation mechanism and a right rotation mechanism are connected and driven by a single motor. It may be configured to be used.

The left movable member 10 is provided with a large number of light emitting elements scattered all over the back surface side thereof, and a plurality of light emitting elements 19 arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction of the left movable member 10. Further, the right movable member 20 is also provided with a large number of light emitting elements scattered all over the back surface side thereof, and a plurality of light emitting elements 29 arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction of the right movable member 20.

In the following, the left movable member 10 in the first round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V in the special game state scheduled to change, but the game ball cannot enter the privilege area 409V in the special game state scheduled to be shortened. The control of the effect operation of the right movable member 20 and the control of the display by the decorative symbol display device 479 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing control of the effect in the round (first round) in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V. In addition, in FIG. 25, the upper part shows the control of the effect in the special game state scheduled to be probable change, and the lower part is the control of the effect in the special game state scheduled to be shortened, which is different from the special game state scheduled to be probable change. Indicates control to be performed. Further, in FIG. 25, the control of the latter half of the round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period (symbol variation period) of the symbol variation display by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state is shown.

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the transition of the effect in the round (first round) in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V. FIG. 26 (A) shows immediately after the start of the shell splitting effect common to the special game state scheduled for probability change and the special game state scheduled for shortening the time (immediately after time ct2 in FIG. 25), and FIG. 26 (B) shows shell splitting. The production is shown (immediately after the time ct5 in FIG. 25), FIG. 26 (C) shows immediately after the start of the treasure appearance effect in the special gaming state scheduled to change (immediately after the time ct8 in FIG. 25), and FIG. 26 (D) shows. , Immediately after the start of the production without cracking the shell in the special game state scheduled for shortening the time (immediately after the time td8 in FIG. 25).

In the unit game in which the first type of jackpot is won by the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 25, the variable display by the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 (variable effect in FIG. 25). After, the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first type of jackpot is confirmed and displayed. This ends the symbol change period. At this time, the combination of the stop symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is a first type of jackpot that shifts to the special gaming state scheduled for probability change and a second type of jackpot that shifts to the special gaming state scheduled to be shortened. It is a combination of stop symbols that can be selected in common with the above, and the player cannot determine which special gaming state the player will shift to depending on the combination of the stop symbols. The variable display and the definite display by the decorative symbol display device 479 are executed by the sub control board 940 based on the instruction from the main control board 920. Specifically, the main control board 920 notifies the sub control board 940 of the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the timing of starting the variable display and the definite display, and the sub control board 940. , The specific contents of the variable display and the confirmed display by the decorative symbol are determined based on the notified lottery result, and the progress of those displays is determined based on the timing of the start of the notified variable display and the confirmed display. It is managed in synchronization with the variable display and confirmed display of 1 special symbol and 2 special symbol.

At the time ct1 after the combination of the stop symbols by the decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the special gaming state scheduled to change is started. Specifically, when the game ball is detected by the combination operation switch 445, the special game state scheduled for probability change is started. With the start of the special game state scheduled to be probable, the decorative symbol display device 479 starts the opening effect (OP effect in FIG. 25) indicating the start of the special game state. In the special gaming state scheduled for probability change, a predetermined period (opening period in FIG. 25) is provided between the start of the special game state and the start of the first round.

During the opening period, at the time ct2 when the opening effect ends, the effect of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 and the effect accompanied by the display on the decorative symbol display device 479 linked to the operation are started. Specifically, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 appear to sandwich and split the shell of the treasure egg 482 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 (FIGS. 26A and 26). (B) Reference: In the following, it is also referred to as a shell split mission production). In the shell splitting mission effect (time ct1 to time ct10, time td1 to time td10), following the shell splitting effect (time ct1 to time ct8, time td1 to td8) to break the shell of the treasure egg 482, the treasure egg 482 The treasure appearance effect (time ct8 to time ct10) when the shell is broken and the treasure 483 appears, or the shell-free effect (time td8 to time td10) when the shell of the treasure egg 482 is not broken is executed. The shell splitting effect is executed in common for the special game state scheduled for probability change and the special game state scheduled for shortening the time, while the treasure appearance effect is executed in the special game state scheduled for probability change, while the effect without breaking the shell is It is executed in a special game state scheduled for a short time. Therefore, the effect operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 in the shell split effect suggests whether or not the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, and the display of the treasure appearance effect and the left in the treasure appearance effect. The staging operation of the movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is an operation that clearly informs the player that the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V.

With the start of the shell splitting effect, a left rotation drive motor (rotation drive motor in FIG. 25) that rotates the left movable member 10 and a right rotation drive motor (rotation drive motor in FIG. 25) that rotates the right movable member 20 Start forward rotation. When the left movable member 10 is rotated over the entire shell split mission effect, the right movable member 20 also has the same rotation angle as the left movable member 10 and the angle between the left movable member 10 and the separated posture (left after rotation). Control is performed to rotate the movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 at the same time in the direction in which the increase / decrease (angle formed by the longitudinal direction and the longitudinal direction in the case of the separated posture) is the same. Therefore, in the following, as shown in FIG. 25, they are collectively referred to as a rotary drive motor without distinguishing between the left rotary drive motor and the right rotary drive motor.

The rotary drive motor is controlled by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the ROM of the sub-control board 940 specifies forward rotation (forward rotation in FIG. 25), reverse rotation (reverse rotation in FIG. 25), or rotation stop (stop in FIG. 25). The rotation drive information is associated with the timing of switching between these operations (for example, time ct2 and time ct5 that specify forward rotation; time ct6 that specifies reverse rotation, time ct3 that specifies stop, and time ct7). It is remembered.

Further, the RAM of the sub-control board 940 stores the value of the effect timer for measuring the passage of the effect time. The value of the effect timer is the opening period and the maximum duration of each round (maximum duration TA, maximum) according to the start of the special gaming state (start of the opening period) from the main control board 920 and the notification of the start of each round. It is set to a value corresponding to the duration TI) and updated to decrease by 1 at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). Therefore, the effect timer measures the passage of the effect time on the sub control board 940, and is set based on an appropriate notification (notification of the start of the special gaming state or the start of each round) from the main control board 920. Therefore, it can be synchronized with the main control board 920.

The sub-control board 940 determines the timing for switching the operation of the left rotation drive motor or the right rotation drive motor based on the value of the effect timer, and the left rotation drive motor or the left rotation drive motor based on the rotation drive information associated with the timing. The right-handed drive motor is rotated in the forward direction, rotated in the reverse direction, and stopped.

Further, with the start of the shell splitting effect, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays that the treasure egg 482 appears so as to roll along the upper end of the rotating left movable member 10.

The rotation of the rotary drive motor is stopped at the time ct3, which is a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the time ct2 at which the shell splitting effect is started and is during the opening period (before the start of the first round). Then, the rotation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), the angle formed by the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 in the separated posture is larger than the angle formed by the separated posture and the close posture (for example, 43 degrees). Take a posture at a small angle (eg, 38 degrees). At this time, most of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged on the front side of the display unit 479a of the decorative symbol display device 479. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the treasure egg 482 that has rolled along the upper end of the left movable member 10 is movable to the right with the movable side end of the left movable member 10 (the end opposite to the rotation axis side). The display is such that it is sandwiched and fixed by the movable side end portion of the member 20.

At time ct4, which is a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) after time ct3 and during the opening period (before the start of the first round), the rotary drive motor starts rotating in the forward direction. Further, the rotary drive motor switches to rotation in the reverse direction from the time ct4 to the time ct5 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second), and further, after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) from the time ct5. It stops at the time ct6 of. Due to the operation of the rotary drive motor from time ct4 to time ct6, the angle formed by the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 in the separated posture is larger than that in the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482 shown in FIG. 26 (A). After changing to the posture shown in FIG. 26 (B), which is largely the same angle as the angle formed by the separated posture and the close posture, the posture returns to the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 479, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), as the distance between the movable side end portion becomes narrower due to the posture change between the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, the left movable member 10 and the right A display is made in which the treasure egg 482 is pressed and deformed by the movable member 20, and then a display is made in which the treasure egg 482 is sandwiched and returns to the original shape. Further, when the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 take a posture of pressing the treasure egg 482, as shown in FIG. 26B, the treasure egg 482 is displayed to be cracked.

After time ct6, as shown in FIG. 25, the operation of the rotary drive motor executed from time ct4 to time ct6 is separated by a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the start of the first round. It is repeated until the time ct8, and the shell splitting effect ends after the start of the first round. As a result, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 can produce an effect as if they are pressing the treasure egg 482 in an attempt to break the treasure egg 482 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 479, as the number of operations of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 increases, the cracks entering the treasure egg 482 become larger. As a result, it is possible to amplify the expectation that the treasure egg 482 will be broken and an inaccessible period will occur.

In the shell splitting effect, the rotary drive motor repeats the operation of narrowing and widening the distance between the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 at regular time intervals, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration. The drive motor repeats an operation of narrowing or widening the interval between the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 by making the repetition time interval different, for example, the repetition time interval becomes shorter as the number of repetitions increases. It may be configured. Further, for example, in the rotary drive motor, as the number of repetitions increases, the time for which the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are maintained in the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482 becomes longer, and the rotary drive motor moves in the forward direction. A time may be provided for stopping the rotation drive motor between the switching from the rotation to the rotation in the opposite direction, and the operation in which the time is changed according to the number of repetitions may be repeated. Further, in the shell splitting effect, the rotary drive motor is configured to automatically execute an operation of narrowing or widening the distance between the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 regardless of the player's intention. The machine 100 may be configured to execute the operation in response to the operation of the existing pressing operation device 261 or the input operation of the player to the newly provided device. For example, when the period from time ct4 to time ct8 is provided as a period during which the player can perform an input operation on the pressing operation device 261 (operable period), and the number of input operations in that period becomes a specified number or more. , The shell splitting effect may be completed.

At time t1 in the middle of the shell splitting effect, the in-round flag is turned on and the first round is started. Regarding the in-round flag, the above description with reference to FIG. 23 will be referred to, and an outline thereof will be described. The flag during the round is turned off after the predetermined maximum duration TA in the special game state scheduled to change, and after the predetermined maximum duration TI in the special game state scheduled to be shortened. One round ends. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 reaches a specified number, the game is turned off even before the lapse of the maximum duration TA, and the first round ends.

Further, when the first round is started, the upper entry control mechanism 454 starts the posture change from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowable posture. Regarding the operation of the upper entry control mechanism 454, the above description with reference to FIG. 23 will be referred to, and the outline thereof will be described. The upper approach control mechanism 454 takes an approachable posture at time t3 after the time t1 when the first round is started, and then becomes an approach allowable posture at time t4. After that, the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 starts the posture change from the approach allowed posture to the approach prohibited posture at time t5, and returns to the approach prohibited posture through the approachable posture. Therefore, the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in a state where it can proceed from time t3 to time t5 (time TE + time TF). Further, the upper approach control mechanism 454 takes a progressable state from time t6 to time t7, and further, although not shown, a predetermined time TK is separated from the upper approach control mechanism 454 as in the approachable state from time t6 to time t7. It takes a progressable state as many times as possible (see FIG. 23).

Further, when the first round is started, the distribution mechanism 437 starts the posture change from the non-guided posture to the guided posture. Regarding the operation of the distribution mechanism 437, the above description with reference to FIG. 23 will be referred to, and the outline thereof will be described. Immediately after the time t1 when the first round is started, the guided posture is changed to the guided posture. From the time t1 to the time t2 after the predetermined time TC, the distribution mechanism 437 starts the posture change from the guided posture to the non-guided posture, and returns to the non-guided posture through the guideable posture. The distribution mechanism 437 is in an approachable state from time t1 to time t2, but the game ball is not guided through the guide passage 494 during the period in which the entry is possible, and during this period, the game ball is guided to the privilege area 409V. The game ball is not in a state where it can enter, and it does not become an enterable period.

Further, after a predetermined time TD from the time t2, the distribution mechanism 437 starts the posture change from the non-guided posture to the guided posture again. Then, after a predetermined time (time TG in FIG. 23), the posture change from the guided posture to the non-guided posture is started, and the posture is returned to the non-guided posture through the guideable posture. Therefore, the distribution mechanism 437 is in a state where it can enter for the second time immediately after the time t4. During this second approachable state, the game ball that has entered the guide passage 494 advances when the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in the progressable state, so that the second approachable state is achieved. During the period, the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, which is the enterable period.

At time ct8, the rotary drive motor starts rotating in the forward direction. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26C, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 change from the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482 to the posture of pressing the treasure egg 482. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 479, the display of the treasure appearance effect in which the treasure egg 482 is broken and the treasure 483 (diamond in the figure) appears is started. The display of the treasure 483 in this treasure appearance effect corresponds to the transition to the special gaming state of the probabilistic transition, and it is clearly shown that the decorative symbol display device 479 has won the first type of jackpot. After the treasure 483 is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays that the treasure 483 moves from between the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20.

Further, in order to encourage the player to start the right-handed game technique at the start time of the treasure appearance effect, the decorative symbol display device 479 has operation information for instructing the player to play the game by the right-handed game technique (for example, FIG. 26). "Right-handed") on the upper right of the display unit 479a in (A) and the like is displayed. The display of the operation information does not necessarily have to be displayed at the start time of the treasure appearance effect, and the operation information may be displayed even during the shell splitting effect.

Here, in the treasure appearance effect, a display is executed in which treasures 483 having different types, colors, sizes, and numbers appear from the treasure eggs 482, but the ratio of those treasures 483 appearing is the rear setting switch 905 and the initial stage. It differs depending on the three-step probability state that can be set by operating the switch 907. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the probability state currently set by the treasure appearing from the treasure egg 482, and the player can infer the probability state currently set. The treasure 483 appearing from the treasure egg 482 suggests a probability state, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a configuration may be used in which points for obtaining a privilege such as generating a premium effect are given. In addition, the treasure appearance effect notifies the start of the enterable period and suggests the probability state, but the configuration suggesting the probability state is not always necessary.

Left diagonal movement drive motor (diagonal movement in FIG. 25) that moves the left movable member 10 to the upper right side at time ct9 after the display that the treasure 483 moves from between the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is performed. The drive motor) and the right diagonal movement drive motor (diagonal movement drive motor in FIG. 25) that moves the right movable member 20 to the lower left side start to rotate in the forward direction. When the left movable member 10 is moved diagonally over the entire timer shell splitting mission effect, the right movable member 20 is also moved away and closer to the separated posture by the same amount of movement as the left movable member 10. Of these, control is executed to move the left movable member 10 in the same direction at the same time. Therefore, in the following, without distinguishing between the left diagonal movement drive motor and the right diagonal movement drive motor, as shown in FIG. 25, they will be collectively referred to as a diagonal movement drive motor.

The mobile drive motor is controlled by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the ROM of the sub-control board 940 specifies forward rotation (forward rotation in FIG. 25), reverse rotation (reverse rotation in FIG. 25), or rotation stop (stop in FIG. 25). Diagonal movement drive information is stored in association with the timing of switching between these operations (for example, time ct9 that specifies forward rotation; time ct11 that specifies reverse rotation; time ct8 and time ct12 that specifies stop). ing.

After a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) from the time ct9, the diagonal movement drive motor is stopped at a time ct10 substantially the same as the time t3 when the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 is in a progressable state. Therefore, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are in a close posture. In this close posture, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged continuously in the direction from the entrance portion 409E where the game ball flows down to the game area 409 toward the privilege area 409V (privilege area instruction arrangement). As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V. When the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are in close contact with each other, the treasure appearance effect is completed and the shell split mission effect is also completed. It should be noted that the shell split mission effect is executed by the effect operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 and the display on the decorative symbol display device 479, but the shell split mission effect is not limited to this configuration. Existing in the pachinko machine 100 in place of or in addition to the configuration executed only by the effect operation of at least one of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 and the effect operation of at least one of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20. It may be configured to be executed by the operation of another movable member provided. When a movable member different from the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is used, not only the movable member provided on the game board 400 but also the movable member provided on the front block 102 is operated, for example. May be good. Further, the shell split mission effect is performed in place of or in addition to the display of the decorative symbol display device 479, together with the effect operation of at least one of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20, and the pachinko machine 100 separate from the decorative symbol display device 100. Display by an existing or newly installed device, light emission by an existing frame light emitting device 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10), a board surface light emitting device 490, or a newly installed device, or an existing sound device 281,282 (see FIG. 10). It may be configured to be executed by sound by (see FIG. 3) or by a newly installed device.

With the end of the shell split mission effect, V as a specific launch operation effect that specifically instructs the game ball to be launched so that the game ball enters the privilege area 409V using text information. The production is started aiming at. When the effect of aiming at V is started, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are kept in a close posture, and the decorative symbol display device 479 is written so as to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V. A display is displayed to instruct. The effect of aiming at this V is continued until the game ball is detected by the specific passage switch 448 that detects the game ball that has entered the privilege area 409V. The start time of the specific firing operation effect may be the same as the start of the period (time TE) in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, or may be after the start of the time TE. The start time of the specific firing operation effect may be before the start of the time TE, but at least after the lapse of the time TJ at which it can be confirmed by the operation of the distribution mechanism 437 that the special gaming state of the time reduction transition is performed. Is preferable.

When the game ball that has entered the privilege area 409V is detected by the specific passage switch 448 at the time ct11 after the start of the production aiming at V, the diagonal movement drive motor starts rotating in the opposite direction, and the rotation drive motor also reverses. Start rotating in the direction. Therefore, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 start to change their postures from the close posture to the separated posture. For the diagonal movement drive motor, the time is ct12 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) from ct11, and for the rotary drive motor, the time is ct13 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) from ct11. Directional rotation is stopped. As a result, after the time ct13, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are maintained in a close posture.

Here, the light emitting form of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 will be described. The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 emit light in a form corresponding to the progress of various effects such as a shell splitting effect, a treasure appearance effect, and a V aiming effect.

From the time ct2 when the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 start to change from the separated posture to the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 start the operation of pressing the treasure egg 482. A large number of light emitting elements (not shown) scattered all over the back side of the left movable member 10 and dots all over the back side of the right movable member 20 in the period up to the time ct4 before the time. A large number of light emitting elements (not shown) are lit. Therefore, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 emit light in a form in which the entire surface thereof is lit (lighting in FIG. 25).

Further, in the period from the time ct4 before the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 start the operation of pressing the treasure egg 482 to the time ct8 when the repeated operation ends, the left movable member 10 and the left movable member 10 When the right movable member 20 is in a posture closer than the posture in which the treasure egg 482 is sandwiched, a large number of light emitting elements scattered throughout the back side of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20. Lights up. Therefore, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 emit light in a form in which the entire surface thereof blinks in accordance with the operation (blinking linked to the movable member in FIG. 25).

Further, in the period from the time ct8 to the time ct10 when the treasure appearance effect is executed, a large number of light emitting elements scattered all over the back side of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged at predetermined intervals ( For example, it lights up in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 emit light in a form in which the entire surface thereof blinks (high-speed blinking in FIG. 25).

Further, in the period from the time ct10 to the time ct11 when the effect is performed aiming at V, the plurality of light emitting elements 29 arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are the left movable member. The lights are sequentially lit from the rotary shaft side end portion of the 10 to the movable side end portion, and subsequently from the movable side end portion of the right movable member 20 toward the rotary shaft side end portion. Therefore, the light is emitted in a form in which light flows from the rotation shaft side end portion of the left movable member 10 toward the rotation shaft side end portion of the right movable member 20 located in the vicinity of the privilege area 409V (flow blinking in FIG. 25).

Here, the production in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time will be described. In the special game state scheduled to be shortened, the same effects as those from time ct1 to time ct8 in the special game state scheduled to be probable change are executed from time td1 to time td8.

The upper approach control mechanism 454 starts the posture change from the approach prohibition posture to the approach allowable posture at the time tb1 when the first round of the special gaming state scheduled to be shortened is started. Immediately after the time tb3, the upper approach control mechanism 454 goes through an approachable posture and becomes an approach allowable posture. After that, the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 starts the posture change from the approach allowed posture to the approach prohibited posture at time tb4, and returns to the approach prohibited posture through the approachable posture. Therefore, the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in a state where it can proceed from time tb3 to time tb5 (time TF).

Further, the distribution mechanism 437 is in an approachable state approximately from time tb1 to time tb2, as in the special gaming state scheduled to be probable change, and the distribution mechanism 437 is in an approachable state through the guide passage 494 during this approachable state. The game ball is not guided, and the period in which the game ball can enter is not the period during which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V (the period in which the game ball can enter). Further, since the distribution mechanism 437 is set so that the maximum duration TI is set shorter than the time until the second enterable state after the time t4 such as the special gaming state scheduled to change is generated, the second time. It does not enter the accessible state. Therefore, in the first round of the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, the period during which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V (the period during which the game can enter) does not occur.

At time td8, the rotary drive motor starts to rotate in the forward direction as in the special gaming state scheduled to change. Therefore, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 change from the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482 to the posture of pressing the treasure egg 482. As a result, the production is started without breaking the shell. However, unlike the special gaming state scheduled to change, the treasure egg 482 did not break in the decorative symbol display device 479 as shown in FIG. 26 (D), and the treasure 483 (diamond in the figure) shown in FIG. 26 (C). ) Does not appear. The display starts.

At the time td13 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) from the time td8, the rotation drive motor starts rotating in the opposite direction. As a result, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 start to change their postures from the posture of pressing the treasure egg 482 to the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the treasure egg 482 is pressed but does not crack, and the treasure egg 482 returns to its original shape so as to bounce off the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20. Further, due to the posture change of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 to the posture separated posture, the treasure egg 482 is not supported and is displayed as if it falls. The effect of not cracking the shell is after the display that the treasure egg 482 moves downward from between the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 in the decorative pattern display device 479, and the time ct10 during the first round is displayed. It ends in.

In addition, during the period from time ct8 to time ct10 when the effect is executed without cracking the shell, a large number of light emitting elements scattered all over the back side of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are scheduled to change. Lights up at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 seconds) longer than in the case of the treasure appearance effect in the special gaming state of. Therefore, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 emit light in a form in which the entire surface thereof blinks at a lower frequency than in the case of the treasure appearance effect (slow blinking in FIG. 25).

It should be noted that the shell cracking effect is configured to end in the middle of the first round, but the shell cracking effect is not limited to this configuration, and the shell cracking effect ends at the same time as the end of the first round (time tb10), or the first It may be configured to end after one round. In the case of a configuration in which the shell cracking effect ends after the first round, it is preferable that the shell cracking effect ends before the start of the second round.

From the time td10 to the time td14 after the effect without cracking the shell, the decorative symbol display device 479 executes a disappointing effect indicating that the enterable period does not occur. When the regrettable effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays a display indicating that the enterable period does not occur (for example, a character display of regrettable). In addition, the flow position information (“right-handed” in the upper right of FIG. 26 (D)) that encourages the game by the right-handed game method is displayed from the start of the special game state, but when the unfortunate production is started, The display of the flow position information is highlighted by making the line width thicker, larger, blinking, and the like. This may disappoint the result and stop the launch of the game ball, or if the launch of the game ball is stopped and the result is being watched, the launch of the game ball may not be resumed or the launch may be delayed. As a result, the player can be alerted so as not to be disadvantaged in the second and subsequent rounds.

According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, when the first round is started in the special gaming state scheduled for probabilistic change and the period shifts to the enterable period, the decorative symbol display device 479 provides the first special gaming state scheduled for probabilistic change. Predetermined display information (treasure 483) is displayed before the start of the round, and after the display, a predetermined effect operation (change to a close posture) is performed. Then, after the predetermined staging operation, the game ball enters the privilege area 409V and shifts to the probabilistic game state. Therefore, in the case of a special game state scheduled to change with a probability of entering, the display of the treasure 483 by the decorative symbol display device 479 causes the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 to perform the staging operation as a notice. By notifying the player, it is possible to notify the player that the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V by changing the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 to the close posture. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such as overlooking a predetermined effect operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 and losing the opportunity to cause the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V and generate a probabilistic gaming state. Become. In addition, the notification of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 by the operation can be made more conspicuous than the notification of the decorative symbol display device 479 by the display, and the opportunity that the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks.

Further, the situation in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is arranged on the front side closer to the player than the display of predetermined display information by the decorative symbol display device 479 and the decorative symbol display device 479 after the display information is displayed. It is shown to the player by the posture change of the movable members 10 and 20. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player in a more understandable manner by using a member (device) close to the player that the situation in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is approaching in time.

<A staging that allows the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V.>
Next, the effect of allowing the game ball to enter the privilege area 409V will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 31 together with FIG. 5. One-handed participation in which the player can participate in the effect by operating the right input lever 810R of the right input operation device 801R, which will be described later, as a kind of effect executed when the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V. The type production is performed. In the one-handed participation type production, the player can easily operate the right input lever 810R by moving the hand operating the firing operation by the firing operation device 250 to the right input lever 810R.

The one-handed participation type effect is executed during the execution of the round in which the game ball is in a state where the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, and before the entry period is reached. When the one-handed participation type production is executed, the possibility that the player does not perform the firing operation increases, and the game ball advances to the side of the upper prize-winning device 434 provided with the distribution mechanism 437 because the firing operation is not performed. Can be suppressed (see FIG. 7). Therefore, for example, even in the situation where the ball biting chain passage as described above occurs, a large number of game balls enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the enterable period occurs before the start of the enterable period. It is possible to suppress the situation where it disappears. This makes it easier to prevent the game ball from being unable to enter the privilege area 409V during the enterable period.

In the one-handed participation type production, the right input operation device 801R (see FIG. 5) provided at the right end of the front block 102 is used as the input operation device. The right input operation device 801R includes a right input lever 810R that allows a player to perform an input by holding the device with his / her hand. As shown in FIG. 5, the right input lever 810R is the right end of the front block 102, and is a launch operation device 250 capable of adjusting the launch of the game ball by rotating the launch handle 252 provided on the pedestal 251. It is located on the upper side. Further, the right input lever 810R is arranged so as to project toward the front side (player side) of the central panel 220 that makes the rear side visible while closing the opening 210A of the front decorative body 210. Therefore, the right hand that performs the launch operation (rotation operation of the launch handle 252) by the launch operation device 250 is closer to the right input lever 810R than the left hand, and the right input lever 810R can be easily operated by that amount. Can be done.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the arrangement and structure of the right input lever 810R by the cut surface including X1-X1 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, the right input lever 810R is formed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 provided on the rear side of the game board 400, and the front side of the game board 400. It is arranged on the front side of the game area 409 (right flow area 409R).

The right input lever 810R includes a right grip wall 811R gripped by the player and a right operating member 812R. The right operating member 812R moves diagonally to the right rear side from the protruding position (position shown by the solid line in FIG. 27 (A)) protruding to the left diagonally front side of the right grip wall 811R when viewed from the player side. It takes a buried position (the position shown by the broken line in FIG. 27 (B)) at which at least a part of the right grip wall 811R is buried. The right operation member 812R is arranged at a protruding position in a situation where the operation by the player is not performed.

The right operating member 812R is pushed and moved to the diagonally right rear side (lower right side in FIG. 27) based on the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R. The movement of the right operating member 812R is detected by a right grip operation detection switch (not shown) provided in the internal space of the right grip wall 811R. The detection of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R by the right grip operation detection switch is monitored by the sub control board 940, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled by the sub control board 940 according to the operation.

The right input lever 810R includes a covering wall (hereinafter, also referred to as a right covering wall 813R) that covers the front side, the left side, the lower side, the upper side, and the rear side of the right operating member 812R and the right grip wall 811R. .. Therefore, when the player grabs the right input lever 810R and tries to operate the right operating member 812R, it can be restricted to grab the right input lever 810R from the right side. In this way, the operation of the right operating member 812R with respect to the right input lever 810R is configured to be easier with the right hand than with the left hand, so that the input operation to the right input lever 810R is possible (effective). In the period TL), the player can stop the firing operation of the firing operation device 250 to make it easier for the firing of the game ball to be stopped.

Specifically, the right covering wall 813R has a left wall 814L extending to the rear side of the rear end portion of the right grip wall 811R on the left side of the right grip wall 811R, and the front end portion and the left wall 814L of the right grip wall 811R. It is provided with a front wall 814F which is connected to the front end portion of the right operating member 812R and covers the front side of the right operating member 812R. The left wall 814L and the front wall 814F are parts where the contact operation with the right operation member 812R from the left front side when viewed from the player side is impossible, and thereby the right operation using the left hand not performing the firing operation. The operation on the member 812R can be made difficult.

Further, the right covering wall 813R extends from the lower end portion of the left wall 814L toward the right grip wall 811R side, is connected to the lower end portion of the right grip wall 811R and the front wall 814F, and is connected to the lower wall 814D covering the lower side of the right operating member 812R. , An upper wall 819U (see FIG. 5) extending from the upper end portion of the left wall 814L toward the right grip wall 811R side, connecting to the upper end portion of the right grip wall 811R and the front wall 814F, and covering the upper side of the right operating member 812R. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the right operation member 812R from the lower side or the upper side of the right input lever 810R by using the left hand that has not been fired.

Further, the right covering wall 813R extends from the rear end portion of the left wall 814L toward the right grip wall 811R side, connects to the rear end portion of the lower wall 814D and the upper wall 814U, and covers the rear side of the right operating member 812R. It is equipped with 814B. For this reason, it is difficult to operate the right operation member 812R by using the finger of the left hand that has not been fired and wrapping the finger from the gap portion on the rear side of the left wall 814L, the lower wall 814D, and the upper wall 814U. be able to.

The left wall 814L is provided with a space in which a fingertip can be inserted from the right end of the right operating member 812R by a distance formed inside the right input lever 810R, and the rear wall 814B is provided at the rear end of the right grip wall 811R. It is provided at a distance from the part where the finger can be inserted. Therefore, the player can easily bring the fingertip into contact with the right operating member 812R by inserting the fingertip of the right hand from the portion opened on the right side formed on the rear side of the right grip wall 811R. Further, the player puts his / her palm on the right end of the right grip wall 811R, and touches the left end of the right operation member 812R with any fingertip other than the thumb to hold the hand, thereby tilting the right operation member 812R to the right. It can be easily pressed to the rear side (right grip wall 811R side).

It is not always necessary to make the operation by the left hand difficult by the right covering wall 813R which makes the operation of the right operation member 812R by the left hand difficult. For example, at least a part of the right covering wall 813R is provided so as to be able to be displaced with respect to another part, and by changing the relative position of the part, the operation of the right operating member 812R by the left hand is temporarily allowed. It may be configured. For example, the left wall 814L is movably provided by a member separate from the other walls, and the left wall 814L moves in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction so that an opening is formed on the left side of the right input lever 810R. The operation of grasping the right input lever 810R by the left hand may be temporarily enabled or difficult. Further, instead of the right covering wall 813R, a movable member provided on the front block 102, which is separate from the right input lever 810R, moves so as to cover the left side and the front side of the right operating member 812R. Therefore, the operation of gripping the right operation member 812R with the left hand may be restricted. Further, it is not necessary to provide all of the right covering wall 813R provided on the right input lever 810R, and even if at least a part of the wall constituting the right covering wall 813R (for example, the lower wall 814D and the rear wall 814B) is not provided. good. Further, the right input lever 810R is provided at the right end of the front block 102, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a lever may be provided on the center side or the left side of the front block 102. Even so, it is preferable to adopt an input lever having a shape that cannot be operated or is difficult to operate with the left hand, such as a configuration in which a fingertip is inserted into a portion opened on the right side to operate the operating member.

The right input lever 810R is movably supported by a support mechanism provided on the base frame 201 of the front block 102. Further, the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is configured so that the movement of the right input lever 810R can be performed when the movement of the right input lever 810R is restricted by the right lever movement restricting device 804R.

Here, in the round (first round) in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, the transition of the one-handed participation type shell splitting mission production executed as the one-handed participation type production using the right input lever 810R will be described. .. FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing control of a one-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to change, and shows control when a player participates in the effect. In addition, in FIG. 28, the control of the latter half of the round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period (symbol variation period) of the symbol variation display by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state is shown.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a transition of a one-handed participation type staging in a special gaming state scheduled to change, and a transition when a player participates in the staging. FIG. 29 (A) shows the execution of the shell splitting effect (immediately after the time ct3 in FIG. 28), which is common to the special game state scheduled for probability change and the special game state scheduled for shortening the time, and FIG. 29 (B) shows the shell. It shows that the treasure appearance effect to be executed following the split effect is being executed (immediately after the time ct8 in FIG. 28). Further, FIG. 29 (C) shows the execution of the shell cracking effect (immediately after the time td8 in FIG. 28), which is executed following the shell split effect in the special game state scheduled for shortening the time, and FIG. 29 (D) shows the shell. It shows during the V appearance effect (immediately after the time ct8 in FIG. 28) that is executed following the split effect.

In the following, only the difference between the control of the one-handed participation type shell splitting mission effect shown in FIG. 28 and the control of the shell splitting mission effect shown in FIG. 26 will be described. In the following, the shell-splitting mission effect shown in FIG. 26 is also referred to as a non-participation-type shell-splitting mission effect in order to clearly distinguish it from the one-handed participatory shell-splitting mission effect. The participatory shell-splitting mission effect and the non-participatory shell-splitting mission effect may be configured so that the player can select in advance which effect to execute. For example, the execution of the game may be performed. You may enable the selection operation while the standby demo screen is displayed, or you may select which effect to execute by lottery on the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100, and multiple types of participatory effects are set. Even if it is done, it may be possible to select it in advance, or the content of the effect may be selected by lottery.

There are three main differences between the one-handed shell-splitting mission and the non-participatory shell-splitting mission. First, in the control of the one-handed participation type shell splitting mission effect, right input is performed for at least a part of the period during which the shell splitting effect is executed (time ct2 to time ct8: the same period as shown in FIG. 26). The validity period TL for accepting the operation of gripping the lever 810R as valid is set. In the following, the shell splitting effect in which the valid period TL of the operation of holding the right input lever 810R is set is also referred to as a one-handed participation type shell splitting effect. Secondly, in the control of the one-handed participation type shell split mission production, the period during which the opening effect (OP effect) is executed before the first round is started (time ct1 to time ct2: the case shown in FIG. 26). During the same period), in the decorative symbol display device 479, various information related to the player's operation (for example, the operation of holding the right input lever 810R and the operation of rotating the firing handle 252) (hereinafter, also referred to as input operation related information). ) Is displayed. Thirdly, during the period in which the one-handed participation type shell splitting effect is executed, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 do not have a predetermined operation controlled by the sub-control board 940, but the right by the player. It operates according to the operation of gripping the input lever 810R. In the following, when the player performs an operation of gripping the right input lever 810R in the one-handed participation type shell splitting effect, it is assumed that the right hand is released from the launch operation device 250 and the right input lever 810R is gripped with the right hand. explain.

The opening effect (OP effect of FIG. 28) is executed and the decorative symbol display device 479 is executed before the valid period TL of the operation of holding the right input lever 810R at the time ct1 when the special game state scheduled to change is started. In addition, as a preparation for the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R, it is a kind of input operation related information, and the operation preparation instruction information for instructing the operation of grasping the right input lever 810R (for example, the character information of "grab the right input lever"). ) Is displayed. The operation preparation instruction information is configured to be character information, but is not limited to this configuration, and instead of or in addition to this, how to grip the right input lever 810R and how to move the right operation member 812R. For example, the operation method of the right input lever 810R may be displayed as image information, or the operation method may be output by voice. Further, the configuration for outputting the operation preparation instruction information is not an essential configuration and may be omitted.

Further, at the time ct1 when the opening effect is started, the start suggestion information (for example, a numerical countdown display) suggesting the start timing of the valid period TL of the operation of holding the right input lever 810R is not shown in the decorative symbol display device 479. And the meter decrease display) is displayed. As for the start suggestion information, any one or a combination of character display, image display, and voice may be output, or the configuration for outputting the start suggestion information may be omitted.

In addition, at the time ct1 when the opening effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 479 informs the player that the game ball does not have to be launched in the operation instruction effect (“No launch of the ball is required”). Character information with "!": See FIG. 29 (A)) is displayed. As a result, the player can know that he / she may take his / her hand off the launch operation device 250, move the right hand holding the launch operation device 250 to the right input lever 810R without any confusion, and move the right input lever 810R. Can be grasped with the right hand. The firing unnecessary information is continuously displayed until the time ct8 at which the shell splitting effect, which is executed following the operation instruction effect, ends. As for the launch-unnecessary information, any one or a combination of character display, image display, and voice may be output, or the configuration for outputting the launch-unnecessary information may be omitted.

Further, at the time ct2 when the one-handed participation type shell splitting effect is started following the opening effect, the right-handed grip operation instruction for instructing the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R instead of the operation preparation instruction information in the decorative symbol display device 479. Information 484S (for example, the phrase "hold right input lever continuously": see FIG. 29 (A)) is displayed. The right-hand grip operation instruction information 484S is continuously displayed until the time ct8 at which the one-handed participation type shell splitting effect, which is executed following the opening effect, ends. The right grip operation instruction information 484S is configured to be displayed in characters, but is not limited to this configuration, and the state in which the right operation member 812R is continuously operating and the right input lever 810R are continuously operated by the right hand. The operation method of the right input lever 810R may be displayed as an image by an image showing a gripping state, or may be output by voice or may be omitted.

During the time te1 during the one-handed participation type shell splitting effect that is executed following the opening effect, the valid period of the operation to hold the right input lever 810R is TL or the operation to hold the right input lever 810R is not accepted as valid. The right-hand grip operation valid flag that identifies the presence is turned on. The right grip operation valid flag is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 940. When the movement of the right operation member 812R is detected by the right grip operation detection switch based on the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R while the right grip operation valid flag is on, the sub-control board 940 detects the detection. Accept it as valid. On the other hand, during the period when the right grip operation valid flag is off, even if the movement of the right operation member 812R is detected by the right grip operation detection switch, the sub-control board 940 determines that the detection is invalid. I will not accept it.

When the right grip operation valid flag is turned on, the value corresponding to the effective period TL of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R stored in the ROM of the sub control board 940 is initially set in the effect timer of the sub control board 940. Set. The right grip operation valid flag is maintained in the ON state for the period during which the shell splitting effect is executed, and after the shell splitting effect ends (time tc8) and the first round starts (time t1). It goes off.

Here, the right input lever 810R is gripped by hand when the right grip operation instruction information 484S (see FIG. 29 (A): predetermined operation information) is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479 (operable display means). It is configured to be able to perform operations (predetermined input operations). Then, at the same time as or before the start of the valid period TL that effectively accepts the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R, the decorative symbol display device 479 instructs the player to operate the right input lever 810R to grip the right input lever 810R. Information 484S is displayed. Further, the valid period TL of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is set to a period including at least a part from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period. Therefore, when the player stops the firing operation on the launching operation device 250 and grips the right input lever 810R, the ball is caused by the ball biting by the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 (see FIG. 29A). Even if the bite chain passage occurs, the game ball that reaches the installation location of the upper entry control mechanism 454 and advances to the distribution mechanism 437 side during the period from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period. The number can be reduced or eliminated.

Further, the valid period TL of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is the time outside the valid period TL of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R in the period from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period (in the following, invalid). It is preferable that the length (also referred to as time) is set to be less than the time obtained by multiplying the time corresponding to the firing interval when the game balls are continuously fired by a specified number, and the invalid time is the firing time. It is more preferable that the length is set to be less than the time corresponding to the interval multiplied by a number 2 or more smaller than the specified number. As the invalid time of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period becomes shorter, the number of game balls advancing to the distribution mechanism 437 side even if the ball biting chain passage occurs. It can be reduced, and if the invalid time is set to less than the time corresponding to the firing interval multiplied by a number 2 or more smaller than the specified number, the number of game balls advanced by passing through the ball biting chain reaches the specified number. You can almost certainly prevent it from happening.

During the period from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period (time t1 to time t4: approximately 9.0 seconds), the time during which the right grip operation valid flag is off (invalid time for the operation of holding the right input lever 810R). ) Is from the time (for example, 6.0 seconds) obtained by multiplying the time corresponding to the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the game balls are continuously fired by a specified number (for example, 10). The end of the valid period TL of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is set so that the time is sufficiently short (for example, 2.5 seconds). Therefore, even if the ball biting chain passage of the game ball occurs before the enterable period starts, more than the specified number of game balls enter the guide passage 494 and are detected by the upper prize switch 444. It can be prevented from being stored.

Further, the time from the end of the valid period TL of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R to the end of the first advancing state of the upper approach control mechanism 454 (generally at time t5) is fired toward the game area 409. It is longer than the average time for the game ball to reach the installation location of the upper approach control mechanism 454 (for example, 2.0 seconds: hereinafter also referred to as the average arrival time to the upper approach control mechanism 454). As such, the end of the validity period TL (for example, 2.5 seconds) is set. Therefore, the game ball launched immediately after the valid period TL can reach the upper approach regulating mechanism 454 within the period in which the upper approach regulating mechanism 454 is in the first advancing state, and the valid period TL is reached. Even if the launch of the game ball is stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, the time from the end of the valid period TL of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R to the start of the enterable period is the average arrival time to the upper approach control mechanism 454 and the average travel time to the guide passage 494 ( For example, the end of the validity period TL is set so as to be shorter than the time (for example, 3.5 seconds) added (1.5 seconds). Therefore, even if the player resumes launching the game ball after the valid period TL ends, the game ball launched immediately after the valid period TL and entered the guide passage 494 can enter the privilege area 409V. Therefore, even if the launch of the game ball is stopped for the valid period TL, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

The valid period TL of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is configured to be started before the start of the first round, but the valid period of the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is started after the start of the first round. It may be configured. In this case, during the period from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period, the total of the times during which the right grip operation valid flag is off before and after the valid period TL is continuously fired. It is preferable that the start and end of the valid period TL are set so as to be shorter than the time corresponding to the firing interval multiplied by the specified number.

Validity period of the operation to grip the right input lever 810R When the operation to grip the right input lever 810R is performed and the right grip operation detection switch is turned on (for example, time te4), the rotary drive motor rotates in the forward direction. Start. Further, the rotary drive motor switches to rotation in the reverse direction from time te4 to time te5 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second), and further, after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) from time te5. It stops at the time te6. By the operation of the rotary drive motor from time te4 to time te6, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are in a posture of pressing the treasure egg 482 from the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482 shown in FIG. 29 (A) (FIG. 26 (FIG. 26). After changing to B)), it returns to the posture of sandwiching the treasure egg 482. The operation from time te4 to time te6 is executed every time the right grip operation detection switch is turned on (in FIG. 28, the case of operating 9 times is shown).

Validity period of the operation to grip the right input lever 810R In TL, when the operation to grip the right input lever 810R is detected by the right grip operation detection switch more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times), one-handed participation type shell splitting Following the production, the treasure appearance production is executed. On the other hand, during the valid period TL, if the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is not performed, or the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is performed less than a predetermined number of times, one-handed participation is performed in the decorative symbol display device 479. Following the shell splitting effect of the mold, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), the V pre-announcement information 486 (V ball in FIG. 29 (D)) that announces the occurrence of the inaccessible period in advance appears from the treasure egg 482. Is performed, and the V appearance effect is executed.

It should be noted that, on condition that the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R in the valid period TL is performed more than a predetermined number of times, the treasure appearance effect is performed following the shell split effect, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration and the valid period TL. A treasure is continued after the shell splitting effect, provided that a plurality of split periods (for example, nine periods per second) are provided and the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is performed at least once in each judgment period. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the appearance is produced. In the case of this preferable configuration, it becomes possible to guide the player to continuously hold the right input lever 810R for a long time (the entire effective period TL). Therefore, even if the ball biting chain passage occurs, the effect of reducing the number of game balls detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period can be achieved by the effective period TL. It can be improved as compared with the case where the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is not executed in part or in whole.

In the treasure appearance effect (time ct8 to time ct10) that is executed following the one-handed participatory shell split effect, the rotary drive motor rotates in the forward direction, and the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are treasure eggs 482. Take a squeezing posture (time te14). The decorative symbol display device 479 displays that the treasure egg 482 is pressed, and then informs the player that the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V. The display is performed in which the treasure 483 appears from the treasure egg 482 as shown in FIG. 29 (B), which is information that can estimate the set probability state.

Next, in the first round of the special game state scheduled to be shortened (the round corresponding to the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V in the special game state scheduled to change), the one-handed participation type using the right input lever 810R. The transition of the one-handed participation type shell splitting mission production executed as the production will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (C). FIG. 30 is a timing chart showing control of a one-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to shorten the time, and shows control when a player participates in the effect.

As shown in FIG. 30, at the time td1 to the time td2 when the opening effect (OP effect) is executed, the display effect is the same as (same) as the time ct1 to the time ct2 of the special gaming state scheduled to change in FIG. 28. Control is done. Further, at the time td2 to the time td8 in which the one-handed participation type shell splitting effect is executed, the display effect is controlled in the same manner as the time ct2 to the time ct8 of the special gaming state scheduled to be changed in FIG. 28.

In the one-handed participation type shell splitting effect, a valid period TL for the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R is provided, and in the valid period TL, the player operates to grip the right input lever 810R as in the case of the probable change schedule. Can be done. In the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, the one-handed participation type shell splitting effect is followed by the effect without cracking the shell. In the shell cracking effect, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), the decorative symbol display device 479 displays that the treasure egg 482 moves downward without cracking. That is, in the production without cracking the shell, the display is performed in which the treasure 483 does not appear as shown in FIG. 29 (B).

Next, FIG. 29 (D) shows the transition of the one-handed participation type shell splitting mission production for the case where the player does not participate in the one-handed participation type shell splitting mission production executed in the first round of the special gaming state scheduled to change. Along with this, it will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the control of the one-handed participation type effect in the special game state scheduled to change, and the control when the player does not participate in the effect. In addition, in FIG. 31, the control of the latter half of the first round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period (symbol variation period) of the symbol variation display by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state is shown. In the following, only the difference from the control when participating in the one-handed participation type shell splitting mission production shown in FIG. 28 will be described.

The rotation drive motor was stopped because the right input lever 810R was not operated during the period during which the shell splitting effect was in effect and the right grip operation valid flag was on (the valid period TL for the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R). It is maintained in a state.

Following the shell splitting effect, instead of the treasure appearance effect, a V appearance effect is executed in which the decorative symbol display device 479 displays the appearance of the V pre-announcement information 486 from the treasure egg 482 (time ct8 to time ct10). The appearance of the V pre-notification information 486 is information that informs the player that the state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V is started, but it is not information that can be inferred from the currently set probability state.

In the special game state scheduled for probability change, if you participate in the shell split mission production (specifically, the shell split production) as a participatory effect by holding the right input lever 810R, the currently set probability state Information that can be inferred is given (appearance of treasure 483), but if the player does not participate in the shell splitting mission production, information that can infer the currently set probability state is not given. Since the currently set probability state is involved in the victory or defeat of the game, it is of concern to many players. It is possible to have more players participate in the production than in the case of a participatory production in which information that is not related to (points for obtaining benefits such as generating a premium production) is given. In addition, it is not always necessary to display information that can estimate the probability state when not participating in the participatory production, and information that can infer the probability state with a higher probability when participating than when not participating. Is configured to display information that can estimate the probability state even when not participating, and V pre-announcement information 486 in which the probability state cannot be estimated with a certain probability is displayed even when participating. May be.

With the pachinko machine 100 described above, the player can be prompted to hold the right input lever 810R by performing a participatory effect, and the period from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period. In at least a part of the above, it becomes possible to guide the player to stop the firing of the gaming ball by moving the right hand operating the launching operation device 250 (launching handle 252) to the right input lever 810R. As a result, even though the first round is being executed and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number has advanced to the distribution mechanism 437 side before the entry period is reached, a special game state scheduled to change is generated. However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot shift to the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, by making the right input lever 810R difficult to operate with the left hand, it is possible to easily operate the right input lever 810R by the right hand operating the launch operation device 250, from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period. It is possible to promote the stoppage of the launch of the game ball for at least a part of the period.

<Two-handed participation type production of a round in which a game ball can enter the privilege area 409V>
Next, a configuration capable of executing a suitable effect in a round in which a game ball can enter the privilege area 409V will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37 with reference to FIGS. 5. As a kind of effect executed in a round in which a game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, a player uses a right input operation device 801R and a left input operation device 801L, which will be described later, provided on the left side of the right input operation device 801R. By operating with both hands, a two-handed participation type production that can participate in the production is executed.

In the following, prior to the explanation of the transition of the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production as the two-handed participation type production, the right input operation device 801R and the left input operation device 801L used in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production will be described. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the arrangement and structure of the right input operating device 801R and the left input operating device 801L by the cut surface including X1-X1 of FIG.

The right input operation device 801R is provided so as to be located in front of the game area 409 (right flow area 409R) on which the game ball flows down and the decorative symbol display device 479. Specifically, the pachinko machine 100 includes a right support mechanism 802R that movably supports the right input lever 810R, and the right input lever 810R forming a part of the right input operating device 801R is shown in FIG. It is possible to move between the right end arrangement (arrangement shown by the solid line) located at the right end of the front block 102 and the central arrangement (arrangement indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) located on the center side of the front block 102. Therefore, the right input lever 810R functions as a device for inputting information by gripping the right operation member 812R, and also by moving the right input lever 810R on the front side of the game area 409 or the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479. As a device for inputting information, it also functions as a device for executing an effect by moving the right input lever 810R itself on the front side of the game area 409 or the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479.

The right input lever 810R is positioned so that the game ball flowing down the right flow area 409R, which is a part of the game area 409, can be visually recognized without moving to the flow position in the right end arrangement. Further, the right input lever 810R is located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the central arrangement. Therefore, the right input lever 810R can be moved on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479, and it is possible to perform a more conspicuous or powerful effect than the effect of the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, the right input lever 810R is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479 or on the front side of the right flow area 409R (arrangement indicated by a two-dot chain line) in the movement between the right end arrangement and the center arrangement. For this reason, the effect that is more conspicuous and powerful than the effect on the game board 400, such as the effect on the decorative pattern display device 479 and the effect by the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 provided on the game board 400, is on the right. It can be executed by the input lever 810R.

Further, the right input lever 810R can be operated at a position moved to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479 or the game area 409. Therefore, it is possible to operate the right input lever 810 at a position that is more conspicuous than the effect in the decorative symbol display device 479 or the game area 409.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 100 includes a left input operating device 801L provided on the left side of the right input operating device 801R. The left input operation device 801L includes a left input lever 810L provided so as to be located on the front side of the game area 409 on which the game ball flows down and the decorative symbol display device 479.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the left input operation device 801L is located on the front side (game) of the front block 102 at the left end of the front block 102 on the side opposite to the installation side of the launch operation device 250 (launch handle 252). It is provided with a left input lever 810L provided so as to project toward the user side) and a left support mechanism 802L that movably supports the left input lever 810L.

As shown in FIG. 5, the left input lever 810L has a symmetrical shape with the right input lever 810R, and has a left grip wall 811L similar to the right grip wall 811R and a left operation member 812L similar to the right operation member 812R. , The left covering wall 813L similar to the right covering wall 813R is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the left support mechanism 802L also has a symmetrical shape with the right support mechanism 802R, and the left input lever 810L has a left end arrangement (arrangement shown by a solid line) located at the left end of the front block 102. , It is movable between the central side of the front block 102 and the central arrangement (arrangement indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479.

The left input lever 810L is arranged in front of the left flow area 409L, which is a part of the game area 409, in the movement between the left end arrangement and the center arrangement. Therefore, by the operation based on the operation of moving both the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R to the central arrangement, a more conspicuous and powerful effect than the effect on the decorative pattern display device 479 or the game board 400 is executed. Will be possible.

Further, the left input lever 810L can be operated at a position moved to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479 and the left flow area 409L (game area 409). Therefore, it is possible to operate the right input lever 810 at a position that is more conspicuous than the effect in the decorative symbol display device 479 or the game area 409.

When the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 479, a part of the left input lever 810L and a part of the right input lever 810R are part of the decorative symbol display device when viewed from the front. Although the configuration overlaps with the 479, the configuration is not limited to this, and the entire left input lever 810L or the entire right input lever 810R may overlap with the decorative symbol display device 479 in front view. Further, when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are arranged in the center arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479, the decorative symbol is displayed by the entire left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R in front view. The configuration is such that a part of the device 479 is covered, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the entire decorative symbol display device 479 may be covered by the entire left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R in front view.

Further, the right input lever 810R is configured to be displaceable on the front side of both the game area 409 and the decorative symbol display device 479, but is not limited to this configuration, and one of the game area 409 and the decorative symbol display device 479. It may be configured so that it can be arranged on the front side of the. This also applies to the left input lever 810L.

Further, both the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are configured to be dispositionable on the front side of the game area 409, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and at least the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are provided. One of them may be configured so as to be dispositionable on the front side of the game area 409. Further, both the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are configured to be dispositionable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are used. At least one of the above may be provided so as to be dispositionable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479.

The right support mechanism 802R that movably supports the right input lever 810R includes a support base (hereinafter, also referred to as a right support base 820R) to which the right input lever 810R is mounted. The right support base 820R has an L-shaped shape in a side view having a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction and a horizontal portion extending from the lower end of the vertical portion to the front side, and the lower end of the right input lever 810R is formed in the horizontal portion. To support.

Further, the right support mechanism 802R has a fixed rotation shaft fixed to the upper right corner portion of the base frame 201 of the front block 102 (hereinafter, also referred to as a right outer fixed rotation shaft 821R) and the center of the right end side of the right support base 820R. The movable rotation shaft fixed to the portion (hereinafter, the right outer movable rotation shaft 822R) and the support arm connecting the right outer fixed rotation shaft 821R and the right outer movable rotation shaft 822R (hereinafter, both the right outer support arm 823R). It is equipped with).

Further, the right support mechanism 802R includes a fixed rotation shaft (hereinafter, also referred to as a right inner fixed rotation shaft 824R) fixed to the upper left side of the right outer fixed rotation shaft 821R in the base frame 201 of the front block 102, and a right support base. A support arm (hereinafter, right) that connects a movable rotation shaft (hereinafter, right inner movable rotation shaft 825R) fixed to the upper portion of the left end of the 820R, and a right inner fixed rotation shaft 824R and a right inner movable rotation shaft 825R. It also has an inner support arm 826R).

The position of the right inner fixed rotation shaft 824R with respect to the right outer fixed rotation shaft 821R and the position of the right inner movable rotation shaft 825R with respect to the right outer movable rotation shaft 822R are relatively the same position, and are the same as the right outer support arm 823R. The right medial support arm 826R has the same length. That is, the right support mechanism 802R forms a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, the right input lever 810R provided on the right support base 820R and supported by the right support mechanism 802R moves while maintaining a constant posture without rotating in the movement between the right end arrangement and the central arrangement. .. Therefore, even if the player grips the right input lever 810R as in the case of gripping the right input lever 810R, the right input lever 810R can be smoothly moved without twisting the wrist.

Since the left support mechanism 802L has a symmetrical shape with the right support mechanism 802R, it has a left support base 220L (corresponding to the right support base 220R) and a left outer fixed rotation shaft 821L (corresponding to the right outer fixed rotation shaft 821R). , Left outer movable rotation shaft 822L (corresponding to right outer movable rotation shaft 822R), left outer support arm 823L (corresponding to right outer support arm 823R), left inner fixed rotation shaft 824L (corresponding to right inner fixed rotation shaft 824R) ), A left inner movable rotation shaft 825L (corresponding to the right inner movable rotation shaft 825R), and a left inner support arm 826L (corresponding to the right inner support arm 826R), forming a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, as in the case of the right input lever 810R, the left input lever 810L can be smoothly moved without changing the posture of the left input lever 810L. The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R have a configuration in which the posture does not change using the parallel link mechanism, but the posture is not limited to this configuration and the posture does not change without using the parallel link mechanism. It may be configured to move, or it may be configured to move while changing its posture without using the parallel link mechanism.

When the left input lever 810L is arranged at the left end and the right input lever 810R is arranged at the right end, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are separated from each other by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 cm or more: the state where the fingertip is opened to the maximum). It is located at a distance of more than the length from the tip of the thumb to the tip of the middle finger of a general adult male. Therefore, it is possible to prevent both the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R from being operated with one hand.

When the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are arranged in the center, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are arranged with almost no gap. Therefore, the area where the left input lever 810L covers the decorative symbol display device 479 and the area where the right input lever 810R covers the decorative symbol display device 479 become a continuous area, and cover a continuous wide area in the decorative symbol display device 479. be able to.

The right input operating device 801R includes a right lever rotation drive motor 831R that moves the right input lever 810R by rotating the right outer support arm 823R around the right outer fixed rotation shaft 821R. The right lever rotation drive motor 831R can rotate in both directions, and by rotating in a predetermined direction, the right input lever 810R can be moved from the right end arrangement side to the center arrangement side, and also in a predetermined direction. By rotating in the opposite direction, the right input lever 810R can be moved from the center arrangement side to the right end arrangement side. In the following, the rotation direction (right rotation in front view) of the right lever rotation drive motor 831R that moves the right input lever 810R from the right end arrangement side to the center arrangement side is also referred to as a forward direction, and the reverse is also referred to as a reverse direction.

The left input operating device 801L includes a left lever rotation drive motor 831L that moves the left input lever 810L by rotating the left outer support arm 823L around the left outer fixed rotation shaft 821L. The left lever rotation drive motor 831L can rotate in both directions, and by rotating in a predetermined direction, the left input lever 810L can be moved from the left end arrangement side to the center arrangement side. By rotating in the opposite direction, the left input lever 810L can be moved from the center arrangement side to the right end arrangement side. In the following, the rotation direction (left rotation in front view) of the left lever rotation drive motor 831L for moving the left input lever 810L from the right end arrangement side to the center arrangement side is also referred to as a forward direction, and the reverse is also referred to as a reverse direction.

The right input operation device 801R includes a right connection operation detection switch 838R that detects the movement of the right input lever 810R from the right end arrangement to the center arrangement side based on the connection operation between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. Specifically, the right input operation device 801R, as the right connection operation detection switch 838R, comes into contact with the right outer support arm 823R to turn on when the right input lever 810R is arranged at the right end, and the right input lever 810R. Is provided with a button switch that takes an off state away from the right outer support arm 823R by moving from the right end arrangement to the center arrangement side.

The left input operation device 801L includes a left connection operation detection switch 838L that detects the movement of the left input lever 810L from the left end arrangement to the center arrangement side. Specifically, the left input operation device 801L is a left connection operation detection switch 838L, and when the left input lever 810L is arranged at the left end, the left input operation device 801L comes into contact with the left outer support arm 823L to turn on, and the left input lever 810L. Is provided with a button switch that takes an off state away from the left outer support arm 823L by moving from the left end arrangement to the center arrangement side.

The right input operating device 801R includes a right connection state detection switch 839R that detects the movement of the right input lever 810R from the right end arrangement side to the center arrangement. Specifically, the right input operation device 801R, as the right connection state detection switch 839R, moves the right input lever 810R to the center arrangement, so that it contacts the right outer support arm 823R and takes an on state, and the right input lever It is equipped with a button switch that is separated from the right outer support arm 823R and takes an off state until the 810R is moved to the central position.

The left input operating device 801L includes a left connection state detection switch 839L that detects the movement of the left input lever 810L from the right end arrangement side to the center arrangement. Specifically, in the left input operation device 801L, as the left connection state detection switch 839L, the left input lever 810L moves to the center arrangement, so that it contacts the left outer support arm 823L and takes an on state, and the left input lever It is equipped with a button switch that is separated from the left outer support arm 823L and takes an off state until the 810L is moved to the central position.

The right input operating device 801R includes a right lever movement restricting device 804R that regulates the movement of the right input lever 810R. Specifically, the right lever movement control device 804R includes a right lever movement control member 841R that can move in the front-rear direction. The right lever restricting member 841R is inserted into a recessed hole (not shown) formed in the vertical portion of the right support base 820R, and by restricting the movement of the right support base 820R, the right end lever 810R is arranged from the right end. A restricted position (see FIG. 27 (A)) that restricts movement and an allowable position (FIG. 32 (A)) that allows the right input lever 810R to move from the right end arrangement after exiting the recessed hole are taken. Further, the right lever movement restricting device 804R includes a moving drive solenoid (not shown) for driving the right lever movement restricting member 841R. The operation of the right lever movement drive solenoid is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

The left input operating device 801L includes a left lever movement restricting device 804L that regulates the movement of the left input lever 810L from the left end arrangement. Specifically, the left lever movement control device 804L has the same structure as the right lever movement control device 804R, and has the same left lever control member 841L as the right lever movement control member 841R and the left lever movement control solenoid member like the right lever movement drive solenoid. It is equipped with a lever movement drive solenoid (not shown).

The left input operating device 801L and the right input operating device 801R are provided with a device capable of connecting the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. Specifically, the right input lever 810R is provided with an upper electromagnet 818R and a lower electromagnet 819R arranged vertically separated from each other at the left end of the right covering wall 813R. Further, the left input lever 810L is provided with an upper electromagnet 818L and a lower electromagnet 819L which are vertically separated from each other at the right end of the left covering wall 813L.

The upper electromagnet 818L of the left input lever 810L is arranged at a position facing the upper electromagnet 818R of the right input lever 810R when the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are centrally arranged, and the left input lever 810L is also arranged. The lower electromagnet 819L is arranged at a position facing the lower electromagnet 819R of the right input lever 810R when the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are arranged in the center. Therefore, for example, the upper electromagnet 818L and the upper electromagnet 818R are excited so that the right side of the upper electromagnet 818L becomes the N pole and the left side of the upper electromagnet 818R becomes the S pole, as shown in FIG. 32 (C). As described above, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R can be attracted and connected to each other and maintained in a connected state. On the other hand, for example, the upper electromagnet 818L and the upper electromagnet 818R are excited so that the right side of the upper electromagnet 818L becomes the N pole and the left side of the upper electromagnet 818R also becomes the N pole, as shown in FIG. 31 (B). In addition, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R can be repelled and maintained in a separated state.

The excitation of the upper electromagnet 818L, the lower electromagnet 819L, the upper electromagnet 818R and the lower electromagnet 819R is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

Here, in the first round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V in the special game state scheduled to change, the two-handed participation type is executed as a two-handed participation type production using the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. I will explain the transition of the shell split mission production. In the two-handed shell split mission production, in addition to the display effect by the image, the information instructing the operation to connect the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R to the decorative pattern display device 479, and the preparation and end of the operation. Information related to the input operation related to the input operation by the player, such as information indicating the instruction to rotate the firing handle 252 and information indicating the rotation operation of the firing handle 252, is displayed. In addition, in the two-handed participatory shell-splitting mission production, the player participates in the production during a part of the shell-splitting production that is commonly performed in the special game state scheduled for probability change and the special game state scheduled for shortening the time. Can be done. In the following, the shell-splitting effect in the two-handed participatory shell-splitting mission production will also be referred to as the two-handed participatory shell-splitting effect.

FIG. 33 is a timing chart showing the control of the two-handed participation type effect (shell split mission effect) in the special game state scheduled to change, and the control when the player participates in the effect. In addition, in FIG. 33, the control of the latter half of the first round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period (symbol variation period) of the symbol variation display by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state is shown. In the following, in the control of the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission effect, only the difference from the control when the player participates in the one-handed participatory type shell splitting mission effect shown in FIG. 28 will be described.

Further, FIG. 34 is a transition of a two-handed participation type production (two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production) in a special gaming state scheduled to be probable, and schematically shows a transition when a player participates in the production. It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 34 (A) shows immediately after the start of the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect (time tf1 in FIG. 33), which is commonly executed in the special game state scheduled to change and the special game state scheduled to be shortened. B) indicates that the shell splitting effect is in progress (immediately after the time tf4 in FIG. 32), and FIG. 34 (C) indicates immediately after the start of the treasure appearance effect in the special gaming state scheduled for probability change (time tf16 in FIG. 25). FIG. 34 (D) shows the treasure appearance effect (immediately after the time tf18 in FIG. 25) in the special gaming state scheduled to change.

As shown in FIG. 33, the opening effect (OP effect) is started in the decorative symbol display device 479 at the time ct1 when the special game state scheduled to be probable changes starts, and the opening effect (OP effect) is started from the lower end of the center of the display unit 479a toward the upper side. The display in which the treasure egg 482 appears is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 479, as input operation related information, operation preparation instruction information for instructing an operation of grasping the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R in preparation for operating the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. Is displayed. The display of the operation preparation instruction information continues until the time ct2 at which the opening effect ends. The operation preparation instruction information is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 together with the time information for designating the timing to start the display and the timing to end the display.

At the time ct2 when the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect is started following the opening effect, the decorative symbol display device 479 is a kind of input operation related information instead of the operation preparation instruction information, and the left input lever 810L and the right input. Connection operation instruction information (for example, "left and right" in FIG. 34 (A)) instructing an operation of moving both input levers to the central arrangement side (hereinafter, also referred to as a connection operation) so as to connect the lever 810R in the center. The text information) "Connect the lever and crack the shell" is displayed. The connection operation instruction information is continuously displayed until the time ct8 at which the shell splitting effect, which is executed following the opening effect, ends. The connection operation instruction information 484D is configured to be displayed in characters, but is not limited to this configuration, and an image showing the operation of connecting the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R or the left input lever 810L and the right The operation method of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R may be displayed as an image by an image showing the operation of connecting the input lever 810R with both hands, or the operation instruction information may be output by voice. It is also good. Further, the configuration for outputting the operation instruction information is not an essential configuration and may be omitted.

A period for accepting a connection operation between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R at time tf1 during the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect that is executed following the operation instruction effect (hereinafter, also referred to as the valid period TL of the connection operation). The concatenation operation valid flag that identifies whether the concatenation operation is not accepted or the concatenation operation is not accepted is turned on. The connection operation valid flag is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 940. When the movement of the left input lever 810L from the left end arrangement is detected by the left connection operation detection switch 838L during the period when the connection operation valid flag is on, and the right end arrangement of the right input lever 810R. When the movement from is detected by the right connection operation detection switch 838R, the sub-control board 940 determines that the detection by the left connection operation detection switch 838L or the right connection operation detection switch 838R is valid and accepts it. On the other hand, during the period when the connection operation valid flag is off, the detection by the left connection operation detection switch 838L or the right connection operation detection switch 838R is judged to be invalid and is not accepted.

When the connection operation valid flag is turned on, a value corresponding to the length of the connection operation valid period TL stored in the ROM of the sub control board 940 is initially set in the effect timer (not shown) of the sub control board 940. Will be done. The connection operation valid flag is maintained in the ON state until the end of the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect (time ct8).

During the period from the start of the first round to the start of the enterable period (time t1 to time t4: approximately 9.0 seconds), the game ball is in the off state of the connection operation valid flag (linking operation invalid time). A time sufficiently shorter than the time (for example, 6.0 seconds) obtained by multiplying the time corresponding to the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) by a specified number (for example, 10 pieces) in the case of continuous firing (for example, 6.0 seconds). For example, it is set to 2.5 seconds). The connection operation between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R must be performed with both hands, and during that period, the launch operation of the launch operation device 250 cannot be performed and the game ball is not launched. Therefore, for example, even if the ball biting of the game ball is generated by the upper approach control mechanism 454, more than the specified number of game balls enter the guide passage 494 before the approachable period starts. Can be prevented.

Further, when the connection operation valid flag is turned on, the left lever movement restricting solenoid that drives the left lever restricting member 841L that restricts the movement of the left input lever 810L and the right lever restricting member 841R that restricts the movement of the right input lever 810R are used. The right lever movement regulation solenoid that drives is turned on. Since the left lever movement restricting solenoid and the right lever movement restricting solenoid shift to the on state and the off state at the same timing, they are shown as the movement restricting solenoids in FIG. 33 without distinction. When the movement regulation solenoid is turned on, the left lever regulation member 841L and the right lever regulation member 841R change from the regulation arrangement to the allowable arrangement. As a result, the left input lever 810L can be changed from the left end arrangement to the center arrangement, and the right input lever 810R can be changed from the right end arrangement to the center arrangement. The operation of the movement control solenoid is controlled based on the time information that specifies the timing for shifting the movement control solenoid stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 to the on state or the off state. The movement restricting solenoid is turned off at time tf18 after the end of the valid period TL of the connection operation.

When the connection operation valid flag is turned on, the upper electromagnet 818L and the lower electromagnet 819L provided on the left input lever 810L are excited so that the right side (right input lever 810R side) becomes the N pole, and the right side. The upper electromagnet 818R and the lower electromagnet 819R provided on the input lever 810R are excited so that the left side (left input lever 810L side) becomes the north pole. Since the upper electromagnet 818L and the lower electromagnet 819L provided on the left input lever 810L are excited to have the same polarity at the same timing, the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L are not distinguished from each other without distinguishing between them. Similarly, the upper electromagnet 818L and the lower electromagnet 819L provided on the right input lever 810R are also referred to as right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R as shown in FIG. 33 without distinguishing between them. When the left lever electromagnets 818L, 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R, 819R were excited to the N pole of the same pole (N pole excitation in FIG. 33), the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R moved to a position close to each other. Even so, the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R repel each other, and the connection between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R is blocked (see FIG. 32 (B)).

Only N-pole excitation is performed for the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L, but for the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R, excitation with the left side as the S pole (S-pole excitation in FIG. 33: time tf16 to time). tf17) is also performed. Specifically, the ROM of the sub-control board 940 stores time information for specifying the timing for switching the states of the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L, and the RAM of the sub-control board 940 stores the excited state or the non-excited state. Left excitation information (for example, 0 in the case of non-excitation and 1 in the case of excitation) that specifies whether to set the state is stored. Further, the ROM of the sub-control board 940 stores time information for designating the timing for switching the states of the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R, and the RAM of the sub-control board 940 is set to the N-pole excitation state or the S-pole excitation. Right excitation information (0 for non-excitation, 1 for N-pole excitation, 2 for S-pole excitation) that specifies whether to set to a state or a non-excitation state is stored.

By exciting the left lever electric magnets 818L and 819L and the right lever electric magnets 818R and 819R with opposite polarities, the connection between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R is prevented, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, by controlling to generate a driving force that rotates at least one of the left lever rotation drive motor 831L and the right lever rotation drive motor 831R in the opposite direction (direction away from the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R center arrangement). , The connection between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R may be blocked.

When the player starts the connection operation between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R after the connection operation valid flag is turned on (time tf4), the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are activated. Turns on. Assuming that the player moves the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R symmetrically, in FIG. 33, the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are not distinguished, and the connection operation is detected. Shown as a switch.

The configuration for determining that the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected is not limited to the above configuration, and is, for example, one of the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the left connection operation detection switch 838L. It is said that the connection operation between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R is performed on the sub-control board 940 based on the detection state of one of the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the left connection operation detection switch 838L. It may be configured to judge.

When both the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are in the ON state, the integrated time in which both the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are in the ON state is measured, although not shown. To. Specifically, the integrated time counter that measures the integrated time in which both the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 940 are in the ON state has a specified determination time TM. The value corresponding to (for example, 6.0 seconds) is initially set. The integrated time counter is 1 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) when the connection operation valid flag is on and both the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are on. It is subtracted one by one. The sub-control board 940 determines that the connection operation has been performed by the player when the integrated time counter becomes 0.

In the valid period TL of the connection operation, the effect selection flag (not shown) is turned on at the time tf15 when the time when both the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are on is equal to or longer than the specified determination time TM. Will be. The effect selection flag is information for designating an effect to be continuously executed in the two-handed participation type shell split effect in the decorative symbol display device 479, and is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 940. As a result, when the effect selection flag is on at the end of the shell split effect, the treasure egg 482 is broken and the treasure 483 appears on the decorative pattern display device 479, following the two-handed participation type shell split effect. The appearance effect is executed. On the other hand, if the connection operation is not performed during the valid period TL, or the connection operation is performed but the determination time is less than the specified time, and the effect selection flag is off at the end of the shell split effect, the details are as follows. As will be described later, in the decorative pattern display device 479, following the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect, the shell cracking effect in which the treasure egg 482 does not break and the treasure 483 does not appear is executed.

In addition, on condition that the time when both the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are turned on is equal to or longer than the specified judgment time TM, the treasure appearance effect is continued following the two-handed participation type shell split effect. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of division periods (for example, nine periods per second) are provided by dividing the validity period TL, and the left connection operation is performed in at least a part of each determination period. On condition that both the detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are in the ON state, the treasure appearance effect may be performed following the shell split effect. Further, instead of or in addition to the conditions based on the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are provided by the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R described later. On condition that the connection with is detected, the treasure appearance effect may be performed following the two-handed participation type shell split effect.

Further, at the time tf15 in which the time when both the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are on is equal to or longer than the specified determination time TM, in addition to the connection operation instruction information 484D in the decorative symbol display device 479. Then, information prompting the player to continue the connection operation (for example, "a little more!" In FIG. 34 (B)) is displayed. This makes it possible to continue the state in which the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are not connected but are arranged close to each other until the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect is completed. The display time of the information prompting the continuation of the connection operation is not limited to the time when the specified determination time TM or more is reached, and may be the case where the remaining time until the determination time TM is less than a certain time.

At the time ct8 when the connection operation valid flag is in the off state (the end of the valid period TL of the connection operation), the shell splitting effect ends and the treasure appearance effect (time ct8 to time ct10) starts.

When the treasure appearance effect is started, the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L are maintained in the N-pole excitation state, and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R are in the S-pole excitation state. As a result, the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R are attracted to each other, and as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected. By connecting the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R, the entire treasure egg 482 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is covered with the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. ..

The S-pole excitation state of the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). In the decorative design display device 479, the shell of the treasure egg 482 is broken while the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected, and the fragments of the treasure egg 482 are from behind the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. A display that pops out to the left and right is performed.

Further, when the treasure appearance effect is started, the left lever rotation drive motor 831L rotates in the forward direction for moving the left input lever 810L from the left end arrangement side to the center arrangement side. Further, the right lever rotation drive motor is driven by forward rotation in which the right input lever 810R is moved from the right end arrangement side to the center arrangement side. In order to rotate or stop the left lever rotary drive motor 831L and the right lever rotary drive motor 831R in the same direction at the same timing, in the following, as shown in FIG. 34, the motors are not distinguished. Also referred to as lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R.

Specifically, in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are rotated in the forward direction (the direction in which the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are moved to the center arrangement side), or in the forward direction. Time to specify the timing to rotate or stop the rotation in the opposite direction (the direction to move the left input lever 810L to the left end arrangement side and the right input lever 810R to the right end arrangement side). I remember the information. Further, the RAM of the sub-control board 940 stores drive information (for example, 1 for forward rotation, 2 for reverse rotation, 0 for stop) that changes with the passage of time. There is. As a result, the sub-control board 940 can appropriately switch the states of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R to move the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. The forward rotation of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R is, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the time required to move the right input lever 810R from the right end arrangement to the central arrangement (for example, 0.5 seconds). , 0.1 seconds).

In addition to exciting the left lever electromagnets 818L, 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R, 819R to attract each other, by rotating the lever rotation drive motors 831L, 831R in the forward direction, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever The interval at which the 810R can be connected can be increased, and the certainty of the connection can be improved. In addition to exciting the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R so as to attract each other, the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are configured to rotate in the forward direction. , 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R are excited to attract each other, or the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are rotated in the forward direction to make the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. It may be configured to be connected.

When the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected, both the left connection state detection switch 839L and the right connection state detection switch 839R are turned on (time tf16). Assuming that the player moves the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R symmetrically, in FIG. 33, the left connection state detection switch 839L and the right connection state detection switch 839R are not distinguished, and the connection state detection is performed. Shown as a switch. The on state of the left connection state detection switch 839L and the on state of the right connection state detection switch 839R are continued for a period in which the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected.

At time tf17 when the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right connecting electromagnet are demagnetized to a non-excited state, the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R rotate in the opposite direction and start rotating for a predetermined time (for example, for example). Stop after 0.5 seconds). As a result, the left input lever 810L returns from the center arrangement to the left end arrangement, and the right input lever 810R returns from the center arrangement to the right end arrangement (time tf18).

Further, when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are replaced with the connection operation instruction information 484D as a kind of input operation related information on the sub control board 940. The operation end instruction information 487D (for example, "Release the left and right levers!" In FIG. 34 (C)) for instructing the player to end the connection operation with the user is displayed. As a result, the left input lever 810L can be smoothly moved from the center arrangement to the left end arrangement, and the right input lever 810R can be smoothly moved from the center arrangement to the right end arrangement by rotating the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R in the opposite directions.

At the time t3 when the effect is started aiming at V, the rotary drive motor starts rotating in the forward direction. As a result, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 move toward the center so as to be close to each other. When the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 take a continuous privilege area instruction arrangement (see FIG. 13) from the entrance portion 409E of the game area 409 toward the privilege area 409V, the rotary drive motor starts. , Stop the forward rotation. As a result, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 take the privilege area instruction arrangement, and it is possible to inform the player that the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V.

Here, the transition of the two-handed participation type production when the player participates in the two-handed participation type production (two-handed participation type shell split mission production) in the special game state scheduled for shortening the time is shown in FIG. 37 (A) together with FIG. 35. ) And FIG. 37 (B). FIG. 35 is a timing chart showing control of a two-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to shorten the time, and shows control when a player participates in the effect. In addition, in FIG. 35, the control of the latter half of the first round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period (symbol variation period) of the symbol variation display by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state is shown.

Further, FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the transition of the two-handed participation type staging except when the player participates in the two-handed participatory staging in the special gaming state scheduled to change. 37 (A) and 37 (B) show the case where the player participates in the two-handed participation type production in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, and FIG. 37 (A) shows immediately after the start of the production without breaking the shell (FIG. 37 (A)). (Immediately after the time td8) is shown, and FIG. 37 (B) shows that the shell is not cracked and the production is in progress (time tg17). Further, FIGS. 37 (C) and 37 (D) show a case where the player does not participate in the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect in the special gaming state scheduled to be probable, and FIG. 37 (C) shows the effect without breaking the shell. Immediately after the start (immediately after the time td8), FIG. 37 (D) shows the post-V notification effect (time tc11).

At the time td1 to the time td2 when the opening effect (OP effect) is executed, the same display effect as the time ct1 to the time ct2 of the special gaming state scheduled to change is executed by the decorative symbol display device 479. Further, at the time td2 to the time td8 in which the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect is executed, the same display as the time ct2 to the time ct8 of the special gaming state scheduled to change is performed by the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, the player starts the connection operation between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R after the time tg1 when the connection operation valid flag is turned on. Then (time tg4), the left connection operation detection switch 838L and the right connection operation detection switch 838R are turned on.

In the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, it is determined that the time during which both the left connection state detection switch 839L and the right connection state detection switch 839R are on while the connection operation valid flag is on is specified. Even if the time TM is reached (time tg15), the effect selection flag is not turned on but is maintained in the off state as in the case of the special game state in which the probability change is scheduled. Therefore, following the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect, the treasure egg 482 does not break and the treasure 483 (see FIG. 34 (D)) does not appear in the decorative pattern display device 479. ~ Time td10) is executed. In the special game state where the time is scheduled to be shortened, even if the player performs the connection operation, the effect is executed without breaking the shell regardless of the length of the operation time, so that the determination time TM is not measured. good.

The left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R maintain the N-pole excitation state even when the effect is started without cracking the shell (time dt8). Therefore, in the case of the special gaming state where the probability change is scheduled, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected by changing the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R to the S pole excitation state (FIG. 34 (C). ), In the case of a special gaming state scheduled to shorten the time, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are not connected as shown in FIG. 37 (A).

Further, even if the effect without cracking the shell is started (time td8), the forward rotation of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R for assisting the connection between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R is not executed.

When the effect without cracking the shell is started (time td8), the operation ends as shown in FIG. 37 (A) in the decorative symbol display device 479 instead of the connection operation instruction information 484D as a kind of input operation related information. The instruction information 487D is displayed.

Further, when the effect without cracking the shell is started, the information indicating that the connection between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R has ended in the decorative symbol display device 479 (“connection failure” in FIG. 37 (A)). Character information) is displayed. Information indicating that the connection between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R has failed is displayed, but the display of this information is not essential.

At time tg17 after the operation end instruction information 487D is displayed, the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right connecting electromagnet are demagnetized to a non-excited state, and the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R rotate in the opposite direction. The left input lever 810L returns to the left end arrangement, and the right input lever 810R returns to the right end arrangement (time tg18).

Further, at time tg17, in the decorative symbol display device 479, right-handed instruction information 485 is displayed as a kind of input operation-related information in place of the operation end instruction information 487D, as shown in FIG. 37 (B).

At time tf18 after the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are stopped, the unfortunate effect is executed following the effect without cracking the shell.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36, FIGS. 37 (C) and 37 show changes in the transition of the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production when the player does not participate in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production in the special gaming state scheduled to change. This will be described with reference to (D). FIG. 36 is a timing chart showing the control of the two-handed participation type effect in the special game state scheduled to be probable, and the control when the player does not participate in the effect. Note that, in FIG. 36, the control of the latter half of the first round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period of displaying the variation of the symbol by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state (symbol variation period) is shown. In the following, only the differences from the control when participating in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production (when shown in FIG. 34) will be described.

When the connection operation between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R is not performed in the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect in the special game state scheduled for probability change, the period during which the connection operation valid flag is on (the connection operation is valid). The left connection state detection switch 839L and the right connection state detection switch 839R are maintained in the off state for the period TL). Therefore, the effect selection flag is not turned on as in the case where the player participates in the two-handed participation type effect, but is maintained in the off state. Therefore, following the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect, the treasure egg 482 does not break and the treasure 483 (see FIG. 34 (D)) does not appear in the decorative pattern display device 479. Time ct10) is executed. The shell cracking effect executed at this time is the same effect as the shell cracking effect (time td8 to time td10: see FIG. 35) executed in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time. Therefore, in addition to the period in which the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect is executed, even during the period in which the shell splitting effect is executed, the player can display the decorative pattern display device 479 in a special gaming state scheduled to change. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is in a special game state scheduled for a short time.

Further, since the left connection state detection switch 839L and the right connection state detection switch 839R are maintained in the off state, the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R can be used even after the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect is completed (time tc8). , The left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L are maintained in an N-pole excitation state having the same polarity. Therefore, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are not connected.

Further, since the left connection state detection switch 839L and the right connection state detection switch 839R are maintained in the off state, the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R assist the connection between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. No forward rotation is performed for. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the special gaming state scheduled for probability change and the special gaming state scheduled for shortening the time by the operation of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R.

At the start of the production without cracking the shell (time tc8), the left input lever 810L takes the left end arrangement and the right input lever 810R takes the right end arrangement, so the left input lever 810L can be returned to the left end arrangement or the right input lever can be used. The reverse rotation for returning the 810R to the right end arrangement is also not executed. Further, at the start of the effect without cracking the shell, the left input lever 810L is arranged at the left end and the right input lever 810R is arranged at the right end. The operation end instruction information 487D is not displayed. On the other hand, if the left input lever 810L is not arranged at the left end or the right input lever 810R is not arranged at the right end at the start of the effect without cracking the shell, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays the operation end instruction information 487D. Is displayed, the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are rotated in the opposite direction, the left input lever 810L is returned to the left end arrangement, and the right input lever 810R is returned to the right end arrangement.

When the game ball that has entered the privilege area 409V is detected by the specific passage switch 448 (time th19) after the enterable period has started (time t4) without breaking the shell, the probabilistic game state is entered. The post-V notification effect (time th19 to time ct12) for notifying the player that the transition has been confirmed is executed.

In the post-V notification effect, the rotary drive motor (not shown) starts rotating in the forward direction (time th19), and the diagonally moving drive motor (not shown) starts rotating in the forward direction (time th19). , The left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 start moving from the separated posture. When the diagonal movement of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is completed (time th20) and the diagonal movement of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is completed (time th21), the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 37 (D) takes a continuous privilege area instruction arrangement from the entrance portion 409E where the game ball flows down to the game area 409 toward the privilege area 409V.

At time ct11 after the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 are arranged in the privilege area instruction, the rotary drive motor (not shown) starts rotating in the opposite direction, and the diagonal movement drive motor (not shown). ) Starts rotation in the opposite direction. When the diagonal movement of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is completed (time ct12) and the diagonal movement of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is completed (time ct13), the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 Returns to the separated posture.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the round (first round) in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, the left input lever 810L, which is a part of the left input operation device 801L, is in the game area 409 (left). The effect of being located on the front side of the flow area 409L) can be executed, and the effect of the right input lever 810R, which is a part of the right input operation device 801R, can be executed on the front side of the game area 409 (right flow area 409R). This makes it possible to make the effect of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R stand out more than the effect of the game area and the members provided on the rear side (for example, the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20). Become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the arrival of a state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, in the round (first round) in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, the left input lever 810L, which is a part of the left input operation device 801L, is larger than the decorative symbol display device 479. An effect located on the front side can be executed, and an effect in which the right input lever 810R, which is a part of the right input operation device 801R, is located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479 can be executed. This makes it possible to make it stand out more than the effect of the decorative pattern display device 479. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the arrival of a state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, in the round (first round) in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, the left input lever 810L, which is a part of the left input operation device 801L, is larger than the decorative symbol display device 479. The effect of the connection operation can be executed while it is located on the front side, and the effect of the connection operation is executed when the right input lever 810R, which is a part of the right input operation device 801R, is located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479. can. This makes it possible to make it stand out more than the effect of the decorative pattern display device 479. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the arrival of a state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, a launch operation device 250, a right input lever 810R, and a left input lever 810L are provided, and when a two-handed participation type production is executed, the right input lever 810R is operated with the right hand. When the left input lever 810L is operated by the left hand, the display control for displaying the image of the treasure 483 by the decorative symbol display device 479 is executed by the control of the sub control board 940. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with an effect based on the operation of the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L using both hands while the game ball is not launched by releasing the hand from the launch operation device 250. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the production.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, the sub-control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479, and it corresponds to the case where the right input lever 810R is operated with one hand during the one-handed participation type staging execution. A one-handed participation type production image is displayed, and a two-handed participation type production image corresponding to the case where the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are operated with both hands is displayed during the two-hand participation type production. Control to do. For this reason, a special effect using an effect image different from the one-handed participation type effect image is created based on the operation of the input operation means by both hands when the launch of the game ball is stopped by not performing the launch operation. As such, it can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, when the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are operated with both hands when the two-handed participation type production is executed, the image of the treasure 483 is displayed by the decorative pattern display device 479). Is displayed, and when either the right input lever 810R or the left input lever 810L is operated with one hand, the display control in which the image of the treasure 483 is not displayed is executed by the control of the sub control board 940. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with a rare effect based on the operation by both hands in the state where the launch of the game ball is stopped by not performing the launch operation.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, when the two-handed participation type production is executed, the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are operated with both hands to move to the center arrangement side near the front of the decorative symbol display device 479. The image of the treasure 483 is displayed by performing the operation of moving. For this reason, the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are operated while the interest in the decorative symbol display device 479 is increased by the operation with both hands while the launching of the game ball is stopped by not performing the firing operation. It is possible to entertain the player with an effect that combines the display effect of the decorative pattern display device 479 and the display effect of the decorative pattern display device 479.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, a launch operation device 250, a right input lever 810R, a left input lever 810L, and an electromagnet 818R, 819R, 818L, 819L are provided, and a special scheduled change is made as a predetermined operation timing. The excitation of the electromagnets 818R, 819R, 818L, and 819L is controlled with the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L centered while the player is executing the two-handed participation type production in the gaming state, and the right input lever is used. Control is performed so that the 810R and the left input lever 810L are maintained in a connected state in the central arrangement. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect of using the operation feeling that the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are maintained in the centrally arranged position by the electromagnets 818R, 819R, 818L, and 819L.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L do not overlap with each other on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 when viewed from the player side, and the front side of the central portion of the display screen. The right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L can be moved to a position where they overlap with each other. Therefore, the right input lever 810R, the left input lever 810L, and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 can be integrated to realize an effect that is easy for the player to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect in which the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are associated with each other as a display target combined with the display image. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect as if the player can operate the three-dimensional movable member that is overlapped and arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479.

Next, in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production executed in the special game state scheduled for probability change or the special game state scheduled for shortening the time, the mode of tracing the transition of the production different from the case shown in FIGS. 33 to 37 will be described. It will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the following, prior to the explanation of the transition of the two-handed participation type shell split mission production including the new production, the characteristics of the left input operation device 801L and the right input operation device 801R that can be used in the production will be described.

The right input operating device 801R includes a servomotor as a right lever rotation drive motor 831R connected to a right outer support arm 823R that supports the right input lever 810R. This servo motor includes a power supply unit (not shown) such as an AC motor, DC motor, or pulse motor that supplies power, and an encoder that can detect the rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the right outer support arm 823R. It is equipped with a movement detection unit (not shown). Therefore, by controlling the rotation of the power supply unit of the servomotor, the right input lever 810R can be moved to the center arrangement side or the right end arrangement side, or can be moved at a constant speed, or the rotation movement position (right outer side with respect to the case of the right end arrangement). It can be moved while changing the speed based on the rotation angle of the support arm 823R), or can be moved while changing the speed based on the passage of time. Further, the rotational movement position of the right input lever 810R can always be detected by the movement detection unit of the servomotor.

Further, by using the servomotor as the right lever rotation drive motor 831R, even if the right input lever 810R is moved by the operation of the player, the movement detection unit can perform the rotation direction and rotation angle of the right outer support arm 823R. And rotation speed can be detected. Therefore, when the right input lever 810R is moved by the player's operation, a constant reaction force with respect to the player's operation while constantly detecting the rotational movement position of the right input lever 810R by the movement detection unit of the servomotor. Alternatively, it is possible to generate a reaction force that changes based on the rotational movement position of the right input lever 810R and a reaction force that changes based on the passage of time. Therefore, when the player operates the right input lever 810R, the player can be given various operational feelings.

Further, the left input operating device 801L includes a servomotor similar to that of the right lever rotation drive motor 831R as the left lever rotation drive motor 831L connected to the left outer support arm 823L that supports the left input lever 810L. .. Therefore, the left input lever 810L can also be moved in various forms and various operational feelings can be given to the player as described with respect to the right input lever 810R.

The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are configured to be movable in the front-rear direction (direction toward and away from the game board 400). Here, a configuration in which the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R can be moved in the front-rear direction will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the operation of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R in the front-rear direction by the cut surface including X1-X1 of FIG. In FIG. 38 (A), the left input lever 810L moves from the left end arrangement (position XLF) indicated by the alternate long and short dash line to the central arrangement side (position XL7) indicated by the solid line, and the right input lever 810R moves to the right end arrangement (position) indicated by the alternate long and short dash line. The case of moving from the XRF) to the center arrangement side (position XR7) shown by the solid line is shown. Further, FIG. 38B shows a case where the input levers 810L and 810R move in the front-rear direction shown by the solid line at the position where they move to the central arrangement side shown by the alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIG. 38, the right input operating device 801R is also referred to as a front-back moving mechanism (hereinafter, also referred to as a right lever front-back moving mechanism 851R) in which the right input lever 810R is movably connected to the right support base 820R in the front-back direction. ) And a front-rear movement drive motor (hereinafter, also referred to as a right-lever front-back movement drive motor 852R) that generates a driving force for moving the right input lever 810R in the front-rear direction via the right lever front-rear movement mechanism 851R. .. Further, the left input operation device 801L includes a front-back movement mechanism similar to the right lever front-back movement mechanism 851R (hereinafter, also referred to as a left lever front-back movement mechanism 851L) and a front-back movement drive motor similar to the right lever front-back movement drive motor 852R. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a left lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L).

Specifically, the right input operating device 801R includes a drive motor that generates a driving force by rotation of an AC motor, a DC motor, a pulse motor, or the like as a right lever forward / backward moving drive motor 852R, and also has a right lever forward / backward moving mechanism. The 851R includes, for example, a pinion gear connected to the rotating shaft of the drive motor and a rack gear connected to the right input lever 810R. Therefore, the driving force due to the rotation of the driving motor can be converted into a driving force in the linear direction and transmitted to the right input lever 810R. The same applies to the left lever front-back movement mechanism 851L and the right lever front-back movement drive motor 852R.

For example, in the right input operating device 801R, spur gears (spar gears) are used as pinion gears and rack gears, and the direction of the rotation axis of the drive motor is the left-right direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction in which the right input lever 810R moves. The drive motor may be arranged as described above. Further, a helical gear may be used as a pinion gear or a rack gear, and the drive motor may be arranged so that the direction of the rotation axis of the drive motor is in the front-rear direction. The left input lever and the right input lever 810R are provided with a drive motor that generates a drive force by rotation as a drive source for moving the right input lever 810R in the front-rear direction. It may be configured to use a device that generates the above as a power source.

First, in a two-handed participatory shell-splitting mission effect executed in a game state scheduled for probabilistic change, a case where a player participates in the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.

FIG. 39 is a control different from the case shown in FIG. 33 of the two-handed participation type effect (two-handed participatory shell split mission effect) in the special gaming state scheduled to change, and the player participates in the effect. It is a timing chart which shows the control of. In addition, in FIG. 39, the control of the latter half of the first round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period (symbol variation period) of the symbol variation display by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state is shown.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing operation control when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R rotate and move. 40 (A) and 40 (B) show the operation control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R that express the operation feeling when the input levers 810L and 810R move based on the input operation of the player. 40 (C) and 40 (D) are graphs of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R rotate and move without the input operation of the player. It is a graph which shows the operation control.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the transition when the player participates in the production, which is a transition different from the case shown in FIG. 34 of the two-handed participation type production in the special gaming state scheduled to change. be.

In the following, the difference between the control of the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission effect shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 and the control of the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission effect shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 39, the opening effect (OP effect) is started in the decorative symbol display device 479 at the time ct1 when the special game state scheduled to change is started. Further, at time ct1, in the decorative symbol display device 479, as input operation related information, an operation preparation instruction for instructing an operation of grasping each of the input levers 810L and 810R in preparation for operating the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. Information (“operation preparation” in FIG. 39) is displayed.

In the opening effect, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the display in which the treasure egg 482 appears from the lower end of the center of the display unit 479a toward the upper side is started. As the treasure egg 482, one of three types, a normal treasure egg 482N, a hard treasure egg 482H having a harder shell than the normal treasure egg 482N, and a soft treasure egg 482S having a softer shell than the normal treasure egg 482N appears.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 is provided with a random number counter for selecting the type of the treasure egg 482 in the RAM, and stores the type determination information indicating the correspondence between the value of the random number counter and the type of the treasure egg 482 in the ROM. There is. Therefore, by referring to the type determination information, it is possible to determine the type of the treasure egg 482 that appears according to the value of the selected random number counter. Further, the sub-control board 940 stores information indicating the selected treasure egg type (for example, normal treasure egg: 1, hard treasure egg 482H: 0, soft treasure egg 482S: 2) in the RAM as treasure egg identification information. Based on the treasure egg identification information, any one of the three types of normal treasure egg 482N, hard treasure egg 482H and soft treasure egg 482S is made to appear. As for the type determination information, for example, when the random number counter that selects the type of the treasure egg 482 can take 100 values (for example, 0 to 99), 50 values (for example, 0 to 49) are usually treasures. Information that associates 20 values with eggs 482N, 20 values with hard treasure eggs 482H, and 30 values with soft treasure eggs 482S, and the type of treasure egg 482 that appears is a predetermined ratio (for example, normal treasure). Egg: Hard treasure egg 482H: Soft treasure egg 482S = 50: 20: 30).

The treasure egg 482 that appears is displayed in the same display regardless of the type on the decorative symbol display device 479. Therefore, the player cannot determine the type of the treasure egg 482 depending on the display at the time of appearance. The type of the treasure egg 482 will be described in detail later, but the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R can be identified by the player moving the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R to the center arrangement side as if sandwiching the appearing treasure egg 482.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is a type referred to in the special game state scheduled to be shortened in time, separately from the type determination information referred to in the special game state scheduled to be probable change (hereinafter, also referred to as the type determination information at the time of probabilistic change scheduled). Judgment information (hereinafter, also referred to as type determination information at the time of scheduled time reduction) is stored in the ROM. The type determination information at the time of scheduled time reduction is information that all the values that can be taken by the random number counter that selects the type of the treasure egg 482 are associated with the normal treasure egg 482N or the soft treasure egg 482S. Therefore, the hard treasure egg 482H is set not to appear in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time (for example, normal treasure egg: hard treasure egg 482H: soft treasure egg 482S = 65: 0: 35). In addition, in the special game state of the time reduction schedule, the hard treasure egg 482H does not appear due to the setting of the type determination information at the time reduction schedule, but the type determination information at the time reduction schedule is not limited to this configuration. Although some of the values that can be taken by the random number counter that selects the type of egg 482 are associated with the hard treasure egg 482H, the number of associated random number counter values is smaller than that of the type determination information at the time of probable change. The rate at which the hard treasure egg 482H appears in the special game state scheduled to be shortened (for example, normal treasure egg: hard treasure egg 482H: soft treasure egg 482S = 65: 5:30) is the special game state scheduled to change. The configuration may be set so as to be less than the case of.

Following the opening effect, as shown in FIG. 39, when the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect is started (time ct2), the decorative symbol display device 479 replaces the operation preparation instruction information with the input operation related information. The pinching operation instruction information 488 (hereinafter, also referred to as a pinching operation) for instructing an operation (hereinafter, also referred to as a pinching operation) for moving each input lever 810L, 810R to the central arrangement side so as to sandwich the appearing treasure egg 482 with both input levers 810L and 810R (FIG. The "pinching operation" in 39 is displayed. Specifically, the text information "Pinch the shell with the left and right levers!" In FIG. 41 (A) is displayed. The pinching operation instruction information 488 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 39, the pinch operation instruction information 488 is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 2.0 seconds) and ends at time ti3. The pinch operation instruction information 488 is time information for designating a timing for starting display and a timing for ending display. At the same time, it is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

The pinching operation instruction information 488 is configured to be displayed in characters, but is not limited to this configuration, and an image showing an operation in which both input levers 810L and 810R are close to each other and both input levers 810L and 810R are close to each other with both hands. The operation method of each of the input levers 810L and 810R may be displayed as an image by an image showing the operation of the input lever, or the information indicating the pinching operation may be output by voice. Further, the configuration for outputting the pinching operation instruction information is not an essential configuration and may be omitted.

Is it an effective period (the same period as the effective period TL of the connection operation in FIG. 33) that enables the player to move the input levers 810L and 810R at time tf1 during the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect? The move operation valid flag that identifies whether the period is invalid is turned on. The move operation valid flag is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 940. When the move operation valid flag is turned on, a predetermined value (value corresponding to the period TL) stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 is initially set in the effect timer (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. .. The movement operation valid flag is maintained in the ON state until the time ct8 when the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect ends.

During the period in which the movement control solenoid is on and the input levers 810L and 810R can be moved, the rotation movement position of each input lever 810L and 810R is the rotation of each lever, including the period when the movement operation valid flag is on. It is detected by the movement detection unit (encoder) in the servo motor as the drive motors 831L and 831R, and is stored as lever position information. The lever position information is the rotation angle of each outer support arm 823L, 823R detected by the movement detection unit (rotation angle from the left end arrangement of the left outer support arm 823L to the center arrangement side and the rotation angle from the right end arrangement of the right outer support arm 823R to the center. Information for identifying the positions of the input levers 810L and 810R based on the rotation angle to the arrangement side). The value of the lever position information is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 940, and changes according to the operation of the player or the movement of the input levers 810L and 810R by the operation of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R.

In the following, the rotational movement position of the right input lever 810R is specified as a position in the left-right direction with respect to the left end (center side end) of the right input lever 810R for easy understanding. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A) and 39, the position where the right end arrangement is taken is the position XRF, the position where the center arrangement is taken is the position XC, and the positions distant from the position XC at equal intervals are the position XC. Positions XR1 to XR8 are set in order from the side. Similarly, regarding the rotational movement position of the left input lever 810L, the position in the left-right direction with respect to the position of the right end of the left input lever 810L is specified, the position where the left end arrangement is taken is the position XLF, and the position where the center arrangement is taken is the position. Positions separated from XC and position XC at equal intervals are designated as position XL1 to position XL8 in order from the position XC side.

Operation control of each lever rotation drive motor 831L, 831R when each input lever 810L, 810R rotates and moves in response to a player's operation at the time tf1 when the movement operation valid flag is turned on (passive control A in the following). Referred to: "Receive A" in FIG. 39) is started. In the passive control A, a reaction force corresponding to the rotational movement position of each input lever 810L, 810R is generated against the operation force by the player who moves each input lever 810L, 810R to the center side (position XC side). In addition, each lever rotation drive motor 831L, 831R is controlled. As a result, the operational feeling of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R can be changed depending on the rotational movement position.

Here, the operation control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R in the passive control A will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (A). In the following, since the control of both lever rotary drive motors 831L and 831R is the same, only the operation control of the right lever rotary drive motor 831R will be specifically described.

In the passive control A, when the lever position information of the right input lever 810R is a value corresponding to the position XRF, the right lever rotation drive motor 831R has a predetermined maximum so as to cancel the operating force on the right input lever 810R by the player. A reaction force is generated up to the value (maximum reaction force FR0). The maximum reaction force FR0 is set to a value larger than a value that can prevent rotational movement due to the own weight of the right input lever 810R. Therefore, if the player does not perform an operation to rotate and move the right input lever 810R, the right input lever 810R can be maintained at the position XRF. Further, when the lever position information of the right input lever 810R is a value corresponding to the position XRF and the right input lever 810R is operated with an operating force of the maximum reaction force FR0 or more, the right input lever 810R is located on the center side from the position XRF. Start the rotational movement toward.

When the lever position information is between the value corresponding to the position XRF and the value corresponding to the position XR8, the maximum reaction force generated by the right lever rotary drive motor 831R corresponds to the position XR8 away from the value corresponding to the position XRF. It is set to increase as it approaches the value to be used. Therefore, in the operation of rotating the right input lever 810R, the reaction force increases as the distance of the rotational movement increases, and the player can be given an operation feeling as if he / she is being urged by the coil spring. ..

Further, the maximum reaction force generated by the right lever rotation drive motor 831R is set to increase discontinuously from the maximum reaction force FR1 when the lever position information of the right input lever 810R becomes a value corresponding to the position XR8. ing. Therefore, when the right input lever 810R moves to the position XR8 where it seems to touch the right side of the treasure egg 482, the player feels as if the right input lever 810R physically collided with the treasure egg 482. Can be given.

The maximum reaction force when the lever position information of the right input lever 810R becomes the value corresponding to the position XR8 is set to be different depending on the value of the treasure egg identification information (the type of the selected treasure egg 482). Has been done. Specifically, the maximum reaction force when the lever position information of the right input lever 810R is a value corresponding to the position XR8 is shown by a solid line when the treasure egg identification information is a value corresponding to the normal treasure egg 482N. As described above, the maximum reaction force FR2 is set to be larger than the maximum reaction force FR1. Further, the maximum reaction force when the lever position information of the right input lever 810R is a value corresponding to the position XR8 is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line when the treasure egg identification information is a value corresponding to the hard treasure egg 482H. As described above, when the maximum reaction force FR2H is set to be larger than the maximum reaction force FR1 and larger than the maximum reaction force FR2 and the treasure egg identification information is a value corresponding to the soft treasure egg 482S, it is indicated by a two-dot chain line. As described above, the maximum reaction force FR2S is set to be larger than the maximum reaction force FR1 but smaller than the maximum reaction force FR2. Therefore, when the hard treasure egg 482H is selected, the right input lever 810R receives a larger reaction force than when the normal treasure egg 482N is selected, and is rotationally moved from the position XR8 to the position XC side. It becomes difficult. Further, when the soft treasure egg 482S is selected, the right input lever 810R receives a smaller reaction force than when the normal treasure egg 482N is selected, and it is easy to rotate and move from the position XR8 to the position XC side. Become. Therefore, although the player could not determine the type of the treasure egg 482 depending on the display on the decorative symbol display device 479, the reaction force received when the right input lever 810R is further moved from the position XR8 to the position XC side. It can be determined by the ease of movement based on the difference between the two.

Further, the maximum reaction force generated by the right lever rotation drive motor 831R increases to the maximum reaction force FRU as the lever position information of the right input lever 810R moves from the value corresponding to the position XR8 to the value corresponding to the position XC. It is set. Therefore, when the right input lever 810R is further rotated and moved from the position XR8 to the position XC side, it becomes difficult to rotate the right input lever 810R as the right input lever 810R moves from the position XR8 to the position XC side. Therefore, although the details will be described later, in cooperation with the display in which the treasure egg 482 is pressed by the right input lever 810R and deformed with the rotational movement of the right input lever 810R executed in the decorative symbol display device 479. It is possible to give the player a feeling of operation that further deformation becomes difficult as the deformation of the treasure egg 482 progresses.

Further, when the lever position information of the right input lever 810R is between the value corresponding to the position XRF and the value corresponding to the position XR8, the rate of increase of the maximum reaction force (the tilt angle until the maximum reaction force FRU is reached). However, it is set to have a different value depending on the type of the treasure egg 482.

Specifically, when the treasure egg identification information is a value corresponding to the hard treasure egg 482H, the increase rate of the maximum reaction force is larger than when the treasure egg identification information is a value corresponding to the normal treasure egg 482N. Is set to. Therefore, when the hard treasure egg 482H is selected and the right input lever 810R is rotationally moved from the position XR8 to the position XC side, it is on the right side of the case where the normal treasure egg 482N is selected. The rate of increase in the reaction force accompanying the movement of the input lever 810R increases, and it is possible to give an operational feeling that the treasure egg 482 is less likely to be deformed. Further, when the treasure egg identification information is a value corresponding to the soft treasure egg 482S, the increase rate of the maximum reaction force is set to be smaller than when the treasure egg identification information is a value corresponding to the normal treasure egg 482N. Has been done. Therefore, when the soft treasure egg 482S is selected and the right input lever 810R is rotationally moved from the position XR8 to the position XC side, it is to the right of the case where the normal treasure egg 482N is selected. The increase rate of the reaction force accompanying the movement of the input lever 810R is small, and it is possible to give an operation feeling that the treasure egg 482 is easily deformed.

For example, when the player is operating with a constant operating force FM, if the normal treasure egg 482N is selected, the right input lever 810R can be moved to the position XR7, and the hard treasure egg 482H is selected. If this is done, the right input lever 810R can be moved only between the positions XR8 and XR7, and if the soft treasure egg 482S is selected, it can be moved beyond the position XR7 to the position XR6. .. Therefore, even if the player is operated with an operating force larger than the reaction force FR2H and the difference in the reaction force when moving the right input lever 810R from the position XR8 cannot determine the difference depending on the type of the treasure egg 482, the position. The type of the treasure egg 482 can be discriminated by the ease of rotational movement toward the position XC side of the XR8 (the ease of deformation of the treasure egg 482).

Further, in the passive control A, once the player moves the right input lever 810R to the center arrangement side, by releasing the hand from the right input lever 810R, the right input lever 810R is rotationally moved to the right end arrangement side by its own weight. Alternatively, although not shown, the right lever rotation drive motor 831R is controlled so as not to generate a reaction force with respect to the rotational movement to the right end arrangement side by the operation of moving to the right end arrangement side. Further, when the right input lever 810R is rotationally moved to the lowermost position (the position where the right outer support arm 823R faces in the vertical direction), the right lever rotation drive motor 831R is not shown, but has the same magnitude as the maximum reaction force FR0. The driving force is controlled so that the right input lever 810R is rotationally moved to the position XRF in which the right end is arranged.

Further, in the passive control A, when the player rotates and moves the left input lever 810L from the left end arrangement to the center arrangement side, the left lever rotation drive motor 831L is moved from the right end arrangement of the right input lever 810R by the player to the center arrangement side. It is controlled so that a reaction force similar to that in the case of rotational movement to is generated. Therefore, when the player rotates and moves the left input lever 810L, the player can be given the same operation feeling as in the case of the right input lever 810R.

In the following, a case will be described in which the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are symmetrically operated by the player with the operating force FM, and the normal treasure egg 482N is selected as the treasure egg 482.

Returning to the description of FIG. 39, at time tf4 after the movement operation valid flag is turned on, the player's pinching operation (rotational movement to the center arrangement side) between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R starts. Then, each lever position information starts to change according to the operation amount of each input lever 810L, 810R.

Based on each lever position information, the left input lever 810L has moved to the position XL8 where it appears to contact the treasure egg 482, and the right input lever 810R has moved to the position XR8 where it appears to contact the treasure egg 482. At the detected time ti1, the reaction force based on the control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R changes from the maximum reaction force FR1 to the maximum reaction force FR2 (see FIG. 40 (A)). Therefore, the player feels as if the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are in physical contact with the treasure egg 482.

The input levers 810L and 810R continue to rotate and move even after the time ti1, and as the input levers 810L and 810R rotate and move after the time ti1, they are treasures as if they were both input levers 810L and 810R in the decorative symbol display device 479. An display (see FIG. 41 (B)) is executed in which the egg 482 is sandwiched and deformed by the pressure from both input levers 810L and 810R.

At time ti2, each input lever 810L, 810R is up to the position XL7, XR7 where the reaction force based on the control of each lever rotation drive motor 831L, 831R and the operating force FM are balanced, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 41 (A). Rotate and stop.

Here, a case where each input lever 810L and 810R is operated by a player with an operating force different from the operating force FM will be described. When each input lever 810L, 810R is smaller than the operating force FM and is operated by being sandwiched by an operating force corresponding to the reaction force between the maximum reaction force FR1 and the maximum reaction force FR2, each input lever 810L, The 810R moves to the positions XL8 and XR8 where the reaction force and the operating force based on the control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are balanced and stops. In the decorative symbol display device 479, the display as if the treasure egg 482 is sandwiched between the two input levers 810L and 810R without being deformed is executed. Further, each input lever 810L, 810R is smaller than the operating force FM, but when it is pinched and operated with an operating force larger than the maximum reaction force FR2, it rotates and moves beyond the positions XL8 and XR8, but the positions XL7, It does not rotate until XR7. In the decorative symbol display device 479, the display in which the treasure egg 482 is compressed with a smaller amount of deformation than in the case of the operating force FM is executed.

Further, when the input levers 810L and 810R are pinched and operated with an operating force larger than the operating force FM, the input levers 810L and 810R rotate and move to the position XC side from the positions XL7 and XR7 to display the decorative symbol. In 479, the display in which the treasure egg 482 is compressed with a larger amount of deformation than in the case of the operating force FM is executed. Further, when the operating force is larger than the operating force FM but smaller than the maximum reaction force FRU which is the upper limit that can be generated by the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R, the input levers 810L and 810R are located at positions XL6 and XR6. It is not possible to rotate to position XC beyond the position between position XL5 and XR5. Further, when the input levers 810L and 810R are pinched and operated with an operating force larger than the maximum reaction force FRU, the input levers 810L and 810R reach the position XC depending only on the reaction force based on the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R. It cannot be suppressed from rotating and moving. Therefore, even when the input levers 810L and 810R are pinched and operated with an operating force larger than the maximum reaction force FRU, the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R are excited with the same polarity. Therefore, a magnetic force that separates the input levers 810L and 810R is generated, and it is possible to suppress the movement of the input levers 810L and 810R to the position XC.

When the left input lever 810L is rotated to the position XC side from the position XL8, the left half of the treasure egg 482 is deformed, and the right input lever 810R is rotated to the position XC side from the position XR8. The display is such that the right half of the treasure egg 482 is deformed. For example, the left input lever 810L is not pinched and the right input lever 810R is rotated and moved to the position XC side from the position XR8. When this is done, the display of moving to the left side may be executed with the treasure egg 482 in contact with the left end of the right input lever 810R.

Further, based on the passive control A of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R, the reaction force is changed according to the individual positions of the input levers 810L and 810R. The reaction force may be changed depending on the relative position with the input lever 810R. For example, when an operation that is not symmetrical with respect to the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R is performed, the treasure egg 482 is moved to the other input lever side by the input lever that first reaches the position where it can be seen in contact with the treasure egg 482. It is displayed that the treasure egg 482 moves and is sandwiched between both input levers 810L and 810R at a position deviated from the center, and the distance between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R is larger than the length corresponding to the width of the treasure egg 482. The lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R may be controlled so that the reaction force against the input levers 810L and 810R increases as the size decreases. In the case of this configuration, for example, when the pinching operation is performed only on the right input lever 810R to reduce the distance between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R, a reaction force (feel) is applied to the right input lever 810R. ) Changes, and the reaction force (feel) also changes with respect to the left input lever 810L, and the operation feeling of each of the input levers 810L and 810R can be changed by operating one of the input levers. As described above, the operation feeling for one input lever may be changed in addition to or instead of the operation feeling for one input lever to change the operation feeling for the other input lever that has not been operated.

Further, when the input levers 810L and 810R are moved away from the position XC, the reaction force controlled by the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R is not generated, but the configuration is not limited to this and both input levers. After the display that the treasure egg 482 is sandwiched by the 810L and 810R, it is restricted that the left input lever 810L moves to the position XLF side from the position XL8 and the right input lever 810R moves to the position XRF side from the position XR8. The lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R may be controlled so as to generate a reaction force (for example, the maximum reaction force in the reverse rotation direction: −FRU).

Further, when the input levers 810L and 810R are moved away from the position XC, the reaction force controlled by the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R is not generated, but the configuration is not limited to this and the left input lever is not limited to this configuration. After the display that the treasure egg 482 is sandwiched between the 810L and the right input lever 810R, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are attracted to the treasure egg 482, and the left input lever 810L moves to the left end arrangement side from the position XL8. If you try to move the right input lever 810R to the right end arrangement side from the position XR8, the treasure egg 482 will be pulled laterally and extended, and the distance between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R will be increased. The lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R may be controlled so that the reaction force increases as the size increases. In the case of this configuration, when an operation is performed on one input lever, the operation feeling for the operated input lever is changed, and even if the operation is not performed on the other input lever, the other input lever is operated. It is possible to change the operation feeling with respect to, and it is possible to give an operation feeling as if the treasure egg 482 by the image display is adsorbed on both input levers 810L and 810R.

Validity period for accepting the operation of gripping the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R at the time ti3 after a predetermined time (for example, 2.0 seconds) from the time tc2 at which the display of the pinching operation instruction information is started. The grip operation valid flag that identifies whether the operation is TN or the invalid period in which the operation of gripping the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R is not accepted as valid is turned on. When the movement of the left operation member 812L is detected by the left grip operation detection switch based on the operation of gripping the left input lever 810L, or when the right operation member 812R is detected by the right grip operation detection switch based on the operation of gripping the right input lever 810R. When the movement is detected, the sub-control board 940 determines that the detection is valid and accepts it.

When the grip operation valid flag is turned on, the timer provided in the RAM of the sub control board 940 is stored in the ROM of the sub control board 940 separately from the effect timer that measures the validity period TL of the move operation valid flag. A value corresponding to the length of the valid period TN of the operation of gripping the input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R is initially set. The grip operation valid flag is turned off after being kept on for the valid period TN.

Further, at the time ti3 when the grip operation valid flag is turned on, the decorative symbol display device 479 instructs both the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R to be simultaneously gripped instead of the pinching operation instruction information 488. The grip operation instruction information 489 (“double grip operation” in FIG. 39: text information “hold the left and right levers continuously at the same time” in FIGS. 41 (B) and 41 (C)) is displayed. The double-grip operation instruction information 489 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 together with the time information for designating the timing to start the display and the timing to end the display.

The double-grip operation instruction information 489 is configured to be displayed in characters, but is not limited to this configuration, and the left operation member 812L and the right operation member 812R are continuously operating, the left input lever 810L, and the like. The operation method of the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R may be displayed as an image by an image showing a state in which the right input lever 810R is continuously held with both hands, or an audio output may be performed, which may be omitted. You may.

In the valid period TN of the grip operation valid flag, when the operation of gripping the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R is executed, the decorative symbol display device 479 cracks or cracks the treasure egg 482 for a long time. The display is performed (see FIG. 41 (C)). The crack of the treasure egg 482 progresses from the position where it seems to be in contact with the left input lever 810L toward the center side, and also from the position where it seems to be in contact with the right input lever 810R toward the center side. The crack that progresses from the right side reaches the center of the treasure egg 482 (position XC) when it progresses in eight stages, and does not progress beyond the center of the treasure egg 482. In addition, the crack that progresses from the left side also reaches the center of the treasure egg 482 when it progresses in eight stages, and does not progress beyond the center of the treasure egg 482.

In the special game state where the probability change is scheduled, both the crack progressed from the left side and the crack progressed from the right side may reach the center of the treasure egg 482 and be connected, but in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, It does not occur when connected at the center of the treasure egg 482. Therefore, when the cracks are connected at the center of the treasure egg 482, it is determined that the enterable period will occur in the special gaming state scheduled to change at that time.

The left input lever 810L is located on the position XC side of the position XL8, the right input lever 810R is located on the position XC side of the position XR8, and the treasure egg 482 is displayed so as to be sandwiched between the input levers 810L and 810R. Only when the operation of gripping the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R is executed in this state, the display that the treasure egg 482 is cracked or the crack is lengthened is displayed. Therefore, by the operation of gripping the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R, it is possible to perform an effect as if the treasure egg 482 was impacted by the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R and the crack progressed.

In addition, the progress of the crack in the treasure egg 482 based on the operation of grasping the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R once is the information for identifying the five kinds of progress (numbers from 0 to 4: in the following, the progress identification information is also referred to. It is controlled by the pattern specified by the combination of (referred to as), and the amount of crack progress varies depending on the type of treasure egg 482 selected. Specifically, the ROM of the sub-control board 940 stores a plurality of crack progress patterns designated by a combination of numbers from 0 to 4, for example, [0040100102000030] and [00300010000200].

The sub-control board 940 selects a crack progress pattern for the left input lever 810L and a crack progress pattern for the right input lever 810R from a plurality of crack progress patterns, and can operate the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. Each time it is executed, the value of the selected crack progression pattern is selected as the progression identification information in order from the beginning. Further, the RAM of the sub-control board 940 stores crack progress information that identifies the total amount of progress when the crack progress is repeated. The crack progress information includes treasure egg identification information (hard treasure egg 482H: 0, normal treasure egg: 1, soft treasure egg 482S: 2) that identifies the type of treasure egg from the progress identification information selected from the crack progress pattern. The subtracted value (“0” if negative) is stored.

For example, when [003010010200104] is selected as the crack progress pattern and the hard treasure egg 482H is selected as the treasure egg 482, the crack progress information is based on the operation of gripping the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R. It is stored in the order of [0030100102001040 ...]. Here, "..." means that 0 continues thereafter (after the 16th operation). Further, when the normal treasure egg 482N is selected as the treasure egg 482, it is stored in the order of [00200000001000030 ...] as the crack progress information, and when the soft treasure egg 482S is selected as the treasure egg 482, the crack is stored. It is stored in the order of [00100000000000020 ...] as progress information.

When the crack progress information is "0", the decorative symbol display device 479 displays that the crack does not progress. If the crack progress information is "1", the crack progresses in one step, if the crack progress information is "2", the crack progresses in two steps, and if the crack progress information is "3", the crack progresses in three steps. The display to be performed is executed by the decorative symbol display device 479. Further, when the crack progress information is "4", the display that the crack progressing from the left side and the crack progressing from the right side are connected at the center of the treasure egg 482 is executed.

The crack progress information is set to a value obtained by subtracting the treasure egg identification information from the progress identification information constituting the crack progress pattern. Since a value larger than the hard treasure egg 482H is set for the normal treasure egg 482N as the treasure egg identification information, the value stored as the crack progress information is hard when the normal treasure egg 482N is selected. It is smaller than when the treasure egg 482H is selected. Therefore, even if the same crack progress pattern is selected, the crack progress for the normal treasure egg 482N can be slower than that for the hard treasure egg 482H, and the soft treasure egg 482S can be used as the treasure egg identification information. Since a value larger than the normal treasure egg 482N is set, the value stored as the crack progress information is smaller than the case where the normal treasure egg 482N is selected when the hard treasure egg 482H is selected. Become. Therefore, even if the same crack progress pattern is selected, the crack progress with respect to the soft treasure egg 482S can be slower than that of the normal treasure egg 482N.

In the plurality of crack progression patterns stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, the crack is a treasure egg regardless of whether the normal treasure egg 482N is selected or the soft treasure egg 482S is selected. It contains a first-class pattern in which a display that does not reach the center of 482 is made. Further, in the plurality of crack progression patterns, it is displayed that the treasure egg 482N normally reaches the center of the treasure egg 482 but not the soft treasure egg 482S when the treasure egg 482N is selected. Includes a seed pattern. Further, the plurality of crack progression patterns indicate that the crack reaches the center of the treasure egg 482 regardless of whether the normal treasure egg 482N is selected or the soft treasure egg 482S is selected. It contains a third type of pattern to be made.

The sub-control board 940 selects one of the first type, the second type, and the third type as the crack progress pattern for each of the input levers 810L and 810R in the special gaming state scheduled to change. Therefore, regardless of whether the treasure egg 482N is normally selected or the soft treasure egg 482S is selected, the cracks that progress from the left side and the cracks that proceed from the right side are the treasure eggs 482. The decorative symbol display device 479 displays a display that reaches the center and connects (also called a crack penetration display) and a display that at least one of those cracks does not reach the center of the treasure egg 482 and does not connect (also called a non-crack penetration display). Can be done.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 940 selects the first type of pattern as the crack progress pattern for at least one input lever in the special gaming state scheduled to shorten the time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the crack penetration display from being executed. As a result, by executing the display that both the crack progressing from the left side and the crack progressing from the right side reach the center of the treasure egg 482 and are connected, the special game state currently being executed is in the special game state scheduled to change. It is possible to notify the player before displaying the final result (presence or absence of appearance of treasure 483 (see FIG. 34 (D))) of the shell splitting mission effect.

When the sub-control board 940 detects an operation of gripping the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R and the value of the crack progress information is "1" or more (for example, time ti4, time ti5, time). ti6), the left lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L and the right lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852R are controlled, and the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are moved for a predetermined short time (the amount of movement according to the value of the crack progress information). For example, move it back and forth within 0.01 seconds). As a result, when the crack of the treasure egg 482 progresses, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R give the attack force to advance the crack, and the left input lever 810L and the left input lever 810L feel as if they have received the reaction of the attack force. It can be given to the player through the right input lever 810R.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 stores information (hereinafter, also referred to as forward / backward movement drive information) that specifies the timing for driving the left lever front / rear movement drive motor 852L and the right lever front / rear movement drive motor 852R in the ROM. ing. The sub-control board 940 switches the drive of each lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L, 852R with reference to a timer for measuring the valid period TN of the grip operation valid flag. Further, the sub-control board 940 stores in the RAM information that specifies the rotation direction of the left lever front-rear movement drive motor 852L and the right lever front-rear movement drive motor 852R.

The lever front-rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R are driven in different directions based on information (not shown) that specifies the rotation direction. Specifically, the lever front-rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R are driven in the forward direction when the information for designating the rotation direction is "0", and when the information for designating the rotation direction is "1". Is driven in the opposite direction. When the lever forward / backward movement drive motors 852L and 852R are driven in the forward direction, the input levers 810L and 810R move forward, and when they are driven in the opposite direction, the input levers 810L and 810R move. Move to the rear side.

Further, the sub-control board 940 refers to the crack progress information in driving the lever front-rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R, and the lever front-rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R have different rotation speeds based on the values of the crack progress information. Driven. When the crack progress information "0", the lever front-rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R are stopped if they are being driven, and are maintained in a stopped state if they are not being driven. Further, the lever front-rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R are at low speed when the crack progress information is "1" and at medium speed when the crack progress information is "2", and the crack progress information is "3". In some cases, it is driven at high speed.

For example, at time ti4, when the value of the crack progress information for the left input lever 810L is "2", as shown in FIG. 39, the left lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L has a predetermined time (for example, 0.05 seconds). ) Forward rotation at medium speed, and then reverse rotation at medium speed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.05 seconds). As a result, the left input lever 810L moves from the reference position ZD to the position ZM, turns back at the position ZM, and returns to the reference position ZD, as shown in FIG. 38 (B). Further, when the value of the crack progress information for the right input lever 810R is "3" at the time ti4, as shown in FIG. 39, the right lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852R has a predetermined time (for example, 0.05 seconds). It rotates forward at high speed for a predetermined time, and then reverses at high speed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.05 seconds). As a result, the right input lever 810R moves from the reference position ZD to the position ZS, turns back at the position ZS, and returns to the reference position ZD, as shown in FIG. 38 (B). Further, in FIG. 39, when the value of the crack progress information for the left input lever 810L is "1" and the value of the crack progress information for the right input lever 810R is "2" at the time ti5, the time is shown. When the value of the crack progress information for the left input lever 810L is "1" and the value of the crack progress information for the right input lever 810R is "2" in ti6, the left lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L or the right The operation of the lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852R is shown.

When the value of the crack progress information is "1" or more and the crack of the treasure egg 482 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 progresses, the left lever front-back movement drive motor 852L and the right lever front-back movement drive motor 852R are short. Move back and forth only once in time (0.1 seconds). Therefore, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R can give the player the feeling of receiving the reaction (impact) of the impact force that advances the crack of the treasure egg 482.

Further, as the value of the crack progress information increases, the left lever front-rear movement drive motor 852L and the right lever front-rear movement drive motor 852R are driven at high speed within the same short time. Therefore, when it is displayed that the crack of the treasure egg 482 progresses greatly, the movement distance of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R in the front-rear direction is large, giving the player the feeling of receiving a large impact. be able to.

When the crack progresses based on the crack progress information according to the gripping operation of the player, the crack state information indicating the progress state of the crack is updated. The crack state information is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 940, and is updated to a value obtained by adding the value of the crack progress information each time the crack progresses.

Passive control B (in FIG. 39) that causes an operation feeling different from that of the passive control A according to the rotational movement position of each input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R at the time ti7 when the grip operation valid flag is changed from the on state to the off state. "Receive B") is started. The passive control B is continued until the time ct8 when the movement operation valid flag is turned from the on state to the off state. Specifically, the lever rotation drive motors 831, 831R execute the control shown in FIG. 40 (B) with respect to the pinching operation by the player who moves the input levers 810L and 810R to the central arrangement side. In the passive control B, different reaction forces (for example, twice as shown in FIG. 40 (A)) are generated depending on the type of the treasure egg 482 and the rotational movement position of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. Be controlled.

In the passive control B, the maximum reaction force according to the rotational movement position of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R also changes depending on the stage of crack progress (value of crack state information) of the treasure egg 482. Specifically, when the normal treasure egg 482N is selected and the progress of the crack is the first stage or more and the fourth stage or less, the crack has not occurred (FIG. 40 (A). )), As shown by the dotted line in FIG. 40 (B), the maximum reaction force is set to be smaller. Therefore, when operated by the operating force FM, the left input lever 810L moves to the position XL6, and the right input lever 810R moves to the position XR6. Further, when the progress of the crack of the treasure egg 482N is usually in the 5th stage or the 6th stage, the maximum reaction force is set to be smaller as shown by the solid line than in the case shown by the dotted line. Therefore, when operated by the operating force FM, the left input lever 810L moves to the position XL6, and the right input lever 810R moves to the position XR6. Further, when the progress of the crack of the treasure egg 482N is usually in the 7th stage or the 6th stage system, the maximum reaction force is set to be smaller as shown by the broken line than in the case shown by the solid line. Therefore, when the operation force FM is operated, the left input lever 810L moves to the position XL4, and the right input lever 810R moves to the position XR4. In this way, by setting the maximum reaction force smaller as the crack of the treasure egg 482 progresses, it is as if the crack occurred and the treasure egg 482 became more easily deformed due to the progress of the crack. The feel can be given to the player.

Further, at the time ti7 when the grip operation valid flag is turned from the on state to the off state, the decorative symbol display device 479 performs an operation of connecting the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R instead of the both grip operation instruction information 489. The connecting operation instruction information 484D to be instructed (“connection operation” in FIG. 39: text information “connecting the left and right levers to crack the shell” in FIG. 41 (D)) is displayed.

At time ti8 after the connection operation instruction information 484D is displayed, the input levers 810L and 810R that have moved to the maximum position (position XL5) when operated by the operation force FM are larger than the operation force FC and have the maximum reaction. When the left input lever 810L moves to the position XL1 and the right input lever 810R moves to the position XR1 at time ti9 when the operation force FC smaller than the force FRU moves to the position XC side.

At time ct8 when the move operation enable flag changes from the on state to the off state, instead of the control from time ti7 to time ct (control shown in FIG. 40 (B)), each lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L, 852R inputs each input. It is controlled so as to generate a driving force for moving the levers 810L and 810R to the position XC (“ability A” in FIG. 39: also referred to as active control A in the following). Active control A is continued until time tf17. Specifically, in the active control A, each lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L, 852R directs each input lever 810L, 810R toward the position XC side, and the maximum driving force in the forward direction (the same magnitude as the maximum reaction force FRU). It is driven to rotate by the force of).

Further, at time ct8, the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R are switched from N pole electromagnetism to S pole excitation, and a magnetic force that attracts the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R is generated.

The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected at time tf16 by the rotational movement by each lever forward / backward movement drive motor and the magnetic force that attracts the left lever electromagnets 818L, 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R, 819R.

When it is detected that both input levers 810L and 810R are located at the position XC based on the lever position information (time tf16), the decorative symbol display device 479 replaces the connection operation instruction information 484D with the operation end instruction information 487D. ("End of operation" in FIG. 39: see FIG. 34 (C)) is displayed.

At time ti10 after the operation end instruction information 487D is displayed, the lever forward / backward movement drive motors 852L and 852R rotate in the forward direction at high speed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.05 seconds), and then for a predetermined time (for example, 0.05 seconds). For example, the operation of rotating in the opposite direction at high speed is repeated for 0.05 seconds (3 times in FIG. 39). As a result, the input levers 810L and 810R are repeatedly moved back and forth between the position ZD and the position ZS while maintaining the connected state, and the feeling that both input levers 810L and 810R move back and forth can be transmitted to the player. ..

Further, at the time tf17 after a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second) after the movement operation valid flag is turned from the on state to the off state, the left input lever 810L of each lever rotation drive motor 831L and 831R sets the position XLF. The right input lever 810R is controlled to generate a driving force to move it to the position XRF (“Noh B” in FIG. 39: also referred to hereinafter as active control B). Active control B is continued until time tf18. Specifically, in the active control B, the lever front-rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R have the maximum driving force in the opposite direction in which the left input lever 810L is directed to the position XLF side and the right input lever 810R is directed to the position XRF side. It is rotationally driven by (the same force as -FRU). As a result, the left input lever 810L can be returned to the position XLF (left end arrangement), and the right input lever 810 can be returned to the position XLF (right end arrangement).

Here, during the execution period of the active control A and the active control B, it is preferable to configure the player so that the execution of the active control and the type of the active control are suggested to the player, for example, both input levers. The heat source provided inside the 810L and 810R generates heat, which suggests the player to execute active control, and the change in the position of the heat source suggests the type of active control. You may. Specifically, inside both input levers 810L and 810R, apart from the left operation member 812L and the right operation member 812R, a protruding state and a retracted state (pushed state) are controlled by the sub-control board 940. It is configured to have an operating part that can be moved by the driving force of a solenoid, a motor, etc. so that it can be moved in a direction different from the protruding direction. Built-in heater as a heat source to heat (operation surface). Then, during the period of active control A, the moving portion becomes hot with the moving portion protruding so as to be in contact with the player's hand, and during the period of active control B, the operating surfaces of the left operating member 812L and the right operating member 812R. Controls the player's hand so that it gets hot in contact with the player's hand at another position. Thereby, the player can suggest that the active control is executed and whether the active control A is executed or the active control B is executed by the state of the moving portion. As a method of executing active control and suggesting the type, it is not always necessary to change the arrangement position of the hot portion, and instead of or in addition to this, the configuration is such that the protrusion amount of the moving portion is different. Then, during the period of active control A, the movement with the retracted state is repeated until the moving part is in a slightly protruding state, and during the period of active control B, in a state of being larger than in the case of active control A. Control may be performed so that the operation surface repeats movement. As a result, the player can use the output motion of the moving portion to, specifically, transmit the feeling of hitting at different positions and the feeling of heat at different positions to the player's hand. Can be used to suggest the situation of the game to the player.

Next, the transition of the two-handed participation type production when the player participates in the two-handed participation type production (two-handed participation type shell split mission production) in the special game state scheduled for shortening the time will be described with reference to FIG. 42. .. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing control of a two-handed participation type effect in a special game state scheduled to shorten the time, and shows control when a player participates in the effect. In addition, in FIG. 42, the control of the latter half of the first round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period (symbol variation period) of the symbol variation display by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state is shown.

At the time td1 to the time td2 when the opening effect (OP effect) is executed, the same display effect as the time ct1 to the time ct2 of the special gaming state scheduled to change is executed by the decorative symbol display device 479. In the opening production, the display that the treasure egg 482 appears is started, but the type of the treasure egg 482 is determined based on the type determination information at the time reduction schedule, and it is softer than the case based on the type determination information at the probable change schedule. The appearance rate of 482S is high, and the hard treasure egg 482H does not appear.

At the time td2 to the time td8 in which the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect is executed following the opening effect, the same display effect as the time ct2 to the time ct8 in the special gaming state scheduled to change is performed by the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect (time td2 to time tg8) in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, the left lever rotation drive motor 831L and the right lever rotation drive motor 831R are set at the time tg1 when the movement operation valid flag is turned on. , At time tf1 to time ti7, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810L and the right input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are operated by the player to move the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R to the center arrangement side, as shown in FIG. 41 (A). It is controlled so as to generate a different reaction force according to the rotational movement position of the lever 810R (“receiver A” in FIG. 39). Thereby, the operation feeling of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R can be changed depending on the rotational movement position of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R.

In the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, after the time tg1 when the movement operation valid flag is turned on, the player pinches the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R (center arrangement). When (movement to the side) is started (time tj1), the lever position information starts to change according to the operation amount of each of the input levers 810L and 810R.

In the special game state scheduled to shorten the time, it is determined that the time during which both the left connection state detection switch 839L and the right connection state detection switch 839R are on while the movement operation valid flag is on is specified. Even if the time TM is reached (time tg15), the effect selection flag is not turned on but is maintained in the off state as in the case of the special game state in which the probability change is scheduled. For this reason, following the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect, the decorative pattern display device 479 executes a shell splitting effect (time td8 to time td10) that displays that the treasure egg 482 does not break and the treasure 483 does not appear. .. In the special game state where the time is scheduled to be shortened, even if the player performs the connection operation, the effect is executed without breaking the shell regardless of the length of the operation time, so that the determination time TM is not measured. good.

Even if the shell cracking effect that is executed after the two-handed participatory shell splitting effect is started (time td8), the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are different from the case of the shell cracking effect in the special gaming state scheduled for probability change. The forward rotation of each lever rotation drive motor 831L, 831R that moves and to the position XC (center arrangement) is not executed. Further, even if the effect is started without cracking the shell (time td8), the left lever electromagnets 818L and 819L and the right lever electromagnets 818R and 819R maintain the N-pole excitation state. Therefore, unlike the case of the special gaming state scheduled to change, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are not connected.

In the production without cracking the shell, the left lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L and the right lever front / rear movement drive motor 852R, which are executed when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected, are driven in the special gaming state scheduled to change. It is not executed, and the forward / backward movement of each input lever 810L and 810R does not occur.

At the time tj11 after a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second) after the movement operation valid flag is turned from the on state to the off state, the left lever rotation drive motor 831L and the right lever rotation drive motor 831R have the left input lever 810L. The position XLF (leftmost arrangement) is taken and the right input lever 810R is controlled to generate a driving force to move the right input lever 810R so as to take the position XRF (rightmost arrangement) (“Noh C” in FIG. 39). This control continues until time tg18. Specifically, the left lever front-rear movement drive motor 852L and the right lever front-rear movement drive motor 852R drive the left input lever 810L toward the left end arrangement side and the right input lever 810R toward the right end arrangement side. It is driven by a force (a force smaller than -FRU). As a result, the left input lever 810L can be returned to the position XLF (left end arrangement) and the right input lever 810 can be returned to the position XLF (right end arrangement) at a lower speed than in the special gaming state scheduled to change.

Here, the transition of the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production when the player does not participate in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production in the special gaming state scheduled to be probable will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the control of the two-handed participation type effect in the special game state scheduled to change, and the control when the player does not participate in the effect. In addition, in FIG. 43, the control of the latter half of the first round is omitted, and a part of the control of the period (symbol variation period) of the symbol variation display by the decorative symbol immediately before the start of the special gaming state is shown. Further, for comparison, the control when participating in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production (when shown in FIG. 39) is shown by a broken line. In the following, only the differences from the control when participating in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production (when shown in FIG. 39) will be described.

If the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are not pinched in the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect in the special game state scheduled for probability change, the decorative symbol display device 479 follows the two-handed participation type shell splitting effect. In, the shell cracking effect (time ct8 to time ct10) that displays that the treasure egg 482 does not break and the treasure 483 does not appear is executed. The shell cracking effect executed at this time is the same as the shell cracking effect (time tg8 to time td10: see FIG. 42) executed in the special game state scheduled to shorten the time.

Further, at the time tk7 after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the time tf1 in which the movement operation valid flag is turned on, the left input lever is based on the lever position information that identifies the position of each input lever. Whether or not there is movement between the 810L and the right input lever 810R is determined. When it is determined that there is no movement between the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R, in the left lever rotation drive motor 831L and the right lever rotation drive motor 831R, the left input lever 810L takes the position XLF (left end arrangement) and is right. The input lever 810R is controlled to generate a driving force to move it so as to take the position XRF (arranged at the right end) (“Noh B” in FIG. 39). This control continues until time tk11. This control is not always necessary and may be omitted because it is a control for surely returning the left input lever 810L to the position XLF (left end arrangement) and the right input lever 810R to the position XRF (right end arrangement). ..

Further, the input lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are not rotated in the forward direction for connecting the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R, and the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are not connected. Therefore, when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected, the left lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L and the right lever front / rear movement drive motor 852R are not driven, and the input levers 810L and 810R move back and forth. Does not occur.

The pachinko machine 100 includes a left input lever 810L and a right input lever 810R. The left input lever 810L can execute a grip operation for pressing the left operation member 812L, and can control the left lever rotation drive motor 831L or rotate and move by a manual operation by the player. Further, the right input lever can execute a grip operation for pressing the right operation member 812R, and can control the right lever rotation drive motor 831R or rotate and move by a manual operation by the player. When the left input lever 810L is located between the position XL8 and the position XC moved from the left end arrangement in the two-handed participation type shell split mission production that occurs in the special game state scheduled for probability change or the special game state scheduled for shortening the time. When the right input lever 810R is located between the position XR8 and the position XC moved from the right end arrangement, the left input lever 810L is the left lever according to the grip operation at the time ti4, the time ti5, and the time ti6. The front-rear movement drive motor 852L reciprocates in the front-rear direction, and the right input lever 810R reciprocates in the front-rear direction by the right lever front-rear movement drive motor 852R. Therefore, it is possible to output the feeling that the hand operating the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R is moved (hereinafter, also referred to as a movement feeling) by the whole of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R. Further, by controlling the left operation member 812L and the right operation member 812R, the feel of impact at different positions (hereinafter, also referred to as impact feel) with respect to the hand operating the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R. , It is possible to output the feeling of heat at different positions (hereinafter, also referred to as temperature feeling).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100, the movement feeling, the impact feeling, or the temperature feeling at different positions is transmitted by the operation control of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R having the output function in addition to the input function. Output operations can be performed. Thereby, the impression of the output given to the player can be changed through the change of the output position.

Further, by moving the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R, the player is made to pay attention to the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R, and the output operation for transmitting the movement feeling and the like is performed in the vicinity of the focused place. It will be possible to execute it, and it will be possible to enhance the effect of the output function for the feel at different positions.

Further, in order to make the feel of the hand performing the operation of gripping the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R different, the player can perceive a slight difference in feel. Therefore, it is possible to use a small motor with low output as the lever front-rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R, or to use a small mechanism that can move the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R by a short distance in the front-rear direction. Even if an output function is added to the input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R, it becomes easy to secure the mobility of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R.

The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are configured to enable output operations that transmit a moving feeling, a hitting feeling, or a temperature feeling at different positions, but it is necessary to provide all of these configurations. However, it may be configured to include a part of the configurations, and is not limited to these configurations, and may include other configurations. For example, each input lever 810L, 810R is provided so as to be movable in the left-right direction or the up-down direction instead of or in addition to the front-back direction, and can move in one direction different from the front-back direction, or in an oblique direction combining a plurality of directions. It may be configured to give a feeling of movement by moving in a straight line or by changing the moving direction with time to move along a predetermined plane or three-dimensionally. In the case of this configuration, for example, in the case of movement based on the operation of gripping each input lever 810L, 810R, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are moved in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other, and the left input lever 810L is used. In the movement when the right input lever 810R is connected, the effect of moving each input lever 810L, 810R can be enhanced by changing the movement form according to the progress of the production, such as moving in the front-back direction. ..

Further, the entire input levers 810L and 810R move to give a feeling of movement to the hand operating the input levers 810L and 810R, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration and one of the input levers 810L and 810R. The portion may be moved, for example, the right grip wall 811R may be provided so as to be movable with respect to the right covering wall 813R, and the right grip wall 811R may be moved to give a feeling of movement. In this case, as compared with the case of moving the entire input levers 810L and 810R, it is possible to simplify the mechanism and use a small power source having a small driving force as a driving source for moving the movement operation. Therefore, even if an output function for transmitting a feeling of movement or the like is added in addition to the function of rotating each input lever 810L, 810R or performing an input operation by grasping each input lever 810L, 810R, each input lever 810L, The operability of the 810R can be further secured.

Further, when the output is performed by moving a part of each input lever 810L, 810R, the moving part is positioned relative to the other part as the other part of each input lever 810L, 810R moves. May be configured to move without changing, or may be configured to move while changing the relative position with the other portion in conjunction with the movement of the other portion.

Further, both the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are configured to output the movement feeling and the like, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration and one of the input levers is configured to transmit the movement feeling and the like. May be.

Further, each of the input levers 810L and 810R is provided with a heat generating device on the surface or inside of the right grip wall 811R, for example, in place of or in addition to the above configuration as an output function for transmitting a feeling of temperature. The right grip wall 811R may include an output due to a temperature change.

Further, each of the input levers 810L and 810R is configured to output a tactilely sensed output by moving a portion that the player directly touches, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a heat generating device is provided on the right covering wall 813R. Tactile sensation from places that the player does not directly touch, such as a configuration that is provided and outputs by heat radiation from the heat generating device, and a configuration in which a blower is provided on the right covering wall 813R and outputs by blowing air from the blower. (For example, the player may be configured to output the output that can be felt by the tactile sensation of the arm or face).

Further, the input levers 810L and 810R are configured to execute an output operation that can be felt by the sense of touch in addition to the input function, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Each input lever 810L, 810R is equipped with an fragrance device that emits fragrance by overheating or evaporation, and the output can be perceived by the sense of smell. May be.

Further, the input levers 810L and 810R are configured to rotate and move to a position where the movement feeling can be output by the operation of the player, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the left end arrangement or the right end arrangement to the output possible position or The movement to the front thereof may be executed by the driving force from the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R. In the case of this configuration, the movement of the input levers 810L and 810R to the positions where the movement feeling can be output makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the input levers 810L and 810R.

Further, the output by the input levers 810L and 810R is when the input levers 810L and 810R take the moving position (position XL8 to position XC, position XR8 to position XC) moved from the reference position (left end arrangement or right end arrangement). The configuration is such that only the operation is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the operation preparation information is displayed by the configuration that is executed even when the input levers 810L and 810R are arranged at the left end or the right end, for example, the decorative symbol display device 479. It may be configured to be executed before or after the start of the period (tc1 to tc2, td1 to td2). In the case of this configuration, it is possible to notify the player by moving the input levers 810L and 810R that the operation (pinching operation) for the input levers 810L and 810R is possible.

In addition, the output by each input lever 810L, 810R takes the left end arrangement or the right end arrangement in the special game state or the normal game state, in an effect different from the two-handed participation type shell split mission effect. It may be a configuration to be executed in some cases. In this case, even if the same output is obtained when the input levers 810L and 810R take the reference position and when the moving position is taken, when the moving position is taken, the input levers 810L and 810R set the reference position. By moving closer to the face than when taking it, it becomes possible to make the player feel as a large output. For example, in the case of output by blowing air, each input lever 810L and 810R moves so that the player's skin moves closer to the exposed face, making it feel like a strong wind, and in the case of sound output, it is heard by the player. Since it moves closer to it, it makes it feel loud, and in the case of a fragrance effect, it moves closer to the player's nose, making it feel stronger. Therefore, the output by each of the input levers 810L and 810R in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production can be made a special output as compared with other cases.

Further, although the configuration in which the output function is added to the movable input levers 810L and 810R in addition to the input function has been described, the configuration may be such that the output function is added to the movable member or device without the input function.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the left input lever 810L can rotate and move from the left end arrangement to the center arrangement, and the right input lever 810R can rotate and move from the right end arrangement to the center arrangement. be. The input levers 810L and 810R rotate and move along the same plane including the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R can be changed from a separated form (at least one is not centrally arranged) to a connected form (both are centrally arranged). This is a part of the case where the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected (time ti10 to time tf17) in the case where the two-handed participation type shell split mission effect occurs, and the left input lever 810L. And, unlike the rotational movement operation when the entire right input lever 810R changes from a separated form to a connected form, the right input lever 810R reciprocates a plurality of times in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100, when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R as a whole function as movable parts and take a connected form, the operation of the change process from the separated form to the connected form is performed. Moves in different ways. Therefore, the operation feeling for each input lever 810L, 810R can be changed depending on whether the left input lever 810L or the right input lever 810R moves in the front-rear direction or not, or the effect can be produced by moving the input levers 810L, 810R. It will be possible to execute. Further, by moving the entire input levers 810L and 810R at high speed, the shapes of the input levers 810L and 810R do not change, but the shape of the input levers 810L and 810R seems to have changed due to the afterimage phenomenon. It is also possible to show it to the player.

The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R realize a morphological change between the separated form and the connected form by rotational movement in a predetermined plane, and are perpendicular to the plane when the separated form is formed. The configuration is such that it moves linearly (moves back and forth) in various directions, but it is not limited to this configuration, and it may be configured to move linearly or curvedly so as to move away from the plane.

Further, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R realize a morphological change between the separated form and the connected form by rotational movement in a predetermined plane, and separate from the plane when the separated form is taken. However, the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and for example, in the case of a connected form, the rotation moves in a plane such as moving linearly or curvedly so as to approach or move away from the moving center of the rotational movement. It may be configured to move on a route different from the route followed by movement.

Further, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R have the same operation in the front-rear direction when they are separated from each other (when the left input lever 810L moves to the front side by a predetermined amount of movement, the right input lever 810R Is also configured to move to the front side with the same amount of movement), but is not limited to this configuration, and at least a part of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are in contact with each other or can be regarded as being in contact with each other. The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R operate differently in the front-rear direction (for example, in the front-rear direction of each input lever 810R) while maintaining a state in which they are close to each other or separated from each other but can be seen in contact with each other in the front view. It may be configured to move or move with a different amount of movement).

Further, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are moved when they are connected to each other, and the relative positions of both input levers 810L and 810R do not change, but the configuration is not limited to this. , The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R may be configured to move so as to change their relative positions while maintaining a state in which at least a part of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are in contact with each other or are considered to be in contact with each other. For example, the left input lever 810L is provided so as to be movable to a position further away from the leftmost arrangement than the central arrangement, and the right input lever 810R is provided to be movable to a position further away from the rightmost arrangement than the central arrangement, and the left input lever 810L and the right are provided. Both input levers 810L and 810R may be moved to the left and right as a whole while shifting the vertical position from the input lever 810R. Further, when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are moved in a connected form, for example, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are provided so as to be tiltable in the vertical direction and are provided in the vertical direction. The left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are rotatably provided in the vertical direction and rotate around the vertical direction from the left end of the left input lever 810L. Both input levers 810L and 810R move so that the width to the right end of the right input lever 810R becomes smaller, and the combination of rotational movement and forward / backward movement makes a circular movement, and both input levers 810L and 810R. It may be configured to slide and move so that is overlapped back and forth.

Further, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are connected to each other by the control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R. It is a configuration to move by manual pinching operation, but not limited to this configuration, it moves from all positions where each input lever 810L, 810R can move to a connected state under the control of each lever rotation drive motor 831L, 831R. It may be configured to be used.

Further, the input levers 810L and 810R are configured to be connected by rotating and moving based on the control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R at the end of the period during which the pinching operation by the player is effective. , Not limited to this configuration, for example, gripping each input lever 810L, 810R on condition that another operation such as gripping each input lever 810L, 810R is performed after the end of the period during which the player can perform the pinching operation. On condition that a continuous operation (long press operation) is performed, the input levers 810L and 810R may rotate and move based on the control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R to form a connected form.

Further, the input levers 810L and 810R are connected by rotational movement based on the control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R, and then move in the front-rear direction based on the control of the lever front-back movement drive motors 852L and 852R. However, while changing to a connected form by rotational movement based on the control of each lever rotary drive motor 831L, 831R, the forward / backward movement based on the control of each lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L, 852R is connected. It may be configured to be executed from the front.

Further, when the input levers 810L and 810R are connected to each other, the levers are configured to move back and forth under the control of the front and rear movement drive motors 852L and 852R to output a feeling of movement, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, each input lever 810L, such as providing a servo motor as each lever forward / backward movement drive motor 852L, 852R, or providing a switch for detecting that each input lever 810L, 810R is located at the front end or the rear end, etc. A device capable of detecting the forward / backward movement of the 810R is provided, and the player performs an operation of moving the input levers 810L and 810R back and forth to rotate the input levers 810L and 810R and to rotate the operation members 812L and 812R. It may be configured so that an input different from the input to be pressed can be performed. In the case of this configuration, the operation of the player moving the input levers 810L and 810R back and forth can be permitted or prohibited in terms of time by control, or when, for example, a connected form is adopted. It may be configured to be possible based on other operations by the player, such as pressing each operation member 812L, 812R. Further, the rotation of each input lever 810L, 810R to a predetermined range position (for example, position XL8 to position XC, position XR8 to position XC) is not limited to the configuration in which input is possible only when the connected form is taken. It may be configured so that input can be performed even before the connected form is formed by moving.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, in the two-handed participation type shell splitting mission production, both input levers 810L and 810R are separated from each other, and the left input lever 810L is in position XC to position XL8 and the right input lever 810R is in position XC to. When it is arranged at the position XR8 (time ti3 to time ti7), the gripping operation is effective for each input lever 810L and 810R, and when both input levers are arranged at other positions, the gripping operation is performed. It becomes invalid.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100, depending on the position of each input lever 810L, 810R, the operation of gripping each input lever 810L, 810R can be prevented or invalidated, or blocked or invalidated. As a result, each input lever 810L, 810R can be specialized for input, or input can be performed with a different operation feeling and operation direction from the case where each input lever 810L, 810R is specialized for input by changing the position. Alternatively, the functions of the input levers 810L and 810R can be switched for multiple purposes by changing the positions of the input levers 810L and 810R to make the input levers 810L and 810R specialized for staging.

It should be noted that the input levers 810L and 810R are configured such that the gripping operation is effective when both input levers 810L and 810R are arranged at some positions in a separated form, but the configuration is not limited to this. When both input levers 810L and 810R are arranged at all positions that take a separated form (position XC to position XLF for the left input lever 810L, position XC to position XRF for the right input lever 810R), the grip operation is effective. It may be configured as follows. In the case of this configuration, it becomes possible to execute the gripping operation at a position where each player can easily operate the input levers 810L and 810R.

Further, the input levers 810L and 810R are configured so that the gripping operation is effective when they are arranged at the positions of one continuous range taking a separated form, but the gripping operation is not limited to this configuration and the levers are separated into a plurality of parts. The gripping operation may be effective when the left input lever 810L is arranged in a continuous range (for example, the range of the position XL1 to the position XL5 and the range of the position XL6 to the position XL8 for the left input lever 810L).

Further, each of the input levers 810L and 810R has a configuration in which the grip operation is effective when they are located in a continuous range having a separated form, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the left input lever 810L is not limited to this configuration. The grip operation may be effective when the lever is arranged at the position XL8 and the right input lever 810R at the position XR8).

Further, the input levers 810L and 810R are configured so that the gripping operation is effective when they take a separated form, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and instead of or in addition to the case where they take a separated form, they are connected. It may be configured so that the grip operation is effective when the lever is taken.

Further, each input lever 810L, 810R can always be gripped (pressing each operating member 812L, 812R), but is configured to switch between valid and invalid by controlling the gripping operation valid flag, but is limited to this configuration. Instead, wall members capable of taking positions that allow and prevent pressing of the operating members 812L and 812R are separately provided on the input levers 810L and 810R, and the operating members 812L and 812R and the wall member are provided with each other. It may be configured to be physically switched by changing the relative position.

Here, a case where continuous operation by the player is a condition for operating each of the input levers 810L and 810R will be described. As described above, when both input levers 810L and 810R change from a separated form to a connected form, a continuous operation (long press operation) by the player may be a condition for the form change.

For example, during the period of passive control A and active control B, when the left operation member 812L and the right operation member 812R of both input levers 810L and 810R are continuously gripped, the control is switched to the active control. It may be provided on the sub-control board 940. As the active control, the input levers 810L and 810R may rotate and move based on the control of the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R, and the input levers 810L and 810R may approach a connected form.

Specifically, during the period of the passive control A and the active control B, the sub-control board 940 controls to change the two input levers 810L and 810R from the separated form to the connected form, and the left operating member 812L. It is determined whether or not the long press operation of holding the right operation member 812R and the right operation member 812R is continued. Then, if the long press operation is executed, the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are controlled to rotate so that the form change progresses from the separated form to the connected form during the period. As a result, the morphological changes of both input levers 810L and 810R proceed, and the morphological changes of both input levers 810L and 810R proceed, provided that the left operation member 812L and the right operation member 812R are long pressed. Whether or not to proceed can be determined by a simple pressing operation of the player. Since the progress of the morphological change of both input levers 810L and 810R can be identified not only by the appearance but also by the tactile sensation to the operation unit of the player, the player can identify the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. The process of morphological change can be identified by tactile sensation while paying close attention to.

Further, during the period of active control B, when a long-pressing operation for holding both the left operating member 812L and the right operating member 812R is executed, the long-pressing operation is simply continued. There is a possibility that the operation becomes simple and the player's consciousness is not suitable for the operation just by being in a connected state. Therefore, after the form is changed to the connected form, the lever rotation drive motors 831L and 831R are controlled to operate both input levers 810L and 810R so that the form change further progresses from the connected form to the separated form. The sub-control board 940 may be configured to include control. As a result, the connected form cannot be maintained by a simple long press operation, and the sub-control board so that the connected state can be continued on the condition that the grip operation is released at the right time in the connected state. Control of 940 can be configured. This connected state may be continued by requiring another operation method such as repeating the gripping operation intermittently (continuously hitting) at the right time.

Further, as another example of the effect that requires continuous operation by the player, for example, the treasure egg 482 displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 is placed on both the left and right sides for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). If you succeed in keeping it in the pinched (grabbed) state, display the treasure 483 and crush it by pinching the treasure egg 482, or if the pinching force of both input levers 810L and 810R is weak and it falls downward from between. , The effect may be controlled so as not to display the treasure 483. Also in this case, both input levers 810L and 810R move to the center side by the amount that the long press operation that keeps gripping both the left operation member 812L and the right operation member 812R is continued. When you release your hand, the sub-control board 940 may control the movement so that it stops at that position and is separated by repeated striking. Then, the display control is performed so that the treasure egg 482 rotates and changes its direction, and the width of the treasure egg 482 changes according to the change in the direction. It is preferable to control the pressure to be changed so that the distance between the two input levers 810L and 810R as the target value fluctuates. As a result, the player is provided with the interest of the effect of combining the contents of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 and the two input levers 810L and 810R arranged on the front side thereof without making the input operation too simple. Can be done.

Further, when the continuous operation by the player is executed, the outer shape of the lever that has been continuously operated out of the two input levers 810L and 810R is the length of the period during which the continuous operation is performed. It may change accordingly. For example, in a form in which both input levers 810L and 810R are connected, a movable member is provided so as to radially protrude outward from the outer peripheral portion of both input levers 810L and 810R, and a long press operation is executed. Depending on the number of protruding movable members and the amount of protrusion, it is suggested whether the setting is advantageous for the player (for example, the setting of the ball ejection rate), or the special symbol lottery is won in the reserved unit game. May suggest whether or not is included.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

In the above embodiment, it is possible to point to the vicinity of the privilege area 409V (the upper prize winning device 434 involved in the entry of the game ball into the privilege area 409V itself or the privilege area 409V), or to direct the player's consciousness. As a configuration that can be used, a configuration is described in which both the combination of the operations of the plurality of movable members 10 and 20 and the light emitting effect of causing the light emitting element 19 provided on the movable members 10 and 20 to emit light are performed. It is not always necessary to carry out both the combination of operations and the light emitting effect, and it may be configured to carry out only one of them. For example, a specific light emitting element 19 provided in one movable member may be used. The direction may be indicated (suggested).

Further, in the above embodiment, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration in which the upper approach control mechanism 454 is in a progressable state after the distribution mechanism 437 is in the approachable state in the shift destination determination round. Even in this case, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays the treasure 483 as predetermined display information corresponding to the winning of the first type of jackpot before the start of the first round, and the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 10 and the right movable. The member 20 indicates to the player that the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V, and in the transition destination determination round, the launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped, and the treasure 483 is displayed and the movable members 10 and 20 are in close proximity to each other. By encouraging the player to launch the game ball in the wake of the change in the above, it is possible to make the game ball suitably enter into the privilege area 409V.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the decorative symbol display device 479, whether the type of the jackpot shifts to the special gaming state of the probability variation transition or the special gaming state of the time saving transition is selected. The case where it is not specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the display of the combination of stop symbols, it may be displayed whether the first type of jackpot or the second type of jackpot has been won. In addition, a specific character or the like indicating the type of jackpot winning may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. When the decorative symbol display device 479 displays the type of jackpot that is different from the combination of the stop symbols by the decorative symbol, the display is not immediately before the start of the special game state, but the unit game in which the jackpot is won. It is also possible to display during the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol corresponding to the above, or during the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol corresponding to the unit game executed before the unit game in which the execution of the unit game won by the big hit is suspended. good. Further, in this case, the effect of the round in which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V may be configured to be started during the variation period of the decorative symbol. Further, the display executed before the effect operation of the left movable member 10 and the right movable member 20 is configured to be executed by the decorative symbol display device 479, but the display is not limited to this configuration, and the display is limited to the pachinko machine 100. It may be configured to be executed by another existing display device or a newly provided display device.

Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration in which the non-participation type, one-handed participation type, and two-handed participation type production (shell split mission production) is executed including at least a part of the special gaming state has been described. Not limited to the configuration, a non-participation type, a one-handed participation type, or a two-handed participation type production (shell split mission production) may be executed in a symbol variation period without including a period in which the special game state is present. In addition, when performing non-participation type, one-handed participation type, or two-handed participation type production during the symbol fluctuation period, the predetermined winning conditions (first big hit or second) in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. The non-participation type is configured to be executed during the symbol change period related to the unit game (unit game based on the start winning that the predetermined winning condition is satisfied or the unit game already held at the time of winning) that is executed after the big hit) is established. It may be configured to suggest whether or not the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V by the one-handed participation type or the two-handed participation type production.

Further, in the above embodiment, as an effect suggesting whether or not an enterable period during which the game ball can enter the privilege area 409V occurs in the special gaming state, a non-participation type or a participation type (one-handed participation type and one-handed participation type) It is a configuration that executes the production of (two-handed participation type), but it is not limited to this configuration, and as a production that suggests whether other situations occur or shift, non-participation type, one-handed participation type, and two-handed participation type production It may be configured to execute at least a part of. For example, a non-participation type or participatory type production may be executed as an effect suggesting whether or not a jackpot has been won as a predetermined winning condition is satisfied in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. However, it may be configured to be executed as an effect showing the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. When a non-participating type or participatory type effect is executed as an effect suggesting whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, the effect may be executed during the symbol change period, or the start prize may be awarded. It may be carried out during the period from the establishment to the start of the symbol change period, or in the situation where the symbol change after the special game state is awaited during the special game state, the effect is performed in the special game state. It may be executed in the middle (for example, the ending period), or may be executed in a unit game executed after the special game state. In this case, as the display of the treasure 483, numerical information (for example, 50%) indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit winning may be displayed, or the degree of expectation of the big hit winning is "a certain probability or more". Textual information such as "Gekiatsu" or "Winning" corresponding to the big hit may be displayed, or a colored ball (for example, a red, yellow, or rainbow-colored ball) is displayed as an image indicating the starting prize. As a result, an image suggesting a jackpot expectation may be displayed on the display unit that displays the number of hold times.

Further, the non-participating type or participatory type effect may be used as an effect suggesting whether or not a predetermined effect (for example, a battle effect using a predetermined character) is executed during the symbol variation period. In that case, as the display of the treasure 483, the character information of "development" suggesting that a specific effect is executed may be displayed, or the character when any effect of a plurality of characters is executed. Characters corresponding to the type information (for example, "soldier" or "kid") indicating the type of the character or an image of the character may be displayed.

Further, the non-participating type or participatory type effect may be used as an effect indicating the number of rounds in the special gaming state and whether or not the round is continued. In this case, the number of rounds is displayed as the display of the treasure 483. Numerical information such as "10R" including the indicated number and character information of "continuation" indicating that the special gaming state is continued without ending may be displayed.

In addition, the non-participating type or participatory type effect may be used as an effect to be executed in a situation of waiting for the execution of the game (for example, while the demo screen is being displayed). It may be possible, and in this case, the character information such as "Daikichi" or "Kokichi" may be displayed by lottery as the display of the treasure 483, or the degree of expectation displayed during the symbol change period is different. A staging image such as a staging (for example, "fish school" or "bubble") may be selected and displayed with a certain probability.

Further, for each operation unit of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R in the above embodiment, an operation amount detecting means (for example, an encoder) capable of detecting a movement operation amount and an operation means for operating each operation unit. (For example, a motor) may be provided so that each operation unit can be operated without the operation of the player by the control of the sub-control board 940, or an assist force for facilitating the operation may be applied. For example, as a participatory effect, it is not always necessary to enable the two-handed participatory effect only when the two-handed participatory effect is operated, and it is possible to participate with one hand. It is configured so that you can select what you want to participate in the production with one hand, and if you choose to participate with one hand, if you operate one lever without operating both hands, the other lever will be the amount of operation of one. It may be configured to follow and operate with the same operation amount.

Further, regarding the two-handed participation type staging that requires the operation of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R in the above embodiment, when one-handed participation is performed, the determination time TM is not reached and there is no one-handed operation. Although the case where the same effect as the case is limited has been described, when participating with one hand, another effect for one-handed operation different from the case of participating with both hands may be executed. In addition, during the execution of the two-handed participation type production, when one-handed participation is performed, the image is different from the case where one-handed participation is not performed, and a specific image corresponding to one-handed participation (for example, "operation with both hands" is performed. It may be configured to display the character image) of "Please do".

Further, the configuration in which the two-handed participation type staging that requires the operation of the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R and the one-handed participatory staging in the above embodiment use the same operation unit has been described. The pattern effect and the two-handed participatory effect may be executed by using separate operation units.

Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration in which the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R operate separately has been described, but it is not always necessary to operate them separately, and the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the gear, the belt, or the like. Two levers may be connected via the above, and both levers may be connected to enable integrated operation, and the player's operation or sub-control may be performed between the connected state and the disconnected state. It may be configured so that it can be switched by the control of the substrate 940.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where either the one-handed participation type or the two-handed participation type effect is executed has been described, but the player's operation is detected and the one-handed participation type effect is executed by the operation. It may be configured to switch between being performed and performing a two-handed participation type production.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R move from the left and right ends to the center side, the lever and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 can be operated to approach each other. As described above, each lever is configured to change its position in the front-rear direction by operating the lever (movement operation), and the front-back position between the lever and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 is changed by the operation of the player. In this case, the operation may be such that when the lever moves to the center side, the operation approaches the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R are provided on both the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 100 has been described, but instead of one of the two levers or two levers. In addition, a lever may be provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine 100 to enable one-handed participation type production or two-handed participation type production.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, the pachinko machine may be implemented so that the expected big hit value can be increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times or three times) including the big hit. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be in a special gaming state on condition that the ball wins a prize in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as parrots in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused. Further, the privilege as a game value given to the player in the game may be a privilege due to the game medium such as a game ball or a medal being paid out as an entity, or the numerical information is recorded in the recording medium. It may be a virtual privilege accompanied by an update of insubstantial information given by.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like. In addition, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A display means for displaying variable identification information (for example, a decorative symbol display device 479) and a control means for controlling the display content displayed by the display means (for example, a sub-control board 940) are provided, and the gaming ball flows down. A game is played by flowing a game ball into a predetermined first area (for example, left flow area 409L) in a normal gaming state among possible game areas (game area 409), and a predetermined display result (for example, for example) is displayed by the display means. When a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a big hit is displayed, a predetermined privilege area (for example, for example, a game ball is made to flow down to a second area (for example, right flow area 409R) provided separately from the first area). , Bonus area 409V), and when the game ball enters the privilege area and the game ball does not enter the privilege area (for example, in a time-saving game state). In a gaming machine configured to be able to transition to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, a probabilistic gaming state).
A plurality of movable members having a separated posture arranged at a plurality of locations in the normal gaming state are provided.
When the predetermined display result is displayed, the plurality of movable members operate, and a part of the plurality of movable members takes a state of being closer or in contact with the separated posture as compared with the separated posture, and the game ball is brought to the game area. A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of movable members are configured to take a continuous privilege area instruction arrangement from an entrance portion through which the machine flows down toward the privilege area.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, for example, in a normal game state, the game ball is caused to flow down to a predetermined left flow area by a left-handed strike with a small firing intensity of the game ball, and the game ball is flown down to a predetermined left flow area, which is higher than the normal game state. In a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the launching of the gaming ball is performed as the game progresses, such as when the firing intensity of the gaming ball is greater than that of a left-handed hit, the gaming ball is made to flow down the flow area on the right side by a right-handed strike. It is a composition that changes the way of. In such a gaming machine, when the gaming state is switched from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state, a specific device or area in which the gaming ball flowing down the flowing area on the right side can enter (hereinafter, these are referred to as privilege areas). A configuration is known that requires a gaming ball to enter the (referred to as) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45422). In this configuration, when an opportunity is obtained to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area, the player is notified by displaying characters or figures on the liquid crystal display device so as to launch the game ball by right-handed. Is restrained from suffering disadvantages.

However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration for performing a suitable effect when it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 10 can provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable effect when the gaming ball can be entered into the privilege area. That is, when a predetermined display result is displayed by the display means and it is possible to insert the game ball into the privilege area, a plurality of movable members are placed in different postures from the separated postures in which they are arranged at different positions. The configuration is such that a plurality of movable members are moved to a continuous privilege area instruction arrangement from the entrance portion where the game ball flows down to the game area toward the privilege area in a state of being in close proximity or in contact with each other. Therefore, by the operation of the plurality of movable members, the player's attention may be drawn to or in the vicinity of the privilege area provided on the direction side where the plurality of movable members are continuously arranged, or the plurality of movable members may be placed in different places. By moving from the arranged state, it becomes possible to make the movement easier for the player to notice. Therefore, by the effect of operating the plurality of movable members, it is suggested to the player that the game ball should be put into the privilege area, or the behavior of the game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the privilege area is noticed. , It is possible to call attention to the fact that the area where the game ball is allowed to flow down should be changed from the first area to the second area in order to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area. It is possible to suppress the opportunity to make a transition.

<Feature 11>
A display means for displaying variable identification information (for example, a decorative symbol display device 479) and a control means for controlling the display content displayed by the display means (for example, a sub-control board 940) are provided, and the gaming ball flows down. A game is played by flowing a game ball into a predetermined first area (for example, left flow area 409L) in a normal gaming state among possible game areas (game area 409), and a predetermined display result (for example, for example) is displayed by the display means. When a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a big hit is displayed, a predetermined privilege area (for example, for example, a game ball is made to flow down to a second area (for example, right flow area 409R) provided separately from the first area). , Bonus area 409V), and when the game ball enters the privilege area and the game ball does not enter the privilege area (for example, in a time-saving game state). In a gaming machine configured to be able to transition to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, a probabilistic gaming state).
A plurality of movable members (left movable member 10 and right movable member 20) having a separated posture arranged at a plurality of locations in the normal gaming state are provided.
When the predetermined display result is displayed, the light emitting portion provided in the movable member arranged at the position overlapping on the front side of the display means emits light, and the entrance portion where the game ball flows down to the game area to the privilege area. A gaming machine characterized in that a light emitting effect is performed in which the light emitting portions emit light in order toward the direction side.

The gaming machine according to the feature 11 can provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable effect when the gaming ball can be entered into the privilege area. That is, when a predetermined display result is displayed by the display means and the game ball can be put into the privilege area, the light emitting portion provided in the movable member arranged at the position overlapping on the front side of the display means emits light. , The light emitting part emits light in order from the entrance part where the game ball flows down to the game area toward the privilege area. For this reason, the light emitting portion of the light emitting portion provided on the movable member attracts the player's attention or notices the behavior of the game ball in the privilege area provided on the direction side in which the light emitting portion emits light in order and in the vicinity thereof. It becomes possible to make it easier. Therefore, this light emitting effect suggests to the player that the game ball should be put into the privilege area, pays attention to the behavior of the game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the privilege area, or makes the game ball into the privilege area. It is possible to call attention to the fact that the area where the game ball is allowed to flow down should be changed from the first area to the second area in order to enter, and the opportunity to transition to a game state advantageous to the player is missed. It becomes possible to suppress that.

<Feature 20>
A light emitting board on which electronic components are mounted (for example, a light emitting board 31) and
A light emitting means (for example, LED elements 32L, 32R) provided on one surface side of the light emitting substrate and arranged in a direction of outputting light toward a predetermined direction side.
A first decorative portion (a first decorative portion that can pass the light output from the light emitting means to the front side where the player is located and can take a state of emitting light when visually recognized from the surface side where the player is located. For example, the front decoration part 50) and
On the back surface side of the first decorative portion, the rear side light output means (for example, the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50) outputs the light emitted from the light emitting means to the rear side opposite to the front side. When,
A portion to which a part of the light output from the rear side light output means is irradiated, and a second decorative portion (for example, the rear side decorative portion 11) provided separately from the first decorative portion. Prepare,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second decorative portion is configured to be capable of emitting light by light output to the rear side by the rear side light output means.

<Feature 21>
A light emitting board on which electronic components are mounted (for example, a light emitting board 31) and
A light emitting means (for example, LED elements 32L, 32R) provided on one surface side of the light emitting substrate and arranged in a direction of outputting light toward a predetermined direction side.
A first decorative portion (a first decorative portion that can pass the light output from the light emitting means to the front side where the player is located and can take a state of emitting light when visually recognized from the surface side where the player is located. For example, the front decoration part 50) and
On the back surface side of the first decorative portion, the rear side light output means (for example, the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50) outputs the light emitted from the light emitting means to the rear side opposite to the front side. When,
A second decorative portion (a portion that is irradiated with a part of the light output from the rear side light output means, is provided on the rear side of the light emitting substrate, and is provided separately from the first decorative portion. For example, the rear decoration portion 11) and
It is characterized by being provided with a different direction reflecting means (for example, a rear window 61) capable of reflecting the light output to the rear side by the rear side light output means in a direction different from the second decorative portion. A game machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a large number of decorative parts for displaying motifs related to game playability and performing effects as the game progresses are provided in various places to diversify the game effects. (For example, Patent Document 1). The large number of decorative parts include a decorative part that is appropriately irradiated with light at all times or according to the progress of the game, and the effect of the effect of the decorative part is improved by the irradiation of the light. However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration capable of performing a suitable effect by the decorative portion.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the feature 20 or the feature 21, the first decorative portion capable of passing the light from the light emitting means that outputs the light toward the predetermined direction side to the front side where the player is located. , On the back surface side of the first decorative portion, the rear side light output means that outputs the light emitted from the light emitting means to the rear side opposite to the front side where the player is located, and the rear side light output means outputs the light. The portion to which a part of the emitted light is irradiated is provided with a second decorative portion provided separately from the first decorative portion. As a result, the first decorative portion is made to emit light by the light output from the light emitting means, and the second decorative portion is made to emit light by the light output from the same light emitting means and output from the rear side light output means. The light can be emitted, and the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the light emitting means is provided for each decorative portion.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 21, the second decorative portion is provided on the rear side of the light emitting substrate. As a result, unlike the case where the second decorative portion is placed in a place where the light from the light emitting means is not directly irradiated and the first decorative portion is made to emit light by the light emitted on the back surface side thereof, the second decorative portion is used. The decorative portion can be made to emit light by the light emitted from the surface side, and even if the decorative portion is made to emit light by the light from the same light emitting means, the appearance of the light emission of the first decorative portion and the light emission of the second decorative portion. It is possible to enhance the effect of the production by those decorative parts.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature 21 is provided with a different-direction reflecting means capable of reflecting the light output to the rear side by the rear-side light output means in a direction different from that of the first decorative portion. As a result, the light after being reflected by the other-direction reflecting means can be, for example, an irradiation position different from the light irradiated to the first decorative portion or the second decorative portion without being reflected by the other-direction reflecting means. It is also possible to irradiate the first decorative part and the second decorative part in a complicated form by a limited number of light emitting means such as irradiating at an irradiation angle, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by those decorative parts. can.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 20 or the feature 21, the second decorative portion is provided in the portion to be irradiated with the light output from the rear side light output means. As a result, the light output from the light emitting means is once traveled in a direction different from that of the second decorative portion, and then the traveling direction of the light is changed by the rear output means toward the second decorative portion. It can be changed. Therefore, as compared with the case of using the light emitting means that directly irradiates the second decorative portion with light without going through the rear side light output means, the distance between the light emitting means and the second decorative portion is narrowed, and the light emitting means and the second decorative portion are used. While suppressing the increase in size of the structure constituting the second decorative portion, the path through which the light travels to reach the second decorative portion is lengthened, and the second decoration is performed by using a limited number of light emitting means. It is also possible to secure a large irradiation range in the section.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 20 or the feature 21, the first decorative portion is configured so that the light output from the light emitting means can pass to the front side where the player is located. This makes it possible to arrange the second decorative portion so as to overlap the first decorative portion in the front-rear direction so that the light emission of the second decorative portion can be seen through the first decorative portion.

As described above, even if a limited number of light emitting means are used, the effect of the effect of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion can be enhanced, and the effect of the decorative portion can be made suitable. ..

In the gaming machine according to the feature 20 or the feature 21, the first decorative portion may be configured to be capable of irradiating the light output from the different direction reflecting means. As a result, the light once output from the light emitting means can be directed to the first decorative portion by changing the traveling direction of the light by both the rear side output means and the different direction reflecting means, and the light is reflected in the other direction. Compared with the case where only the light that does not pass through the means is irradiated to the first decorative portion, it is possible to easily irradiate the entire first decorative portion with the light even with a limited number of light emitting means.

<Feature 30>
A light emitting board on which electronic components are mounted (for example, a light emitting board 31) and
A light emitting means (for example, LED elements 32L, 32R) provided on one surface side of the light emitting substrate and arranged in a direction of outputting light toward a predetermined direction side.
First, it is possible to pass a part of the light output from the light emitting means to the front side where the player is located, and to take a state of emitting light when visually recognized from the surface side where the player is located. The decorative part (for example, the front side decorative part 50),
On the back surface side of the first decorative portion, the first reflecting means (for example, the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the rear side opposite to the front side. When,
A second reflecting means (for example, the front surface of the rear window 61) which is provided at a portion where the light output from the first reflecting means is irradiated and can reflect at least a part of the light to the side where the light emitting means is provided. 61F) and
A portion to which the light output from the second reflecting means is irradiated, which is provided between the first decorative portion and the light emitting means, and at least a part of the light is provided by the first decorative portion. A third reflecting means (for example, the front surface 62F of the light entry window 62) capable of reflecting is provided on the side to be reflected.
A light emitting space surrounded by a peripheral portion is formed by the first reflecting means, the second reflecting means, and the third reflecting means.
A gaming machine characterized in that light traveling toward the light emitting means in the light emitting space is configured to be reflexible into the light emitting space by the third reflecting means.

<Feature 31>
A light emitting board on which electronic components are mounted (for example, a light emitting board 31) and
A light emitting means (for example, LED elements 32L, 32R) provided on one surface side of the light emitting substrate and arranged in a direction of outputting light toward a predetermined direction side.
First, it is possible to pass a part of the light output from the light emitting means to the front side where the player is located, and to take a state of emitting light when visually recognized from the surface side where the player is located. The decorative part (for example, the front side decorative part 50) and
On the back surface side of the first decorative portion, the first reflecting means (for example, the back surface 50B of the front side decorative portion 50) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the rear side opposite to the front side. When,
A second reflecting means (for example, the front surface of the rear window 61) which is provided at a portion where the light output from the first reflecting means is irradiated and can reflect at least a part of the light to the side where the light emitting means is provided. 61F) and
A portion to which the light output from the second reflecting means is irradiated, which is provided between the first decorative portion and the light emitting means, and at least a part of the light is provided by the first decorative portion. A third reflecting means (for example, the front surface 62F of the light entry window 62) capable of reflecting is provided on the side to be reflected.
A light emitting space (for example, a light emitting space 40) in which a peripheral portion is surrounded is formed by the first reflecting means, the second reflecting means, and the third reflecting means.
A game characterized in that a second decorative portion (for example, the rear side decorative portion 11) provided separately from the first decorative portion is configured to be capable of emitting light by light reflected by the first reflecting means. Machine.

The second decorative portion described as features 30 and 31 is a decorative portion (rear side decorative portion 11) to which light passed from a transparent plate-shaped portion (rear window 61) constituting the second reflecting means is irradiated. In addition to or in addition to this, a transparent plate-shaped portion (rear window 61) constituting the second reflecting means is arranged so as to be visible to the player. A plate-shaped decorative part such as printing a character image or the like may be provided so as to overlap the shaped portion.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a plurality of decorative parts are provided to display motifs related to game playability and to perform an effect accompanying the progress of the game, and the decorative parts are always or according to the progress of the game. It irradiates light to enhance the effect of the effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245273). However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration capable of performing a suitable effect by the decorative portion.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 30 or the feature 31, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 30 or the feature 31, the light emitting means for causing the second decorative portion to emit light and the first decorative portion to emit light is provided. It is configured to be emitted by the light that is output from the light emitting means toward a predetermined direction and is reflected by the first reflecting means. As a result, the first decorative portion is made to emit light by the light output from the light emitting means, and the second decorative portion is made to emit light by the light output from the same light emitting means and output from the rear side light output means. The light can be emitted, and the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the light emitting means is provided for each decorative portion.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 30 or the feature 31, a light emitting space in which a peripheral portion is surrounded is formed between the first reflecting means, the second reflecting means and the third reflecting means, and the first decoration is made. In addition to the light that is output from the light emitting means toward a predetermined direction and is irradiated without being reflected by the second reflecting means and the third reflecting means, the first reflecting means and the first The configuration is such that the light can be emitted by the light after being sequentially reflected by the two reflecting means and the third reflecting means. As a result, the light after being reflected by the first reflecting means is, for example, irradiated at an irradiation position and an irradiation angle different from the light irradiated to the first decorative portion without being reflected by the first reflecting means. Even with a limited number of light emitting means, it is possible to irradiate the first decorative portion in a complicated form, and the effect of the effect of the first decorative portion can be enhanced. Further, it is also possible to make the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion emit light by the light after repeating the sequential reflection by the first reflecting means, the second reflecting means, and the third reflecting means in the light emitting space. Therefore, the effect of the effect of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion can be further enhanced. Further, since the light that has entered the light emitting space can be irradiated to the first reflecting means while being repeated by the first reflecting means, the second reflecting means, and the third reflecting means, the light emitted toward the first reflecting means is emitted. It is possible to irradiate the decorative portion 1 and the second decorative portion that emits light by the light reflected by the first reflecting means, and it is also possible to efficiently make the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion emit light.

<Feature 40>
A light emitting board on which electronic components are mounted (for example, a lower left board 721a or a center board 731) and
A light emitting means (for example, LED element 722a or LED element 732) provided on one surface side of the light emitting substrate and arranged in a direction of outputting light toward a predetermined direction side.
The light emitting means is provided with a reflective means (for example, a reflective decorative body 710) having a reflective decorative portion (for example, the reflective decorative portion 711) capable of reflecting the light output from the light emitting means toward the front side where the player is located.
The reflective decorative portion has a decorative surface (for example, decorative surface 712S) arranged at a position not overlapping with the light emitting substrate in the front-rear direction and arranged in an inclined direction when viewed from the player side.
A gaming machine characterized in that the light output from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting means, and the light that has passed through the decorative surface can be output to the front side where the player is located.

<Feature 41>
A light emitting board on which electronic components are mounted (for example, a lower left board 721a or a center board 731) and
A light emitting means (for example, LED element 722a or LED element 732) provided on one surface side of the light emitting substrate and arranged in a direction of outputting light toward a predetermined direction side.
The light emitting means is provided with a reflective means (for example, a reflective decorative body 710) having a reflective decorative portion (for example, the reflective decorative portion 711) capable of reflecting the light output from the light emitting means toward the front side where the player is located.
The reflective decorative portion has a decorative surface (for example, decorative surface 712S) arranged at a position not overlapping with the light emitting substrate in the front-rear direction and arranged in an inclined direction when viewed from the player side.
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the light output from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting means, and the light passing through the decorative surface can be output to the front side where the player is located.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a large number of decorative parts are provided to display motifs related to game playability and to perform an effect accompanying the progress of the game. The large number of decorative parts include a decorative part that is appropriately irradiated with light at all times or according to the progress of the game, and the effect of the effect of the decorative part is improved. This decorative portion is made of a material that allows light to pass through, and by irradiating light from a light source arranged behind the decorative portion, it is in a state of emitting light when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-119669 (Ab.).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration capable of performing a suitable effect by the decorative portion.

On the other hand, the gaming machines described in the feature 40 and the feature 41 can provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable effect by the reflective decoration portion (decoration portion). That is, by providing the reflective decoration portion with a decorative surface that is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the light emitting substrate in the front-rear direction and is arranged in an inclined direction when viewed from the player side, the player can perform the production by the reflective decoration portion. It is possible to ensure that the size of the decorative surface visually recognized by the player is a predetermined size, and that the light is brightly output from the decorative surface when viewed from the player side.

<Feature 42>
The gaming machine according to feature 40 or feature 41.
A display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 479) for displaying variable identification information and a control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the display contents displayed by the display means are provided.
The decorative surface is a gaming machine characterized in that the display means is configured to have a curved shape so that the side on which the display unit (display unit 479a) on which the identification information is displayed is provided is inside.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 42, when the player is paying attention to the display means for performing the main effect as the game progresses by making the shape of the decorative surface curved with the display portion inside. , The entire decorative surface can be easily made to fit in the player's field of view.

<Feature 43>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 40 to 42.
A separate decorative means (for example, an annular decorative body 740 or a central decorative body 750) provided separately from the reflecting means and irradiated with the light output from the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting substrate is provided on the back surface side of the separate decorative means.
The other decorative means is a gaming machine characterized in that the light output from the light emitting means can pass to the front side where the player is located.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 43, the reflective decorative portion of the reflective means and the separate decorative means can be made visible to the player by the light emitting means provided on the same light emitting substrate. As a result, the effect of the reflecting means and the separate decorative means can be performed by using a limited number of light emitting means.

<Feature 50>
A reflective means (for example, a reflective decorative body 710) having a reflective decorative portion (for example, a reflective decorative portion 711) that allows the player to visually recognize a predetermined decoration is provided.
The reflecting means includes a passing portion (for example, a passing portion 712) formed in a transparent plate shape and through which light can pass.
It is provided so as to overlap one side with respect to the passing portion, and is provided with a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion 713) capable of reflecting light.
The passing portion is provided with a decorative surface (for example, decorative surface 712S) having a predetermined decoration on the surface side opposite to the reflective portion.
The predetermined decoration applied to the decorative surface and the predetermined decoration reflected by the reflective portion are overlapped at different positions so as to be visible to the player. A gaming machine featuring.

<Feature 51>
A light emitting board on which electronic components are mounted (for example, a lower left board 721a or a center board 731) and
A light emitting means (for example, LED element 722a or LED element 732) provided on one surface side of the light emitting substrate and arranged in a direction of outputting light toward a predetermined direction side.
The light emitting means is provided with a reflective means (for example, a reflective decorative body 710) having a reflective decorative portion (for example, the reflective decorative portion 711) capable of reflecting the light output from the light emitting means toward the front side where the player is located.
The reflecting means includes a passing portion (for example, a passing portion 712) formed in a transparent plate shape and through which the light output from the light emitting means passes.
It is provided so as to overlap the passing portion with the side where the light output from the light emitting means passes and then is output, and is provided with a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion 713) capable of reflecting the light.
The passing portion is provided with a decorative surface (for example, decorative surface 712S) having a predetermined decoration on the surface side opposite to the reflective portion.
The light output from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting means, and the light that has passed through the decorative surface can be output to the front side where the player is located.
The predetermined decoration applied to the decorative surface and the predetermined decoration reflected by the reflective portion are overlapped at different positions so as to be visible to the player. A gaming machine featuring.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a decorative portion is provided to display a motif or the like related to game playability or to perform an effect accompanying the progress of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-119669). (For example, Patent Document 1). The decorative part is three-dimensionally decorated by forming complicated irregularities on the surface of a predetermined member, or a sticker on which a figure, a character, or a character is drawn is attached to the predetermined member. It is decorated in two dimensions. By making the player visually recognize the three-dimensional or two-dimensional decoration applied to such a decorative portion, the effect of the effect of the decoration is enhanced.

However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration of the decorative portion provided in the gaming machine.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 50 or the feature 51 can provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a good-looking decoration using the light reflection function. That is, the reflecting portion is provided so as to overlap the passing portion on one side (the side that is output after the light output from the light emitting means has passed), and the surface side of the passing portion that is opposite to the reflecting portion is provided. By making it a decorative surface, the decoration is visually recognized by the player based on the light reflected on the decorative surface, and is visually recognized based on the light once passed through the decorative surface and reflected by the reflecting portion and then passed through the decorative surface again. By visually recognizing the decoration at a position deviated from the decoration, the three-dimensional appearance is emphasized when the two-dimensional decoration is applied, and the three-dimensional appearance is emphasized when the three-dimensional decoration is applied. be able to. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of the reflective decorative portion while suppressing the manufacturing cost by decorating with a simple structure.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 51, the decorative surface can be visually recognized brightly by the light output from the light emitting means. Further, when the light is not output from the light emitting means, the decoration on the decorative surface cannot be visually recognized, and when the light is output, it can be visually recognized.

<Feature 52>
The gaming machine according to feature 50 or feature 51.
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative surface includes an undulating shape portion (for example, a protruding decorative area 712b) on a surface side opposite to the reflective portion.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 52, even if a decoration having a small undulation is provided, the player can visually recognize the undulation as being larger than the actual undulation. As a result, the decorative surface can be formed by a simple process, so that the manufacturing cost can be suppressed and the effect of the effect of the reflective decorative portion can be enhanced.

<Feature 60>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
It is possible to distribute the game ball to a plurality of areas including the privilege area (for example, the privilege area 409V), and it is possible to generate an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (for example, distribution mechanism 437) and
A switching mechanism (for example, an upper approach control mechanism 454) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side.
When the special game state is generated, the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism operate, and when the game ball enters the privilege area, it is more advantageous than the case where the game ball does not enter the privilege area. A game state occurs,
When a predetermined round is started, the switching mechanism shifts to the advanceable state, the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side, and the distribution mechanism takes the approachable state. The game ball is configured to be able to enter the privilege area,
When the predetermined round is started, after the distribution mechanism shifts to the enterable state, the switching mechanism executes control to make the game ball advanceable to the distribution mechanism side. Possible to be configured,
When the predetermined round is started, after the distribution mechanism shifts to the approachable state, the switching mechanism becomes the progressable state, and the gaming ball moves to the privilege area in the predetermined round. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be accessible.

<Feature 61>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
It is possible to distribute the game ball to a plurality of areas including the privilege area (for example, the privilege area 409V), and it is possible to generate an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (for example, distribution mechanism 437) and
A switching mechanism (for example, an upper approach control mechanism 454) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side.
An operation control means (for example, a main control board 920) that controls the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special gaming state by controlling the operation including the operation control.
When a game ball enters the privilege area, it is provided with a game state control means (for example, a main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than the case where the game ball does not enter the privilege area.
The motion control means includes a round time ending means for ending the predetermined round when a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined round in which the enterable state occurs.
A distribution transfer means that controls the operation of the distribution mechanism when the predetermined round is started and shifts the distribution mechanism to the accessible state.
When the predetermined round is started, the operation of the switching mechanism is controlled, and after the distribution mechanism is transferred to the accessible state by the distribution transfer means, the game ball is moved to the distribution mechanism side by the switching mechanism. It has a switching control means that makes it possible to make progress.
When the predetermined round is started, after the distribution mechanism shifts to the approachable state, the switching mechanism becomes the progressable state, and the gaming ball moves to the privilege area in the predetermined round. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be accessible.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. A typical conventional pachinko machine is configured to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery is won. As this type of pachinko machine, it is known that the game is diversified by changing the game state that shifts after the special game state depending on whether or not the game ball can enter the privilege area in the special game state. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-188529).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration that can suitably control the entry of the game ball into the privilege area.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 60 or the feature 61 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably controlling the entry of the gaming ball into the privilege area. That is, in a predetermined round in which the switching mechanism and the distribution mechanism operate in the special game state, after the distribution mechanism shifts to an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area, it is moved upstream from the distribution mechanism. The arranged switching mechanism is in a state where the game ball can be advanced toward the distribution mechanism. This makes it possible to make the switching mechanism in a state in which the switching mechanism can proceed after a predetermined time from the start of a predetermined round, and it is certain that the game ball will enter the privilege area in the special game state in which the game ball should enter the privilege area. It is possible to improve the sex.

<Feature 70>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
A distribution mechanism capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of areas including a privilege area and generating an enterable state in which the game balls can enter the privilege area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds.
It is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and is provided with a switching mechanism that can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side.
When the special game state is generated, the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism operate, and when the game ball enters the privilege area, it is more advantageous than the case where the game ball does not enter the privilege area. A game state occurs,
When a predetermined round is started, the switching mechanism shifts to the advanceable state, the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side, and the distribution mechanism takes the approachable state. The game ball is configured to be able to enter the privilege area,
When the predetermined round is started and the approachable period is entered, the predetermined display information (treasure 483) is displayed by the predetermined display means.
When the predetermined round is started and the period shifts to the enterable period, after the predetermined display information is displayed, a predetermined effect means (V suggestion movable member, input operating device) different from the display means is specified. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to perform a staging motion (change to a close posture).

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
A distribution mechanism capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of areas including a privilege area and generating an enterable state in which the game balls can enter the privilege area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds.
A switching mechanism provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side.
An operation control means for generating the special gaming state by controlling including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism.
When a game ball enters the privilege area, it is provided with a game state control means for generating a specific game state which is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the privilege area.
The motion control means includes a round time ending means for ending the predetermined round when a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined round in which the enterable state occurs.
A distribution transfer means that controls the operation of the distribution mechanism when the predetermined round is started and shifts the distribution mechanism to the accessible state.
There is a switching control means that controls the operation of the switching mechanism when the predetermined round is started, and makes it possible to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side by the switching mechanism. death,
When the predetermined round is started, the switching mechanism shifts to the advanceable state, the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side, and the distribution mechanism takes the enterable state in the approachable period. The game ball is configured to be able to enter the privilege area,
A display means for displaying predetermined display information (treasure 483) when the predetermined round is started and the period shifts to the accessible period.
When the predetermined round is started and the approachable period is entered, after the predetermined display information is displayed, an effect means (V suggestion movable member, input operation device) different from the display means is controlled. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a staging control means for performing a predetermined staging operation (change to a close posture).

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. A typical conventional pachinko machine is configured to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery is won. As this type of pachinko machine, it is known that the game is diversified by changing the game state that shifts after the special game state depending on whether or not the game ball can enter the privilege area in the special game state. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45422).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration for performing a suitable effect when it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 70 or the feature 71 can provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable effect when the gaming ball can enter the privilege area. That is, when the predetermined round is started and the period shifts to the enterable period, the predetermined display information is displayed, and after the predetermined display information is displayed, the predetermined effect operation is performed by the effect means, and then the privilege area is displayed. It is possible to provide the player with a game property in which the game ball enters and shifts to a specific game state. Therefore, when the predetermined winning condition is satisfied, the display of the predetermined display information by the display means informs the player that the predetermined effect operation of the effect means will occur as a notice, and then the predetermined effect means. The staging action makes it possible to inform the player that the game ball can enter the privilege area. In addition, the notification of the production means by the production operation is made more conspicuous than the notification of the display means by the display of the predetermined display information, and the player misses the arrival of the time when the game ball can enter the privilege area. The occurrence of the situation can be suppressed.

<Feature 81>
When a predetermined winning condition is satisfied (for example, when a first type of jackpot is won), a special gaming state (for example, a probable change schedule) in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state. In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state) occurs, and the special gaming state is configured by combining a plurality of rounds.
It is possible to distribute the game ball to a plurality of areas including a specific area (for example, a privilege area 409V), and it is possible to generate an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the specific area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (for example, distribution mechanism 437) and
A switching mechanism (for example, an upper approach control mechanism 454) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of generating a progressable state in which the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side.
The special gaming state is generated by controlling including the operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism, and when a predetermined round in the special gaming state is started, the switching mechanism shifts to the progressable state. Then, the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side, and the operation control means (for example,) that executes control to enable the game ball to enter the specific area during the approachable period in which the distribution mechanism is in the approachable state. , Main control board 920),
A game state control means (for example, a main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than the case where the game ball does not enter the specific area when the game ball enters the specific area is provided.
A launching operation means that can launch a game ball,
An operation information display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 479) that displays predetermined operation information capable of performing a predetermined input operation when the predetermined round is started and the period shifts to the enterable period.
When the predetermined operation information is displayed by the operable display means, an input operation means (for example, right input lever 810R) capable of executing the predetermined input operation is provided.
The predetermined operation information is displayed in the situation where the predetermined round is being executed, and the hand operating the firing operation by the firing operating means (for example, the firing handle 252) is moved to the input operating means. It is configured so that it is possible to suppress the advancement of a predetermined number or more of game balls to the distribution mechanism side during the execution of the predetermined round (for example, the first round) before the approachable period is reached. A featured gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. A typical conventional pachinko machine is configured to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery is won. As this type of pachinko machine, it is known that the game is diversified by changing the game state that shifts after the special game state depending on whether or not the game ball can enter the privilege area in the special game state. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-188529).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration for allowing the game ball to enter the privilege area.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 81 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably advancing the gaming ball into the privilege area. That is, by displaying predetermined operation information for prompting a predetermined input operation to the input operation means by the operation information display means, the hand operating the launch operation by the launch operation means is moved to the input operation means and the game ball. It is possible to guide the player to stop the firing of the game, and more than the specified number of game balls advance to the distribution mechanism side during the execution of the predetermined round and before the enterable period is reached. Can be suppressed.

<Feature 91>
When a predetermined winning condition is satisfied (for example, when a first type of jackpot is won), a special gaming state (for example, a probable change schedule) in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state. In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state) occurs, and the special gaming state is configured by combining a plurality of rounds.
It is possible to distribute the game ball to a plurality of areas including the privilege area (for example, the privilege area 409V), and it is possible to generate an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (for example, distribution mechanism 437) and
A switching mechanism (for example, an upper approach control mechanism 454) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of generating a progressable state in which the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side.
The switching mechanism is generated when the special gaming state is generated by controlling the distribution mechanism and the operation control of the switching mechanism, and a predetermined round (for example, the first round) in the special gaming state is started. Moves to the advanceable state and advances the game ball to the distribution mechanism side, and controls the game ball so that the game ball can enter the privilege area during the approachable period in which the distribution mechanism takes the enterable state. An operation control means to be executed (for example, a main control board 920) and
When a game ball enters the privilege area, it is provided with a game state control means (for example, a main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than the case where the game ball does not enter the privilege area.
A display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 479) for displaying predetermined display information (for example, treasure 483) when the predetermined round is started and the period shifts to the enterable period.
When the predetermined round is started and the approachable period is entered, after the predetermined display information is displayed, the staging means different from the display means (for example, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R). Is provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub-control board 940) that controls the operation to perform a predetermined effect operation.
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect means is provided so as to be located in front of a game area (for example, a game area 409) into which a game ball flows down, and the predetermined effect operation is executed in the predetermined round.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. A typical conventional pachinko machine is configured to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery is won. As this type of pachinko machine, it is known that the game is diversified by changing the game state that shifts after the special game state depending on whether or not the game ball can enter the privilege area in the special game state. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-188529).

However, there may still be room for improvement in the configuration for performing a suitable effect when it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the privilege area.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature 91 can provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable effect when the gaming ball can be entered into the privilege area. That is, when the predetermined winning condition is satisfied and the game ball can be made to enter the privilege area, the predetermined effect operation is performed by the effect means after the predetermined display information is displayed. Therefore, the display of the predetermined display information by the display means informs the player that the predetermined effect operation of the effect means will occur as a notice, and then the game ball is moved to the privilege area by the predetermined effect operation of the effect means. It becomes possible to inform the player that the player can enter.

Further, since the staging means is provided on the front side of the flow area of the game ball, a predetermined staging operation by the staging means is performed near the player, and the staging is made more conspicuous than the staging by the game area and the members provided on the rear side. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the arrival of a state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area.

<Feature 92>
When a predetermined winning condition is satisfied (for example, when a first type of jackpot is won), a special gaming state (for example, a probable change schedule) in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state. In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state) occurs, and the special gaming state is configured by combining a plurality of rounds.
It is possible to distribute the game ball to a plurality of areas including the privilege area (for example, the privilege area 409V), and it is possible to generate an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (for example, distribution mechanism 437) and
A switching mechanism (for example, an upper approach control mechanism 454) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of generating a progressable state in which the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side.
The special gaming state is generated by controlling including the operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism, and when a predetermined round in the special gaming state is started, the switching mechanism shifts to the progressable state. Then, the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side, and the operation control means (for example,) that executes control to enable the game ball to enter the specific area during the approachable period in which the distribution mechanism is in the approachable state. , Main control board 920),
When a game ball enters the privilege area, it is provided with a game state control means (for example, a main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than the case where the game ball does not enter the privilege area.
A display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 479) for displaying predetermined display information (for example, treasure 483) when the predetermined round is started and the period shifts to the enterable period.
When the predetermined round is started and the period shifts to the enterable period, after the predetermined display information is displayed, an effect different from the display means is controlled to perform a predetermined effect operation. A control means (for example, a sub-control board 940) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect means is provided so as to be located in front of the display means, and the predetermined effect operation is executed in the predetermined round.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable effect when the gaming ball can be made to enter the privilege area. That is, when the predetermined winning condition is satisfied and the game ball can be made to enter the privilege area, the predetermined effect operation is performed by the effect means after the predetermined display information is displayed. Therefore, the display of the predetermined display information by the display means informs the player that the predetermined effect operation of the effect means will occur as a notice, and then the game ball is moved to the privilege area by the predetermined effect operation of the effect means. It becomes possible to inform the player that the player can enter. Further, since the staging means is provided so as to be located in front of the display means, the predetermined staging operation by the staging means is performed closer to the player than the display by the display means, and the predetermined staging operation is performed with the predetermined display information. It can be made more conspicuous than the display of, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the arrival of the time when the game ball can enter the privilege area.

<Feature 93>
When a predetermined winning condition is satisfied (for example, when a first type of jackpot is won), a special gaming state (for example, a probable change schedule) in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state. In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state) occurs, and the special gaming state is configured by combining a plurality of rounds.
It is possible to distribute the game ball to a plurality of areas including the privilege area (for example, the privilege area 409V), and it is possible to generate an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the privilege area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (for example, distribution mechanism 437) and
A switching mechanism (for example, an upper approach control mechanism 454) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of generating a progressable state in which the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side.
The special gaming state is generated by controlling including the operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism, and when a predetermined round in the special gaming state is started, the switching mechanism shifts to the progressable state. Then, the game ball advances to the distribution mechanism side, and the operation control means (for example,) that executes control to enable the game ball to enter the specific area during the approachable period in which the distribution mechanism is in the approachable state. , Main control board 920),
When a game ball enters the privilege area, it is provided with a game state control means (for example, a main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than the case where the game ball does not enter the privilege area.
A display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 479) that displays predetermined display information and predetermined operation information capable of performing a predetermined input operation when the predetermined round is started and the period shifts to the enterable period. When,
A launching operation means (for example, a launching handle 252) capable of launching a game ball, and
When the predetermined operation information is displayed by the display means, an input operation means (for example, right input lever 810R) capable of executing the predetermined input operation is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the input operation means is provided so as to be located in front of the display means, and the predetermined input operation can be executed in the predetermined round.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 93, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable effect when the gaming ball can be made to enter the privilege area. That is, when the predetermined winning conditions are satisfied and the game ball can be entered into the privilege area, the predetermined input operation to the input operation means can be executed after the predetermined operation information is displayed. Can be done. Therefore, by displaying the predetermined display information by the display means, the player is notified that the predetermined operation with respect to the operation input means is possible as a notice, and then, the privilege area is determined by the predetermined effect operation of the operation input means. It becomes possible to inform the player that the game ball can enter. Further, since the operation input means is provided in front of the display means, the predetermined effect operation by the effect means is performed closer to the player than the predetermined display by the display means, and the predetermined effect operation is performed with the predetermined display information. It can be made more conspicuous than the display of, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the arrival of the time when the game ball can enter the privilege area.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 93, the display means may display the predetermined display information and the predetermined operation information without overlapping in time, or partially or wholly overlap in time. It may be displayed in.

<Characteristic A group>
A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a starting port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, the special gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional gaming machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

<Feature A1>
A game in which a predetermined lottery is performed when the starting condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined winning condition is satisfied in the lottery, a special gaming state in which the winning condition in which the gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal gaming state occurs. It ’s a machine,
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays variable identification information and displays display results corresponding to the predetermined lottery, and
A launching operation means (launching operation device 250) capable of launching a game ball, and
It is provided with an operation unit (right input lever 810R, left input lever 810L) that is provided separately from the firing operation means and can execute a predetermined input operation.
It is possible to control the display so that the predetermined display information (treasure 483) is displayed on the display means when the operation unit is moved to the side closer to the display means at a predetermined operation timing. A gaming machine characterized by that.

The gaming machine according to the feature A1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect using an operation unit that can be operated by a player. That is, it is possible to entertain the player with an effect that combines the operation for the operation unit and the display effect of the display means in a state where the interest of the display means is increased based on the operation of moving the operation unit toward the display means. ..

<Feature A2>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
A launching operation means (launching operation device 250) capable of launching a game ball, and
An operation unit provided separately from the launch operation means and capable of executing a predetermined input operation,
A driving force generating means (electromagnets 818R, 819R, 818L, 819L) for generating a driving force for the operation unit is provided.
As the operation unit, a right operation unit (right input lever 810R) that can be operated by the player's right hand, and
A left operation unit (left input lever 810L) that can be operated by the player's left hand is provided.
The driving force generating means is controlled so that the right operation unit and the left operation unit are maintained at a predetermined position (a position where the right input lever 810R and the left input lever 810L are connected) at a predetermined operation timing. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be possible.

If the gaming machine is described in the feature A2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform an effect using an operation unit that can be operated by the player. That is, since the right operation unit and the left operation unit are maintained at predetermined positions at predetermined operation timings by the driving force generating means, it is possible to entertain the player with the effect using the arrangement positions of the two operation units. ..

<Characteristic B group>
A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a starting port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, the special gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional gaming machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

<Feature B1>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
A launching operation means (launching operation device 250) capable of launching a game ball, and
It is provided with an operation unit that is provided separately from the launch operation means and can execute a predetermined input operation.
As the operation unit, a right operation unit (right input lever 810R) that can be operated by the player's right hand, and
A left operation unit (left input lever 810L) that can be operated by the player's left hand is provided.
When the right operation unit is operated with the right hand and the left operation unit is operated with the left hand at a predetermined operation timing, the predetermined display information (treasure 483) is displayed by the predetermined display means (decorative symbol display device 479). A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be capable of display control.

If the gaming machine is described in the feature B1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform an effect using an operation unit that can be operated by the player. That is, when the right operation unit is operated by the player's right hand and the left operation unit is operated by the player's left hand, the display information can be displayed on the display means. Therefore, by not performing the firing operation, it is possible to entertain the player with the effect based on the operation of the operation unit by both hands in the state where the firing of the game ball is stopped.

<Feature B2>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
A launching operation means (launching operation device 250) capable of launching a game ball, and
An input operation means (right input lever 810R, left input lever 810L) provided separately from the launch operation means and capable of executing a predetermined input operation, and
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) for displaying an effect image corresponding to an effect capable of executing an input operation to the input operation means, and a display means (decorative symbol display device 479).
A one-handed participation type effect image corresponding to the case where the display means is controlled and the input operation means is operated with one hand, and a two-handed participation type corresponding to the case where the operation means is operated with both hands. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display control means (sub-control board 940) that at least controls the display of an effect image.

In the case of the gaming machine described in feature B2, as an effect using an input operation means that can be operated by the player, a one-handed participation type effect image corresponding to one-handed operation and a two-handed operation are used. The corresponding two-handed participatory production image can be displayed as a separate image. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player as a special effect of the effect based on the operation of the input operation means by both hands in the state where the launch of the game ball is stopped by not performing the launch operation.

<Feature B3>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
A launching operation means (launching operation device 250) capable of launching a game ball, and
It is provided with an operation unit (right input lever 810R, left input lever 810L) that is provided separately from the firing operation means and can execute a predetermined input operation.
When the operation unit is operated with one hand and when the operation unit is operated with both hands at a predetermined operation timing, the predetermined display information (treasure 483) is provided by the predetermined display means (decorative symbol display device 479). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be capable of display control that makes it different whether or not it is displayed.

If the gaming machine is described in the feature B3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform an effect using an operation unit that can be operated by the player. That is, at a predetermined operation timing, whether or not the display information is displayed on the display means differs depending on whether the operation unit is operated with one hand or the operation unit with both hands. It is possible to make the execution of the production based on the operation rare. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player as a special effect of the effect based on the operation of the operation unit by both hands in the state where the launch of the game ball is stopped by not performing the launch operation.

<Characteristics C to F group>
A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a starting port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, the special gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various effects are performed in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state in the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration for executing the effects.

<Feature C1>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
A movable operation unit (for example, left input lever 810L and right input lever 810R) capable of executing a predetermined input operation, and
When the movement of the operation unit is controlled and a predetermined effect generation condition is satisfied in the normal game state or the special game state (for example, when a two-handed participation type shell split mission effect is selected), the operation unit is operated. A movement control means to move (for example, a sub-control board 940) and
An output operation unit (for example, a left input lever 810L and a right input lever 810R) that can move together with the operation unit and can perform an output operation that produces a predetermined output that can be identified by a sense different from the visual sense. )When,
An output control means (for example, a sub-control board 940) that controls the output operation unit and executes the output operation when the output operation unit is arranged at a position moved from a predetermined position as the operation unit moves. ) And a gaming machine.

<Characteristic C2>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
Movable movable parts (for example, left input lever 810L and right input lever 810R) and
When the movement of the movable portion is controlled and a predetermined effect generation condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state or the special gaming state (for example, when a two-handed participation type shell split mission effect is selected), the movable portion is moved. A movement control means to move (for example, a sub-control board 940) and
An output operation unit that can move together with the movable portion as the movable portion moves and can perform a predetermined output operation that produces a predetermined output that can be identified by a sense different from the visual sense.
An output control means (for example, a sub-control board 940) that controls the output operation unit and executes the output operation when the output operation unit is arranged at a position moved from a predetermined position due to the movement of the movable unit. ) And a gaming machine.

The gaming machines described in the feature C1 and the feature C2 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing the effect. That is, when the movable operation unit or movable unit moves, the output operation unit moves together with the operation unit or movable unit. Therefore, the position of the output operation unit can be changed when a predetermined effect that enables the operation unit or the movable unit to move occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a predetermined output operation from different positions, and it is possible to change the impression of the output given to the player.

In addition, by moving the operation unit and the movable part, the player can pay attention to the operation unit and the movable part, and the output operation by the output operation unit can be executed in the vicinity of the place where the attention is paid. It is also possible to increase the effect.

Further, if the gaming machine is described in the feature C1, the output from the output unit can be executed near the hand performing or trying to perform a predetermined input operation, and the hand performing the input operation can be executed. It is also possible to perform an effect with a weak output in the output from different positions felt by the sense of touch, for example, the feeling of moving a hand, the output of blowing air, heat generation, hitting, and the like. Therefore, the output operation unit can be configured by a small device, and even if the output operation unit is moved together with the operation unit, it becomes easy to secure the mobility of the operation unit.

In addition, the predetermined winning condition in which the special gaming state occurs is a condition based on an electronic lottery such as winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery). It may be a condition based on a lottery by mechanical distribution of the flow destination of the game ball, such as the game ball entering a predetermined area predetermined in the game area in the normal game state, or electronically. The condition may be based on a combination of a typical lottery and a mechanical lottery.

For example, as a configuration in which a special gaming state is generated based on a mechanical lottery, in a pachinko machine provided with a non-specific passage and a specific passage inside a bonus device having an openable / closable entrance, a predetermined winning opening is used. When the game ball enters, the entrance of the accessory device is opened, and the game ball that has entered the accessory device from the opened entrance is guided to the specific passage by the distribution mechanism that divides the non-specific passage and the specific passage. There is a configuration in which a special gaming state occurs when the player enters the specific passage. Further, as a configuration in which a special gaming state is generated based on a combination of an electronic lottery and a mechanical lottery, in a pachinko machine equipped with a variable winning device having a non-specific passage and a specific passage inside, in a special symbol lottery. When a predetermined small hit, which is a kind of non-winning, is selected, the game ball can enter the variable winning device in the normal gaming state, and the game ball entering the variable winning device can enter the non-specific passage and the specific passage. A configuration in which a special gaming state is generated when the player is guided to a specific passage by a distribution mechanism and enters the specific passage can be mentioned.

<Feature D1>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
An operation unit (for example, a left input lever 810L and a right input lever 810R) capable of executing a predetermined input operation and changing its form,
The operation unit controls the morphological change of the operation unit, and when a predetermined effect generation condition is satisfied in the normal game state or the special game state (for example, when a two-handed participation type shell split mission effect is selected). The form is provided with a form control means (for example, a sub-control board 940) for changing the form of the above from the first form to the second form different from the first form.
At least a part of the operation unit is a movable unit (for example, left input) capable of performing an operation different from the operation of the process of changing from the first form to the second form when the second form is taken. It is composed of a lever 810L and a right input lever 810R).
A gaming machine characterized in that the movable portion is configured to be movable in at least a part of the case where the operating portion takes the second form.

The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or the feature D2 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing the effect. That is, when the movable portion as at least a part of the operating portion takes the second form, it moves in an operation different from the operation in the process of changing from the first form to the second form. Therefore, it is possible to change the operation feeling of the input operation depending on whether the movable portion moves or not, or to perform an effect different from the input operation by moving the movable portion. Will be possible. Further, by moving the entire operation unit at high speed, the shape of the operation unit does not change, but it is possible to make it appear as if the shape of the operation unit has changed due to the afterimage phenomenon.

<Feature E1>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
An operation unit (for example, the left input lever 810L and the right input lever 810R) capable of executing a predetermined input operation and changing the form, and
When the morphological change of the operation unit is controlled and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state or the special gaming state (for example, when the two-handed participation type shell split mission effect is selected), the operation unit A morphological control means for changing the morphology from the first morphology to a second morphology different from the first morphology,
The input limiting means which can prevent or invalidate the predetermined input operation is provided.
When the operation unit takes at least one of the first form and the second form, the input limiting means does not block or invalidate the predetermined input operation, and is based on the form controlling means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to prevent or invalidate the predetermined input operation in at least a part of the change process of the operation unit.

If it is the gaming machine described in the feature E1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing the effect. That is, in the state that the operation unit can take (from the state before the change by the form control means in the first form to the state after the final change by the form control means in the second form), a predetermined input operation is performed on the operation unit. A state that is not blocked or invalidated and a state that is blocked or invalidated can be expressed. Therefore, the role of the operation unit can be changed according to the change in the state of the operation unit. Therefore, the operation feeling and operation direction are different from those in the case where the operation unit is specialized for input by a predetermined input operation without changing the state of the operation unit, or the state of the operation unit is changed and specialized for input. A multi-purpose function that allows the operation unit to play multiple different roles by inputting a predetermined input operation with, or by blocking or disabling the predetermined input operation and specializing in the production by changing the state of the operation unit. Can be a department.

<Feature F1>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
An operation unit (for example, a left input lever 810L and a right input lever 810R) capable of executing a predetermined input operation and changing its form,
The operation unit controls the morphological change of the operation unit, and when a predetermined effect generation condition is satisfied in the normal game state or the special game state (for example, when a two-handed participation type shell split mission effect is selected). The form is provided with a form control means (for example, a sub-control board 940) for changing the form of the above from the first form to the second form different from the first form.
At least a part of the operation unit is composed of a movable unit (for example, a left input lever 810L and a right input lever 810R) capable of operating in the process of changing from the first form to the second form.
The form control means changes its form from the first form to the second form in a situation where a predetermined input operation is continued for the operation unit, and the form changes to the second form. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation of the movable portion can be controlled so that the morphological change further progresses from the second form to the first form after the change.

<Feature F2>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
An operation unit (for example, a left input lever 810L and a right input lever 810R) capable of executing a predetermined input operation and changing its form,
The operation unit controls the morphological change of the operation unit, and when a predetermined effect generation condition is satisfied in the normal game state or the special game state (for example, when a two-handed participation type shell split mission effect is selected). The form is provided with a form control means (for example, a sub-control board 940) for changing the form of the above from the first form to the second form different from the first form.
At least a part of the operation unit is composed of a movable unit (for example, a left input lever 810L and a right input lever 810R) capable of operating in the process of changing from the first form to the second form.
The form control means detects the predetermined input operation to the operation unit and controls the operation of the movable unit so that the form change proceeds from the first form to the second form. The operation of the movable unit is controlled so that the first control and the predetermined input operation to the operation unit are detected and the morphological change proceeds from the second form to the first form. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least execute a second control.

Features According to the gaming machines described in F1 and F2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect using an operation unit. That is, since the morphological change of the operation unit progresses on the condition of a predetermined input operation to the operation unit, it is possible to determine whether or not to proceed with the morphological change of the operation unit by the operation of the player. The progress of the morphological change can be identified not only by the appearance but also by the tactile sensation of the player to the operation unit. Therefore, either proceed with the game while feeling the change in the form of the operation unit without visually recognizing the variable display, or switch the target to be watched from the variable display to the operation unit and then visually check the state of the change in the form of the game. It is possible to provide a hobby of staging that involves a change in form with a simple operation according to the situation intended by the player, such as whether or not to perform it.

In addition, at least one feature described in features 10 to F2 may be applied in combination with any other feature or a plurality of other features. The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied.

Pachinko machine: A launching operation means operated by a player, a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launching operating means, a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined gaming area, and a pachinko machine. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the gaming area, and grants a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: A player starts the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the starting operation means, stops the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and responds to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as ball gaming machines.

10 ... left movable member, 11 ... rear side decorative part, 20 ... right movable member, 30 ... light source, 31 ... light emitting substrate, 32L, 32R ... LED element (light emitting means), 40 ... light emitting space, 41 ... front member, 42 ... rear member, 50 ... front side decorative part, 50B ... back surface (rear side light output means), 51 ... front window, 52 ... decorative plate, 61 ... rear window, 61B ... front surface (other direction reflecting means), 62 ... light Entry window, 63 ... left connection, 64 ... right connection, 100 ... pachinko machine, 102 ... front block, 250 ... launch operation device, 252 ... launch handle (launch operation means), 400 ... game board, 401 ... base, 409 ... Game area, 409L ... Left flow area (first area), 409R ... Right flow area (second area), 409V ... Bonus area (specific area), 409E ... Entrance part, 409N ... Non-privilege area, 420 ... Center Structure, 434 ... Upper prize winning device, 437 ... Distribution mechanism, 437A ... Distribution shutter, 434 ... Upper prize winning device, 444 ... Upper prize winning switch, 448 ... Specific passage switch, 454 ... Upper entry restriction mechanism, 454A ... Entry control shutter, 464 ... Top approach control motor, 465 ... Distribution solenoid, 479 ... Decorative symbol display device (display means, operation information display means), 481 ... Front wall, 484S ... Right grip operation instruction information (predetermined operation) Information), 484D ... Connection operation instruction information (predetermined operation information), 494 ... Guide passage, 700 ... Game board, 710 ... Reflective decoration (reflection means), 711 ... Reflection decoration part, 712 ... Passing part, 712a ... Flat Region, 712b ... Projection decorative area, 712S ... Decorative surface, 713 ... Reflection part, 719 ... Reflective decoration support part, 720 ... Circular arrangement light source, 720a ... Lower left light source, 720b ... Lower right light source, 721 ... Circular arrangement substrate, 721a ... Lower left substrate, 722a ... LED element, 730 ... Central light source, 731 ... Central substrate, 732 ... LED element, 740 ... Circular decorative body, 741 ... Movable decoration part, 741a ... Lower left movable decoration part, 742 ... Rotating decoration Part, 749 ... Circular decorative support part, 750 ... Central decorative body, 751 ... Central decorative part, 752 ... Frame part, 753 ... Decorative member, 754 ... Scattering member, 920 ... Main control board, 940 ... Sub control board (control means) , Movement control means, output operation control means, morphology control means, input limiting means), 801L ... left input operation device, 801R ... right input operation device, 802L ... left support mechanism, 802R ... right support mechanism, 804L ... left lever movement Regulator, 804R ... Right lever movement regulator, 810L ... Left input lever (input operation means, light source, operation unit), 810R ... Right input lever (Input operation means, effect means, operation unit), 811L ... left grip wall, 811R ... right grip wall, 812L ... left operation member, 812R ... right operation member, 813L ... left covering wall, 813R ... right covering wall, 818L ... Upper electromagnet, 818R ... upper electromagnet, 819L ... lower electromagnet, 819R ... lower electromagnet, 820L ... left support stand, 820R ... right support stand, 823L ... left outer support arm, 823R ... right outer support arm, 826L ... left inner Support arm, 826R ... Right inner support arm, 831L ... Left lever rotation drive motor, 831R ... Right lever rotation drive motor, 838L ... Left connection operation detection switch, 838R ... Right connection operation detection switch, 839L ... Left connection state detection switch, 839R ... Right connection state detection switch, 841L ... Left lever regulation member, 841R ... Right lever regulation member, 851L ... Left lever front / rear movement mechanism, 851R ... Right lever front / rear movement mechanism, 852L ... Left lever front / rear movement drive motor, 852R ... Right Lever forward / backward movement drive motor

Claims (2)

A gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs in which, when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, a winning condition in which a gaming value is given is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal gaming state.
An operation unit that can execute predetermined input operations and can change its form,
A second form that controls the form change of the operation unit and is different from the first form to the first form when a predetermined effect generation condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state or the special gaming state. Equipped with a morphological control means that changes the morphology of
At least a part of the operation unit is composed of a movable unit capable of performing an operation different from the operation of the process of changing from the first form to the second form when the second form is taken.
A gaming machine characterized in that the movable portion is configured to be movable in at least a part of the case where the operating portion takes the second form. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

Images